Egcp3 MC

Operation Manual
EGCP-3
Engine Generator Control Package
MC (Master Control) Model
Manual 26195B
WARNING
Read this entire manual and all other publications pertaining to the work to be
performed before installing, operating, or servicing this equipment. Practice all
plant and safety instructions and precautions. Failure to follow instructions can
cause personal injury and/or property damage.
The engine, turbine, or other type of prime mover should be equipped with an
overspeed shutdown device to protect against runaway or damage to the prime
mover with possible personal injury, loss of life, or property damage.
The overspeed shutdown device must be totally independent of the prime mover
control system. An overtemperature or overpressure shutdown device may also be
needed for safety, as appropriate.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to a control system that uses an alternator or battery-charging
device, make sure the charging device is turned off before disconnecting the
battery from the system.
Electronic controls contain static-sensitive parts. Observe the following

precautions to prevent damage to these parts.
• Discharge body static before handling the control (with power to the control
turned off, contact a grounded surface and maintain contact while handling the
control).
• Avoid all plastic, vinyl, and Styrofoam (except antistatic versions) around
printed circuit boards.
• Do not touch the components or conductors on a printed circuit board with
your hands or with conductive devices.
IMPORTANT DEFINITIONS
WARNING—indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could
result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION—indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could

result in damage to equipment.
NOTE—provides other helpful information that does not fall under the warning or
caution categories.
Revisions—Text changes are indicated by a black line alongside the text.
Woodward Governor Company reserves the right to update any portion of this publication at any time. Information
provided by Woodward Governor Company is believed to be correct and reliable. However, no responsibility is
assumed by Woodward Governor Company unless otherwise expressly undertaken.
© Woodward 2002
All Rights Reserved
Manual 26195 EGCP-3 MC Operation
Contents
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE AWARENESS ................................................. IV

CHAPTER 1. GENERAL INFORMATION ........................................................... 1
Introduction.............................................................................................................1
Application Overview ..............................................................................................2
Control Overview ....................................................................................................5
CHAPTER 2. FRONT PANEL OPERATOR INTERFACE ...................................... 7
Introduction.............................................................................................................7
Keypad....................................................................................................................8
Navigation Procedure ...........................................................................................12
Alarms and Events ...............................................................................................17
Status Menus........................................................................................................19
Security Access ....................................................................................................32
Entering and Changing Values.............................................................................33
Configuration Menus ............................................................................................33
CHAPTER 3. CONTROL CONFIGURATION .................................................... 34
Introduction...........................................................................................................34
Parameter Descriptions........................................................................................37
MC Configuration Menu’s.....................................................................................39
MC Service Menus ...............................................................................................48
CHAPTER 4. MONITORING BY WATCH WINDOW .......................................... 93
Introduction...........................................................................................................93
Sequence States Menu ........................................................................................93
Units Menu ...........................................................................................................93
LON Status Messaging Menu ..............................................................................94
01 Status System Menu .......................................................................................95
02 Status Bus Menu .............................................................................................96
03 Status Mains Menu..........................................................................................97
04 Status I/O Menu...............................................................................................98
05 Status Synchronizer Menu ..............................................................................99
06 Status KW Load Menu ....................................................................................99
07 Status PF/KVAR Menu ..................................................................................100
08 Status Sequencing Menu ..............................................................................101
09 Status ATS Menu ..........................................................................................101
10 Status Alarms Menu ......................................................................................102
11 Status Metering Menu ...................................................................................102
CHAPTER 5. STARTUP CHECKOUT PROCEDURES ..................................... 104
Before Starting....................................................................................................104
CHAPTER 6. CALIBRATION PROCEDURES................................................. 108
Factory Calibrations............................................................................................108
AC Voltage Inputs...............................................................................................108
AC Current Inputs...............................................................................................108
Analog Inputs......................................................................................................109
Analog Outputs...................................................................................................109
CHAPTER 7. MODE CONTROL SWITCH ..................................................... 110
Introduction.........................................................................................................110
Auto Mode ..........................................................................................................110
Process Mode.....................................................................................................110
VAR/PF Mode.....................................................................................................110
Woodward i
EGCP-3 MC Operation Manual 26195
Contents
CHAPTER 8. APPLICATION OVERVIEW ......................................................111

Alarm Logic........................................................................................................ 111
Synchronizer...................................................................................................... 112
Real Load Controller.......................................................................................... 113
Reactive Load Controller ................................................................................... 114
Process Controller ............................................................................................. 115
CHAPTER 9. ALARMS, PROTECTIVE RELAY, AND DIAGNOSTIC SUMMARY ..116
Introduction ........................................................................................................ 116
Alarm List........................................................................................................... 117
Protective Relaying—Definite Time................................................................... 120
Protective Relaying—Inverse Time ................................................................... 124
Inverse Time Curve ........................................................................................... 129
Diagnostics ........................................................................................................ 132
Status Indicators................................................................................................ 135
CHAPTER 10. SYNCHRONIZER DESCRIPTION ............................................136
Introduction ........................................................................................................ 136
Functional Description ....................................................................................... 136
CHAPTER 11. REAL LOAD CONTROL DESCRIPTION...................................143
Introduction ........................................................................................................ 143
Optional Load Functions.................................................................................... 146
CHAPTER 12. REACTIVE LOAD CONTROL DESCRIPTION ............................147
Introduction ........................................................................................................ 147
Optional Reactive Load Functions .................................................................... 152
CHAPTER 13. PROCESS CONTROL DESCRIPTION ......................................153
Introduction ........................................................................................................ 153
Optional Process Functions .............................................................................. 156
CHAPTER 14. SEQUENCING .....................................................................159
Introduction ........................................................................................................ 159
CHAPTER 15. LON (LOCAL NETWORK) DESCRIPTION ..............................160
Introduction ........................................................................................................ 160
CHAPTER 16. DEMAND CONTROL DESCRIPTION .......................................164
Introduction ........................................................................................................ 164
CHAPTER 17. AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH DESCRIPTION ....................169
Introduction ........................................................................................................ 169
CHAPTER 18. LS-MC MAINS PARALLEL APPLICATION .............................184
CHAPTER 19. LS-MC MAINS PARALLEL ATS APPLICATION .....................186
CHAPTER 20. LS-MC MAINS PARALLEL, SPLIT BUS APPLICATION ..........188
CHAPTER 21. ACRONYMS ........................................................................190
ii Woodward
Contents
CHAPTER 22. SERVICE OPTIONS ............................................................. 191

Product Service Options.....................................................................................191
Returning Equipment for Repair.........................................................................192
Replacement Parts .............................................................................................193
How to Contact Woodward.................................................................................193
Engineering Services .........................................................................................194
Technical Assistance..........................................................................................195
EGCP-3 MC CONTROL SPECIFICATIONS ................................................. 197
Illustrations and Tables
Figure 2-1a. EGCP-3 Front Panel & Operator Interface ........................................7

Figure 2-1b. Keypad ...............................................................................................8
Figure 2-2a EGCP-3 Navigation (1) .....................................................................12
Figure 2-2b. EGCP-3 Navigation (2) ....................................................................13
Figure 2-2c. EGCP-3 Navigation (3) ....................................................................14
Figure 2-2d. EGCP-3 Navigation (4) ....................................................................15
Figure 2-2e. EGCP-3 Navigation (5) ....................................................................16
Figure 3-1. Navigation in Configure Mode ...........................................................35
Figure 8-1. Alarm Logic Block Diagram .............................................................111
Figure 8-2. Synchronizer Block Diagram ...........................................................112
Figure 8-3. Load Control Block Diagram............................................................113
Figure 8-4. VAR / Power Factor Control Block Diagram....................................114
Figure 8-5. Process Control Block Diagram.......................................................115
Figure 9-1. Over Voltage/Under Voltage Alarm .................................................121
Figure 9-2. Over Power/Reverse Power ............................................................125
Figure 9-3. Over Power/Reverse Power Time Delay.........................................126
Figure 9-4. Voltage Restrained Over Current ....................................................127
Figure 9-5. Phase Current Imbalance ................................................................128
Figure 9-6. Phase-Balance Current, Inverse Time Delay ..................................129
Figure 9-7. Inverse Curve Time Delay, Level Shift ............................................131
Figure 9-8. Inverse Curve Time Delay, Linear Graph ........................................131
Figure 10-1. Synchronizer Action Time-Line......................................................141
Figure 13-1. Indirect and direct process control action ......................................154
Figure 15-1. LON Bus Configuration ..................................................................160
Figure 15-2. LON Bus Configuration, with Mains Tie(s) ....................................161
Figure 16-1. Bode Diagram of Three Filters.......................................................165
Figure 16-2. Demand Filter with Different Time Coefficients .............................165
Figure 16-3. Demand Profile with Start and Stop Levels ...................................167
Table 2-1. Security Access Codes .......................................................................33

Table 3-1. Front Panel Menu ↔ Watch Window Sheet .......................................37
Table 3-2. Alarm Action Definitions ......................................................................38
Woodward iii
Electrostatic Discharge Awareness

All electronic equipment is static-sensitive, some components more than others.
To protect these components from static damage, you must take special
precautions to minimize or eliminate electrostatic discharges.
Follow these precautions when working with or near the control.
1. Before doing maintenance on the electronic control, discharge the static

electricity on your body to ground by touching and holding a grounded metal
object (pipes, cabinets, equipment, etc.).
2. Avoid the build-up of static electricity on your body by not wearing clothing
made of synthetic materials. Wear cotton or cotton-blend materials as much
as possible because these do not store static electric charges as much as
synthetics.
3. Keep plastic, vinyl, and Styrofoam materials (such as plastic or Styrofoam

cups, cup holders, cigarette packages, cellophane wrappers, vinyl books or
folders, plastic bottles, and plastic ash trays) away from the control, the
modules, and the work area as much as possible.
4. Do not remove the printed circuit board (PCB) from the control cabinet
unless absolutely necessary. If you must remove the PCB from the control
cabinet, follow these precautions:
• Do not touch any part of the PCB except the edges.
• Do not touch the electrical conductors, the connectors, or the

components with conductive devices or with your hands.
• When replacing a PCB, keep the new PCB in the plastic antistatic
protective bag it comes in until you are ready to install it. Immediately
after removing the old PCB from the control cabinet, place it in the
antistatic protective bag.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to electronic components caused by improper handling,
read and observe the precautions in Woodward manual 82715, Guide for
Handling and Protection of Electronic Controls, Printed Circuit Boards, and
Modules.
iv Woodward
Chapter 1.
General Information
Introduction
This manual describes the Woodward EGCP-3 Engine Generator Control
Package, Master Control (MC) model, part number 8406-114. It provides
description, operation, tuning, and troubleshooting information for EGCP-3 MC
digital controls. The details on installation, wiring, communication, Regulatory
Notes and Warnings are in the EGCP-3 Installation Manual 26122. The EGCP-
3 MC is intended for power generator applications where multiple EGCP-3s will
control generators that supply buses, which can operate in parallel with a Utility
(Mains). The EGCP-3 MC can perform start/stop commands, monitor group and
mains breaker status and control real and reactive load operation of any EGCP-3
LoadShare (LS) control. The EGCP-3 MC can control the operation of up to 15
gensets, which can be located on multiple bus segments and will coordinate with
other MC controls for multiple utility tie bus configurations.
WARNING
Protective Earth (PE) must be connected to the termination point on the
backside of the unit next to the label with the symbol (or 1 of 3 other
like termination points without label) to reduce the risk of electric shock.
This connection will be made using a thread-forming screw. The conductor
providing the connection must have a properly sized ring lug and wire larger
than or equal to 4 mm² (12 AWG).
WARNING
The calibration and checkout procedure should only be performed by
authorized personnel knowledgeable of the risks posed by live electrical
equipment.
WARNING
The installation must include the following:
• The power supply mains should be properly fused according to the
installation instructions and the appropriate wiring requirements.
• A switch or circuit breaker must be included in the building installation
in close proximity to the equipment and within easy reach of the
operator, and must be clearly marked as the disconnecting device for
the equipment. The switch or circuit breaker will only remove power to
the unit—hazardous voltages may still be connected to other terminals
on the unit.
Woodward 1
Application Overview
The EGCP-3 MC is a microprocessor-based control designed to supervise and
control switchgear and gensets operated by EGCP-3 LS units. The MC is a field
configurable control, which allows a single design to be used in many different
power generation configurations and eliminates the need for extensive PLC
supervisory control systems. It used menu driven software to instruct site
engineers on programming the control to a specific bus/utility configuration. The
MC is designed to be the interface between the utility and the local plant.
MC Features
• Display/Keypad Interface, local setup/monitoring or remote HMI

• Master/Slave sequencing relationships between 16 units
• Synchronizing of up to 2 breakers with speed, phase, voltage matching,
token passing for dead bus closure, and multiple unit synchronizing
• KW Control with automatic generator loading and unloading for bumpless
load transfer
• BaseLoad load control capability
• Import/export or process control
• KVAR/PF Control
• ATS control, open or closed transition
• Peak shaving/sharing control with automatic start/stop based on time of day
or demand level.
• Built in diagnostics
• Bus and Mains Protective Relaying
• Bus and Mains Power & Energy Metering and Monitoring
• Multiple unit LON communication
• Modbus® * and ServLink communications for remote HMI/PLC connections
*—Modbus is a trademark of Modicon, Inc.
Front Panel Display

The MC is equipped with a keypad and two 4-line display panels on the front
cabinet mounted chassis. The display can be used to configure and set up the
control for site-specific requirements. The display is also used to monitor
operation and view alarm data.
Communications
Remote monitoring equipment can be interfaced to the MC with Modbus or
Woodward ServLink tools. Three serial communications ports are available on
the MC. Two of these ports are dedicated for Modbus or ServLink and the third is
configurable for either interface. All functions performed and parameters
monitored by the front panel, as well as additional configurables, are available
through the three serial ports. These ports can be configured to use with
Woodward Watch Window software or an external HMI with Modbus
communication, or ServLink DDE software.
Inter EGCP-3 communications are performed by LON interface. The two-wire

communications channel is used to deliver sequencing; real and reactive load
control and configuration messages between units for control purposes.
2 Woodward
Power and Energy Metering

The MC digital control is equipped with industrial grade power and energy
metering capability. Digital signal processing techniques are used to provide
significantly improved accuracy and speed of response over conventional analog
measurement techniques. Accuracy is improved using rapid sampling of the
voltage and current signal waveforms and developing a true RMS measurement.
Measuring true RMS power allows optimal accuracy, even in the presence of
power line distortions. PT and CT inputs of both the bus and mains are used for
calculation of power and energy. The algorithms used are based on IEEE 1459-
2000.
For the bus and mains the following power parameters are calculated:
• Frequency (Hz)
• AC Voltage (Vac)
• Phase and Total Current (Amps)
• Phase and Total PF
• Real Power (W)
• Reactive Power (VAR)
• Apparent Power (VA)
• Current and Voltage Phase Angle
• Voltage harmonics
• Current harmonics
• Total Harmonic Distortion (Voltage and Current)
• Negative Phase Sequence Voltage (Vac)
• Negative Phase Sequence Current (Amps)
Additionally the energy at the utility PT’s and CT’s is calculated for:
• Import and Export kW-Hours
• Import and Export kVAR-Hours
• Import and Export kVA-Hours
Many of these parameters are also available as analog outputs to be used by

other devices.
Protective Relaying
Industrial grade protective relaying functionality can be configured for both bus
and mains parameters (i.e. Over Current, Under Voltage). Time delay, and
separate warning and trip thresholds can be configured. Current based
protections can also be coordinated with external protective equipment by
adjusting the available ANSI/IEEE C37.112 Very Inverse curve used in all current
protection functions. The complete list of the MC’s protective relays and their
functionality is provided in the Protective Relaying Chapter.
Woodward 3
Peaking and Demand Operation

Peaking and demand operation is available through two modes of operation; time
of day or plant load demand. The control can also be configured to operate in
both modes of operation. For time of day operation the MC can be programmed
for four different start and stop schedules. Each day of the week can then be set
for one of the four schedules, and each schedule has two independent start
times within a 24-hour period. An independent length of run time is set for each
start time. At the scheduled time, the MC will start all of the LS units in its control
and perform synchronization of these units based on the ATS status; Parallel (No
ATS Mode), Open Transition or Closed Transition. When the run time has
expired, the MC will perform a stop or ATS return and shutdown the LS units.
Load Demand level operation is dependant on the imported apparent power (VA)
level through the mains breaker. The demand level is filtered by a configurable
lowpass filter and then passed to the demand logic. Two start levels and one
stop level are available. If the demand becomes larger than the demand start
level, the MC will initiate its demand start timer. If the demand remains above the
start level when the timer expires, the MC will start one of the LS units in its
control. There is also an instant demand level. If the demand becomes higher
than this level, the MC will ignore the timer and immediately start the next LS
unit. The LS units will run at the selected load mode and level of the MC
(BaseLoad or Process). When the mains import falls below the demand stop
level the MC will initiate the demand timer. If the demand is still below the stop
level when the timer expires, one of the LS units will be stopped. For more
information on peaking and demand operation, see Chapter 16.
Sequencing
The MC control can initiate two different start or stop commands based on the
current control situation. For most control operations the MC will issue a START
ALL or STOP ALL command, which will start all LS units in its control. For load
demand starts, the MC will issue a START REQUEST or STOP REQUEST,
which will start/stop a single LS unit. If the MC is not in control (LS units are
controlling load without the mains (ATS)) or if the MC is in process control, the
LS units will sequence themselves based on the Run Time Manager and their
load levels. For more information on the sequencing feature of the MC, see
Chapter 14.
Automatic Power Transfer Switch (ATS)

The ATS function in the MC has several different modes of operation depending
on the configured type (Open Transition or Closed Transition) and the digital
inputs asserted (Auto, Test and Run). By asserting the Auto and Test digital
inputs (Test ATS), an open transition will simulate a Loss of Mains situation,
which will open the mains breaker before starting the LS units. For a closed
transition the LS units will be paralleled to the mains and will attempt to create a
zero power transfer (ZPT) across the mains breaker. The mains breaker will not
be opened unless ZPT is achieved. By asserting the Auto, Test and Run w/Load
digital inputs a normal ATS function will be initiated (Initiate ATS). If a group
breaker is configured on the system, an open transition will wait until the LS units
are on the bus and stable before the mains is opened. The MC will wait for a fast
transfer delay time before the group breaker will be closed. Without a group
breaker the ATS will behave exactly like the Test ATS function. The closed
transition will parallel all LS units to the mains and will open the mains at the end
of the fast transfer delay time even if ZPT is not achieved.
4 Woodward
The MC also has a Load Shed feature. Three load shed digital outputs can be
configured to remove sections of load from the bus if under frequency and under
voltage conditions occur or if ZPT does not occur. The details of ATS
functionality are explained extensively in Chapter 17.
Control Overview
Synchronizer
The EGCP-3 MC control uses digital signal processing techniques to derive both
true RMS voltages and the relative phase of the fundamental frequencies of the
bus and mains voltage wave forms. Digital signal processing techniques offer
significantly improved measurement accuracy in the presence of waveform
distortions, particularly since the phase measurement does not depend on zero
crossings of the waveforms.
The MC synchronizer has two modes of synchronization, Phase Matching or

Slip-frequency.
Phase matching controls the bus frequency to give zero speed error and
minimize phase error between the mains and bus; this provides rapid
synchronizing for critical standby power applications. Slip-frequency
synchronizing guarantees a fixed speed difference between bus and the mains.
For both synchronizing methods, the MC control uses actual slip frequency and
breaker delay values to anticipate a minimum phase difference between bus and
mains at actual breaker closure.
Additionally there are four modes of operation:

1. Run—Actively attempts to synchronize and will send breaker closure
command
2. Check—Actively attempts to synchronize but will not issue closure command
3. Permissive—Does not attempt to synchronize but will issue breaker closure
command if synchronizer is within voltage, speed and phase limits
4. Off—No synchronization occurs
Additional synchronizer features include: deadbus closures, voltage matching,

time delayed automatic multi-shot reclosing, and a synchronizer timeout alarm.
Real Load Control

The MC control real load control has three modes of operation:
1. BaseLoad—Real load of LS units is controlled at a configured load setpoint.
2. Import/Export—Real load across mains breaker is maintained at a
configured import or export level
3. Process—Real load is controlled based on an external process input or
reference setpoint
The MC control provides digital inputs to allow raising or lowering the internal
BaseLoad or Process reference and a 4–20 mA (or 1–5 Vdc) analog input for
remote load setpoint. Loading and unloading rates are available for smooth
adjustment of both load reference and load command and these ramping rates
can be set to zero any time the Ramp Pause digital input is activated.
Woodward 5
Process Control
A process controller is provided for cogeneration, import/export control,
temperature maintenance, pressure maintenance, or other applications. An
adjustable bandwidth input filter, flexible controller adjustments, an adjustable
deadband, and direct or indirect control action, allow the process control to be
used in a wide variety of applications.
A 4–20 mA (or 1–5 Vdc) process transmitter provides the process signal to the
EGCP-3 control. The control includes an internal digital process reference which
may be controlled by raise and lower switch contact inputs or by an external 4–
20 mA (or 1–5 Vdc) remote process reference, or by a Modbus or ServLink
communication interface. The output of the process control provides a load
reference to the Real Load controller.
Adjustable ramps allow smooth entry to or exit from the process control mode.
When the process control mode is selected, an adjustable ramp moves the load
reference in a direction to reduce the process control error. When the error is
minimized, or the reference first reaches either the specified high or low load
pick-up limits, the process controller is activated. When a minimum or maximum
limit is reached, the control will hold the load reference at that limit until process
input is returned to a level for safe operation.
When unloading from the process control, an adjustable unload ramp provides
time controlled unloading to the unload trip level. When load reaches the unload
trip level, the EGCP-3 control automatically issues a group breaker open
command or a Stop all command to remove the LS units from the system. The
ramp pause switch input allows holding of the load ramp for cool-down or warm-
up purposes.
Additional functions include selectable and adjustable process high and low limit
switches and alarm activation.
VAR/PF Control
The VAR/PF functions control the reactive power component exported or
imported to the system mains. The reactive load mode can be configured for
VAR or PF control. The controller compares the measured reactive load with an
adjustable internal reference and makes corrections to the PF command sent to
the LS units until the desired reactive power is obtained. The reactive power level
can be maintained while also controlling real load through the mains breaker.
The MC control also provides switch inputs to allow raising or lowering the
reactive load reference, and provides a 4–20 mA (or 1–5 Vdc) analog input for
remote VAR/PF setpoint control, if desired. The kVAR/PF reference can also be
set through a Modbus or ServLink DDE communication interface.
6 Woodward
Chapter 2.
Front Panel Operator Interface
Introduction
The EGCP-3 Operator Interface is designed for simplicity and redundancy of
function in all operating modes. Two backlit LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) screens
are used to display various operating and status information to the operator, as
well as for configuration of setpoints. This chapter is intended to show the
operation of and features available though the EGCP-3 display. The function of
the configurable items shown here are described in more detail in following
chapter(s).
NOTE
The EGCP-3 Operator Interface can only be used for unit configuration and
monitoring. Unit start/stop, sync, or mode selection commands cannot be
given through the EGCP-3’s front panel.
The unit’s front panel screens provide eight lines of status information, with the
option of displaying four lines of configuration or Alarm Log information. These
screens allow the user to monitor and tune related parameters at the same time.
Figure 2-1a. EGCP-3 Front Panel & Operator Interface
Woodward 7
Keypad
Figure 2-1b. Keypad
There are three modes of keypad/display operation: Alarm, Configure, and

Status. To go into one of these modes, simply press the key named with that
mode. The Alarm and Configure menus only appear on the right hand screen,
the left hand screen will continue showing the Status menu for that screen. When
the Status key is pressed both screens will display status menus.
Alarm/Event, Status, and Configuration Keys:

These three keys determine the type of menus being displayed by the EGCP-3.
ALARM / EVENT
The ALARM/EVENT KEY is used to access the alarm and

event menu in the right hand display screen. When pressed once, this key will
cause the right hand LCD display to show the current active alarm(s) and the
time of the alarm occurrence. Press the scroll down to view more alarms, End of
List will be display after the last alarm. If pressed twice, this key will cause the
right hand LCD display to show the latest alarm in the complete ALARM
HISTORY log of the generator set. As confirmation, the top line of the display will
indicate when the alarm history is being displayed. Press the scroll down to view
previous alarms and their occurrence time and date. Press CONFIG or STATUS
to exit the ALARM/EVENT mode. The ALARM CLEAR function is active while
viewing the active alarm screen and the proper security code entered. The
acknowledge function is available from all modes.
8 Woodward
STATUS
i
The STATUS KEY, when pressed, will put both left and
right LCD into the monitor display mode. The status displays provide information
about different items of MC operation. See the STATUS MENU keys, below for
details on the various status keys. There are no adjustment values in the status
display mode. The left screen portion of the active status screen will remain for
monitoring when the Alarm or Configure mode is selected. The Scroll Up, and
Scroll Down are the only navigation keys active in the Status mode,
CONFIG
...
The CONFIG KEY will send the right hand LCD into the
configuration mode, and if not already entered, ask a security code to be
entered. After a proper code is entered, the Configuration menu items will be
displayed in the right hand screen. Status information will continue to be
displayed in the left hand screen. Since there are various menu items and
adjustments in the configuration menu, a blinking cursor is provided in the right
hand display to indicate the value may be adjusted.
Alarm/Event Keys
ALARM CLEAR
The ALARM CLEAR KEY is used to acknowledge and

clear alarm events from the current event status log. Events are never cleared
from the history log. When pressed, this key will silence the AUDIBLE ALARM (if
present). When pressed a second time this key will clear all alarms that are no
longer active. When an active alarm is cleared (Reset), the action(s) associated
with the alarm event will also be cleared from the control logic.
Navigation and Adjustment Keys
SCROLL
The SCROLL KEY is used to move the screen’s cursor up,

down, left and right by pressing the respective corner of the scroll diamond. In
the Status mode and Alarm mode the Up and Down Scroll will change the screen
to the next set of parameters or Alarms. This key is also used to increment and
decrement values while in a Component Value Menu of the Configuration menu.
Woodward 9
ESC
The ESCAPE KEY is used to move upwards (out of) the

configuration menu levels. It also is used when tuning a value to restore the
previous value, if the new value is not entered into memory (see the enter key,
below). The ESCAPE KEY has no function in the Alarm mode or Status mode
ENTER
The ENTER KEY is used to move downwards (into) the

configuration menu levels. It is also used when tuning a value to enter the new
value to memory. The ENTER KEY has no function in the Alarm mode or Status
mode.
Status Menu Keys

The following keys can be pressed to display the respective unit information.
Many of the Status menus have more than one screen. Pressing the Scroll
Up/Down key will show more parameters in the same group.
SYSTEM
Press the SYSTEM STATUS key to display general

system status information. The system status display is also the default status
display screen (it is always the first display shown after a power up of the
control). This display shows general information about the operation of the MC.
There are two System status screens.
ENGINE
ENGINE STATUS is not available on the MC version. The

screen displays no information.
GEN
Press the GEN STATUS key to display the three phase

based bus and mains parameters. There are eight status screens to monitor the
bus and mains electrical parameters.
10 Woodward
I/O
Press the I/O STATUS key to display the status of all the
discrete inputs and outputs, as well as information on analog inputs and outputs
and communication ports. There are three I/O status screens.
SYNC
Press the SYNC STATUS key to display status information

regarding the group breaker and mains breaker synchronizer. The Synchronizer
status is on two screens.
KW LOAD
Press the KW LOAD STATUS key to display the unit’s kW

load control status information. There are four KW Load status screens.
PF / KVAR
Press the PF/KVAR STATUS key to display VAR/PF Mode

information, as well as related three phase generator and mains parameters. The
reactive power values are contained on only one status screen.
SEQUENCE
Press the SEQUENCE key to display status information

for sequencing functions. There are two status screens for Sequence functions.
ATS
Press the ATS STATUS key to display status information

for the Automatic Transfer Switch functions. There are two status screens for
ATS functions.
Woodward 11
Navigation Procedure
The following drawings detail a step-by-step procedure for navigating through the
EGCP-3 software. Additionally, the typical display entries seen at each step are
shown. The cursor position is shown with an Underline of the first letter in the
active line. Stepping through this example will give the user a quick feel for the
display and keypad operation.
LEFT HAND LCD DISPLAY RIGHT HAND LCD DISPLAY

KEYPRESS
Power Up
system status system status
KW LOAD
kw load status kw load status
SYNC
synchronizer status synchronizer status
CONFIG
SECURITY CODE
... synchronizer status ****
ENTER
SECURITY CODE
_ 0
+ +
SCROLL synchronizer status ----------------------------------------------------
ENTER SECURITY CODE
ENTER
First Time Startup
Shutdowns and Alarms
synchronizer status Bus Protection
Mains Protection
First Time Startup

SCROLL
synchronizer status Bus Protection
Mains Protection
Figure 2-2a EGCP-3 Navigation (1)
12 Woodward
From Previous Page

SCROLL First Time Startup
synchronizer status
Bus Protection
Mains Protection

SCROLL
Bus Protection
synchronizer status Mains Protection
Meter Control
Digital Inputs
Digital Outputs
SCROLL synchronizer status Analog Outputs
Analog Inputs
Digital Inputs
Digital Outputs
SCROLL synchronizer status Analog Outputs
Analog Inputs
ENTER
>AO 1 Function
>AO 1 High Cal Value
synchronizer status >AO 1 Low Cal Value
>AO 2 Function
>AO 1 Function
SCROLL >AO 1 High Cal Value
>AO 2 Function
>AO 1 Function
SCROLL synchronizer status >AO 1 Low Cal Value
>AO 2 Function
Figure 2-2b. EGCP-3 Navigation (2)
Woodward 13
ENTER From Previous Page
AO 1 Low Cal Value

30.5
synchronizer status -------------------WOODWARD EGCP3-------------
CONFIGURATION MENUS
SCROLL AO 1 Low Cal Value

29.5
CONFIGURATION MENUS
ENTER
>AO 1 Function
>AO 2 Function
>AO 1 Function
SCROLL synchronizer status >AO 1 Low Cal Value
>AO 2 Function
ENTER AO 1 High Cal Value

3000.8
CONFIGURATION MENUS
ESC
>AO 1 Function
>AO 2 Function
ESC Digital Inputs

Digital Outputs
synchronizer status Analog Outputs
Analog Inputs
Figure 2-2c. EGCP-3 Navigation (3)
14 Woodward
CONFIG from previous page
... First Time Startup

synchronizer status
Bus Protection
Mains Protection
I/O
First Time Startup
input/output status Bus Protection
Mains Protection
STATUS
i input/output status input/output status
ALARM / EVENT
BUS PHASE DIFF CURR
01-MAY-01 11:32:54.5
input/output status GRP BKR FEEDBACK ERR
22-APR-01 16:12:33.3
KW LOAD
BUS PHASE DIFF CURR
01-MAY-01 11:32:54.5
kw load status
GRP BKR FEEDBACK ERR
22-APR-01 16:12:33.3
BUS PHASE DIFF CURR

SCROLL 01-MAY-01 11:32:54.5
kw load status GRP BKR FEEDBACK ERR
22-APR-01 16:12:33.3

22-APR-01 16:12:33.3
SCROLL kw load status ---------------------------------------------------
-------------------End of List----------------
Figure 2-2d. EGCP-3 Navigation (4)
Woodward 15
ALARM CLEAR from previous page

22-APR-01 16:12:33.3
kw load status ---------------------------------------------------
-------------------End of List----------------
ALARM CLEAR
kw load status None Recorded
SYSTEM
system status None Recorded
STATUS
i system status system status
Figure 2-2e. EGCP-3 Navigation (5)
16 Woodward
Alarms and Events

The EGCP-3 contains two separate alarm event lists, active alarms and historical
alarms. The active alarm list contains all active alarms that have not been
cleared with security access. The historical list contains the previous 100 alarms
that have occurred in the system.
The historical alarm log is kept in non-volatile memory and will be stored if
control power is lost. The active alarm list is saved only in volatile memory and
will be cleared on loss control power input.
Active Alarms
The ALARM/EVENT key provides access the MC’s active alarm event log. When
the ALARM/EVENT KEY is pressed once on the MC’s keypad, the right hand
LCD screen will switch to display the first two active alarms and the time the
event occurred. Pressing the SCROLL DOWN key will page down to the next
pair of events, until End of List is displayed after the final alarm. Pressing the Up
Scroll key will page up to the previous pair of events. A maximum of 100 events
is allowed in the active alarm list.
When no active alarms are present, pressing the ALARM/EVENT KEY will
display the following:
S T A T U S
D I S P L A Y N o n e R e c o r d e d
Current Alarm/Events
If an active alarm is present the display will show the type of alarm and the date
and time which it occurred.
A L A RM N AM E
S T A T U S Y Y / MM / D D H H : MM : S S
D I S P L A Y A L A RM N A M E
Y Y / MM / D D H H : MM : S S
Current Alarm/Events
ALARM NAME: The name, as defined by the particular warning, alarm, or

shutdown event.
HH:MM:SS The hour, minute, seconds, of the alarm occurrence in 24 hr
format.
YY/MM/DD The Year, Month and Day of the alarm occurrence. Only a 2-
digit year is shown due to space limitations. The month is
shown as the conventional numerical 01-12
The ALARM CLEAR KEY is used to acknowledge and reset alarm events from
the current event status list. When pressed, this key will acknowledge all alarms
in the Current Alarm/Event List by silencing (turning off) the AUDIBLE ALARM
output (if present). When pressed a second time, the alarm will be reset. If the
event was latching an associated control action(s), the latch will also be cleared
from the control logic thus allowing that action to continue (if appropriate).
Woodward 17
The alarm will not be cleared from the active list unless operator or greater
security access has been entered into the control. In the event that an alarm is
still active, it will not be cleared from the alarm list even with security access.
WARNING
The unit may enable a start unintentionally if a fault, which caused the units
to shut down, is cleared and the operating mode is enabled for Automatic
Starting. Before clearing the fault, check the cause of the fault, in order to
protect operating personnel located in the vicinity against injuries, and to
protect gensets against unintentional damage.
⇒ If the cause of the fault is not known or is unclear, NEVER press the
ALARM CLEAR KEY.
To enter a clear command, it is necessary to press the CLEAR ALARM key, wait
two seconds, and then press CLEAR ALARM again. If another alarm has
occurred during this two second wait period, the new alarm will be
acknowledged, but no alarms(s) will be cleared. Another press of the CLEAR
ALARM key is now required to clear the alarm list, and reset the alarm(s). There
is no maximum wait time for the alarm clear function. Once the CLEAR ALARM
key is pressed, the second ALARM CLEAR can occur any time (provided there
are no new alarms), the list will be cleared, and the alarm(s) will be reset.
Historical Alarms
Pressing the ALARM/EVENT KEY twice accesses the historical alarm list. The
top line of the right display will indicate ALARM HISTORY when the history log is
being displayed. If the ALARM/EVENT KEY is pressed again, the display will
return to showing the active alarm list.
Pressing the SCROLL DOWN key will page down to the next event and the time
and date of occurrence. Pressing the SCROLL UP key will page up to the
previous event.
The events displayed are arranged in a first in, last out (FILO) order. The most
recent events will appear at the top of the list, followed by older events. If the
total number of events exceeds 100, the oldest events will be dropped off the list.
Events are never cleared from the history log until the log becomes full. The
history log is saved in non-volatile memory so the equipment owner can always
see past events. A sample of a historical alarm is shown below:
A L A R M H I S T OR Y
S T A T U S
D I S P L A Y A L A R M N A ME
Y Y / MM/ D D H H : MM: S S
History Log
The ALARM CLEAR KEY has no effect when viewing the History Log.
18 Woodward
Status Menus
There are nine status menus in the EGCP-3 to be used for monitoring and
troubleshooting. The status keys on the face of the EGCP-3 can be used to
access these menus where information is dynamically updated about every 200
milliseconds (ms). The status menus are used to display all of the inputs and
outputs of the control and the associated modes of operation for the control.
All status screens include a wrap-around feature when more than one page of
data is available. Upon reaching the last page of data, pressing the scroll down
arrow key again will cause the EGCP-3 to wrap-around and display the first page
again. Likewise, if the first page is being displayed and the Scroll up key is
pressed, the last page will then be displayed.
System Status
When the EGCP-3 is initially powered up, it will default to the System Status
Screen 1. Below is an example of what the Screen may look like. The System
Status Screen can be accessed while in any other status screen by pressing the
SYSTEM key.
A l a r m s : 1 U N I T : 1 6 k W : 0 0 . 0 H z
M A I N S ―― B U S ―― P F : 1 . 0 0 L G
M o d e : A U T O B a t t e r y V o l t s : 2 4 . 0 V
S t a t e : A U T O H H : MM d d - mm m y y y y
System Status #1
The screen displays the following information:

Alarms: Displays the number of active alarms on the unit.
UNIT: The LON Address of the EGCP-3 Unit.
MAINS: Graphic display of the mains condition. Two minus symbols (– –)
indicates the mains are out of spec, one plus symbol indicates the
mains are in spec, but not declared stable (+ –), two plus symbols (+
+) indicate the mains are in spec and stable.
BUS: A graphic display of the status of the bus. Two minus symbols (– –)
indicates the bus is out of spec, one plus symbol (+ –) indicates the
bus is in spec, but not declared stable; two plus symbols (+ +)
indicates the bus is in spec and stable.
Mode: Mode Switch status:
Displayed State Meaning

OFF The Test/Run/Auto switches are all off or unit is not a master.
AUTO The Auto switch and the MC is in automatic control
MANUAL The Run Switch (only) was selected and no automatic breaker closures will occur
State: Shows the state of the MC unit as a whole. Display shows how/why
units were started.
Woodward 19

OFF The Test/Run/Auto switches are all off
The Test/Run/Auto switches are all asserted. An ATS function is being
ATS
performed.
The Test and Auto switches were asserted. A TEST ATS function is being
TEST ATS
performed.
The Run switch was asserted and the engine is running. With the Auto switch the
unit will automatically synchronize and close the gen breaker. Without the auto
RUN WITH LOAD
switch the engine can be manually synchronized. Once the breaker is closed, the
unit will go into the appropriate Load Control Mode.
The Auto switch (only) is asserted and the EGCP-3 is waiting for network start
AUTO
command. The unit is in standby and ready to start.
MAINS DEMAND The MC has initiated a Peaking Demand startup
PEAK TIMER The MC has initiated a Time of Day Demand startup
LOM START The MC has detected a Loss of Mains condition and initiated a LOM startup
KW: The total kW load on the mains. Note: The display will put a
blank, k, or M as the first letter so that the units appear as W, kW
or MW for the displayed value.
Hz: The frequency of the mains in Hertz (Hz).
PF: The average three phase power factor of the mains set.
HH:MM: Time of Day (24 hour clock format)
dd-mmm: Date with two digits for the day and three letters for the month.
yyyy: Four digit year.
Battery Volts: Battery Voltage in Volts dc.
System Status Screen #2 contains mains import and export power meters as
measured by the mains sensors.
M A I NS I MP O R T MA I N S E X P OR T
k W- h r s 0 . 0 0 0 0 k W - h r s 0 . 0 0 0 0
k V A R - h r s 0 . 0 0 0 0 k V A R - h r s 0 . 0 0 0 0
k V A - h r s 0 . 0 0 0 0 k V A - h r s 0 . 0 0 0 0
System Status #2
MAINS IMPORT: This screen shows the accumulated total power that has
been imported from the mains. During export, this value
does not change.
MAINS EXPORT: This screen shows the accumulated total power that has
been exported to the mains. During import, this value does
not change.
kW-Hrs: The total accumulated kW hours measured on the mains
bus.
KVA-Hrs: The total accumulated kVA hours measured on the mains
bus.
KVAR-Hrs: The total accumulated kVAR-hours measured on the mains
bus.
Engine Status
There is no Engine parameter information available in MC units.
MA S T E R U N I T
NO E N GI N E S T A T U S
Engine Status #1
20 Woodward
Generator Status Screens

The Generator Status Screens contains summary information for the BUS and
MAINS sources. It displays totals and averages as appropriate. Below is the first
screen shown in the generator status section.
B U S 9 9 9 9 9 k V A M A I N S 9 9 9 9 9 k V A
9 9 9 9 9 V L L 9 9 9 9 9 kW 9 9 9 9 9 V L L 9 9 9 9 9 k W
9 9 9 9 9 V L N 9 9 9 9 9 k V R 9 9 9 . 9 V L N 9 9 9 . 9 k V R
9 9 9 9 9 A P F : 0 . 9 9 L G 9 9 9 9 9 A P F : 0 . 9 9 L G
Generator Status #1
BUS Denotes this screen is for the bus.

MAINS: Denotes this screen is for the mains.
KVA: Total KVA reading. The display will put a blank, k, or M as the
first letter so that the units appear as VA, kVA or MVA for the
displayed value.
KW: Total kW readings. The display will put a blank, k, or M as the
first letter so that the units appear as W, kW, or MW for the
displayed value.
KVR: Total kVAR reading. The display will put a blank, k, or M as the
first letter so that the units appear as VR, kVR, or MVR for the
displayed value.
VLL: Average Volts L-L. The display will put a blank, k, or M as the
first letter so that the units appear as V, kV, or MV for the
displayed value.
VLN: Average Volts L-N. The display will put a blank, k, or M as the
first letter so that the units appear as V, kV, or MV for the
displayed value.
A: Average Amps. The display will put a blank, k, or M as the first
letter so that the units appear as A, kA, or MA for the displayed
value.
PF: Average Power Factor; with LG or LD for Lag or Lead.
Generator Screen #2 is the electric power measurements for the BUS three-
phase power sensor.
B U S A ∅ B ∅ C ∅ A ∅ B ∅ C ∅ B U S
k V A 3 2 0 0 0 3 2 0 0 0 3 2 0 0 0 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 V L L
k W 3 2 0 0 0 3 2 0 0 0 3 2 0 0 0 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 A
k V R 3 2 0 0 0 3 2 0 0 0 3 2 0 0 0 1 . 0 L G 1 . 0 L G 1 . 0 L G P F
Generator Status #2
BUS: Denotes this screen is for the local bus.

A∅ B∅ C∅: Three phase readings for the bus
KVA: Phase KVA reading. The display will put a blank, k, or M as the
first letter so that the units appear as VA, kVA or MVA for the
displayed value.
KW: Phase kW readings. The display will put a blank, k, or M as the
first letter so that the units appear as W, kW, or MW for the
displayed value.
KVR: Phase kVAR reading. The display will put a blank, k, or M as the
first letter so that the units appear as VR, kVR, or MVR for the
displayed value.
VLL: Phase Volts L-L. The display will put a blank, k, or M as the first
letter so that the units appear as VLL, kVLL, or MVLL for the
displayed value.
Woodward 21
A: Phase Amps. The display will put a blank, k, or M as the first

letter so that the units appear as A, kA, or MA for the displayed
value.
PF: Phase Power Factor, with LG or LD for Lag or Lead.
Generator Screen #3 is the electric power measurements for the MAINS three-
phase power sensor.
M A I N S A ∅ B ∅ C ∅ A ∅ B ∅ C ∅ M A I N S
k V A 3 2 0 0 0 3 2 0 0 0 3 2 0 0 0 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 V L L
k W 3 2 0 0 0 3 2 0 0 0 3 2 0 0 0 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 A
k V R 3 2 0 0 0 3 2 0 0 0 3 2 0 0 0 1 . 0 L G 1 . 0 L G 1 . 0 L G P F
Generator Status #3
MAINS: Denotes this screen is for the mains bus.

All other fields on this screen are identical in format to those on Screen #2
above.
Generator Screen #4 is the Harmonics screen for both power sources: MAINS
and BUS.
NOTE
The local display only shows the current harmonics, all voltage harmonics
are shown in the Watch Window software, and are available through Modbus
or ServLink.
I - T H D V - T H D 3 R D 4 T H 5 T H
B U S 1 0 0 . 0 1 9 . 9 9 B U S 9 . 9 9 0 . 9 9 9 . 9 9
M A I N S 9 9 . 9 9 9 9 . 9 9 MA I N S 9 . 9 9 0 . 9 9 9 . 9 9
C U R R E N T H A R M O N I C S
Generator Status #4
BUS: Denotes this row is used for the local bus.

MAINS: Denotes this row is for the mains bus.
I-THD: Total Harmonic Distortion. The percentage of total current that
can be attributed to harmonics as related to the fundamental.
V-THD: Total Harmonic Distortion of the Voltage in percent. Calculated
the same as the current THD.
3RD: Third Harmonic in percent. It is the total current in the third
harmonic, as a percentage of the total current in the
fundamental. A value of 0 will denote no harmonic content, and a
value of 100 will denote a third harmonic current equal to the
fundamental current. All harmonic values shown are calculated
by this method
4TH: Fourth Harmonic in percent.
5TH: Fifth Harmonic in percent.
CURRENT HARMONICS:
Denotes this screen shows current harmonics.
Generator Screen #5 is the second Harmonics screen for both power sources:
BUS and MAINS.
6 T H 7 T H 9 T H 1 1 T H 1 3 T H
B U S 9 . 9 9 0 . 9 9 9 9 . 9 B U S 9 . 9 9 0 . 9 9
MA I N S 9 . 9 9 0 . 9 9 9 9 . 9 MA I N S 9 . 9 9 0 . 9 9
C U R R E N T H A R M O N I C S C U R R E N T H A R M O N I C S
Generator Status #5
22 Woodward
6TH: Sixth Harmonic in percent
7TH: Seventh Harmonic in percent
9TH: Ninth Harmonic in percent
11TH: Eleventh Harmonic in percent
13TH: Thirteenth Harmonic in percent
Generator Status Screen #6 contains negative sequence voltage and currents. It

covers both power sources: MAINS and BUS.
B U S M A I N S
N e g∅ S e q : 9 9 9 9 9 V N e g ∅ S e q : 9 9 9 9 9 V
N e g∅ S e q : 9 9 9 9 9 A N e g ∅ S e q : 9 9 9 9 9 A
I - TH D 9 9 9 V - T H D 9 9 9 I - T H D 9 9 9 V - T H D 9 9 9
Generator Status #6
NEG∅ SEQ: Negative Phase Sequence Voltage and Negative Phase

Sequence Current component value. The display will show the
multiplier units as appropriate.
I-THD: Total harmonic distortion of the current in percent. Repeated
from Generator Status Screen #4
V-THD: Total harmonic distortion of the voltage in percent. Repeated
from Generator Status Screen #4.
Generator Status Screen #7 contains the three phase power measurements from
the MAINS sensors. This is a repeat for Generator Status Screen #3 except that
L-N values are used.
M A I N S A ∅ B ∅ C ∅ A ∅ B ∅ C ∅ B U S
k V A 3 2 0 0 0 3 2 0 0 0 3 2 0 0 0 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 V L N
k W 3 2 0 0 0 3 2 0 0 0 3 2 0 0 0 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 A
k V R 3 2 0 0 0 3 2 0 0 0 3 2 0 0 0 1 . 0 L G 1 . 0 L G 1 . 0 L G P F
Generator Status #7
Generator Screen #8 is the electric power overview for the BUS three-phase
power sensor. This is a repeat for Generator Status Screen #2 except that L-N
values are used.
B U S A ∅ B ∅ C ∅ A ∅ B ∅ C ∅ B U S
k V A 3 2 0 0 0 3 2 0 0 0 3 2 0 0 0 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 V L N
k W 3 2 0 0 0 3 2 0 0 0 3 2 0 0 0 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 A
k V R 3 2 0 0 0 3 2 0 0 0 3 2 0 0 0 1 . 0 L G 1 . 0 L G 1 . 0 L G P F
Generator Status #8
I/O Status Screens

I/O Status Screen #1 contains summary information for discrete I/O. Pressing the
Scroll Down key will page down to I/O Status Screen #2. Pressing the Scroll Up
key will page to I/O Status Screen #3.
D I S C R E T E I / O P F Cm d : 0 . 0 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 L o a d C md : 0 . 0 0
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X I N L o a d R e f : ―――%
X X X X X X X X X X X X ―――― OU T L D Mo d e : OF F
I/O Status #1
Woodward 23
IN: Discrete Inputs 1 through 16. X=Active, Blank=Off.

OUT: Discrete Outputs 1 through 12. X=Active, Blank=Off.
1234….56: These are the channel number 1-16 of the Discrete Inputs and
1-12 of the Discrete Outputs.
NOTE
0 = Input # 10, the 1-6 to the right of 0 are 1 = Input #11, 2 = input #12, etc.
PF Cmd: PF command sent from the MC to the LON network.

Load Cmd: Load command sent from the MC to the LON network.
Load Ref: This is the load reference used by the Real Load Controller. This
readout is only active when in a BASELOAD or PROCESS
control mode. It will show (– – –) if not in control.
LD Mode: This is the Load Control Mode from the Real Load Status
Screen. See the Real Load Status Screens section for details.
I/O Status Screen #2 contains analog I/O. The left screen indicates the actual
mA value of the Analog Output 1– 4 at the I/O terminal, and Analog Input 1-4 in
mA or voltage (as configured for each input) at the terminal strip. The right
screen gives the scaled value for the inputs.
NOTE
The right screen labels can be configured in WW to read any ASCII character
so may not read ANALOG IN 1, ANALOG IN 2, etc.
O U T 1 : 1 9 . 9 9 I N 1 : 1 9 . 9 9 A N A L O G I N 1 0 . 0 0
O U T 2 : 1 9 . 9 9 I N 2 : 1 9 . 9 9 A N A L O G I N 2 0 . 0 0
O U T 3 : 1 9 . 9 9 I N 3 : 1 9 . 9 9 A N A L O G I N 3 - 1 5 . 0 0
O U T 4 : 1 9 . 9 9 I N 4 : 1 9 . 9 9 A N A L O G I N 4 - 1 . 0 5
I/O Status #2
OUT#: The current in mA being output at the indicated analog output

point.
IN#: The current in mA or voltage in Vdc detected at the indicated
analog input point.
Analog In 1: The scaled value for input 1 as setup in the Analog Input menu.
Analog in 2: The scaled value for input 2 as setup in the Analog Input menu.
Analog In 3: The scaled value for input 3 as setup in the Analog Input menu.
Analog in 4: The scaled value for input 4 as setup in the Analog Input menu.
I/O Status Screen #3 contains communications and network data.
C o m P o r t 1 : N O R MA L T I E B U S M A I N S
C o m P o r t 2 : N O R MA L W X Y Z A B C D OP E N
C o m P o r t 3 : N O R MA L X X
L O N S t a t u s : N O R MA L G e n B r e k e r : OP E N
I/O Status #3
Com Port 1 The status of serial communication port 1. ALARM indicates a

port timeout alarm, NORMAL indicates the port is active.
LON Status The status of LON communication. ALARM indicates a LON port
error; NORMAL indicates the port is active.
24 Woodward
TIE: The status of each tie breaker (W, X, Y, and Z) is indicated. ‘X’
means it is closed, and ‘ ‘ (blank) means it is open.
BUS: The status of each bus segment (A, B, C, and D) is indicated
where ‘X’ means it is part of the active bus and ‘ ‘ (blank) means
it is not included.
MAINS: Indicates the position of the Mains breaker.
Grp Breaker: Indicates the position of the Group breaker, OPEN or CLOSED.
If a group breaker is not configured, it will show (---)
Synchronizer Status Screens

Synchronizer Status Screen #1 contains general interest synchronizing data. It is
the top screen shown in the Synchronizer Status section. Pressing the Scroll
Down or Up key will page to Synchronizer Status Screen #2.
S l i p P h a s e V o l t s S y n c h r o : OF F
9 . 9 9 H z 1 8 0 . 0 1 0 0 . 0 % V B : 9 9 . 9 % S B : 9 9 . 9 %
- - - - - - B u s A v g : 9 9 9 9 9 V L N
Ma i n s D e a d ? T r u e M a i n A v g : 9 9 9 9 9 V L N
Synchronizer Status #1
Slip: The slip frequency in Hz of the bus with relationship to the

mains.
Phase: The phase angle difference in degrees between the bus and the
mains.
Volts: The voltage differential in percent between the bus and the
mains.
Line Three: Shows two minus symbols (– –) if not within programmed
window. Shows one plus symbol and one minus symbol (+ –) if
working to correct. Shows two plus symbols (+ +) if within
window.
Mains Dead?: Indicates if the mains PT input being measured is dead.
Synchro: Displays the synchronizer's configured mode.
Displayed Mode Meaning

OFF Synchronizer mode is off and will not attempt to synchronize any breakers
PERMISSIVE Synchronizer will not actively synchronize but will close breakers if within limits
CHECK Synchronizer will actively synchronize but will inhibit any breaker closure
RUN/AUTO Synchronizer will actively synchronize and will close breakers when within limits
VB: Voltage Bias Output from the synchronizer.

SB: Speed Bias Output from the synchronizer.
BUS AVG: Average Voltage of the bus. The display will put a blank, k, or M
multiplier as the first letter, and depending on Wye or Delta
configuration VLN or VLL.
MAIN AVG: Average Voltage of the mains. The display will put a blank, k, or
M as the first letter, and depending on Wye or Delta
configuration VLN or VLL.
NOTE
The synchronizer displays **** in the place of values for Slip, Phase, and
Volts when the synchronizer is inactive or off.
Synchronizer Status Screen #2 contains timing status data on the right screen
and status data repeated from Synchronizer Status #1. Pressing the Scroll Up
key pages up to Synchronizer Status Screen #1. Pressing the Scroll Down also
pages to the Synchronizer Status Screen #1 since there are only two screens.
Woodward 25
S l i p P h a s e V o l t s S y n c h r o OF F
9 9 . 9 H Z 9 9 . 9 9 9 . 9 % S t a t e : M A I N S T I ME R
- - - - - - A t t e m p t # 0
T i m e o u t : 0 s e c
Synchronizer Status #2
State: Displays the state of the synchronizer:

OFF The synchronizer is not actively synchronizing and is in the off mode
IN SYNC Breaker has Closed Successfully, and held for synch timer.
SYNCING BUS The group breaker is being actively synchronized to the bus/mains
SYNCING MAINS The mains breaker is being actively synchronized
BUS TIMER Bus is stable and waiting for bus stable timer
MAINS TIMER Mains are stable and waiting for mains stable timer
Attempt#: Number of synchronization attempts (will always be less than or

equal to Close Attempts set point).
Timeout: The amount of time left before synchronizer timeout in seconds.
If disabled, the field will display ‘– – –‘.
KW Load Status Screens

KW Load Status Screen #1 contains kW Load, Process Load, and Demand data.
M a i n s L o a d : 0 . 0 KW P r o c A c t u a l : 0 . 0 0 0 %
L o a d R e f : - - - P r o c e s s R e f : 0 . 0 0 0 %
D e ma n d : 0 . 0 k V A L D M o d e : O F F
M a x D e ma n d : 0 . 0 V A S t a t e : OF F
KW Load Status #1
Mains Load: Real power sensed at the mains. The display will put a blank,
k, or M as the first letter so that the units appear as W, kW, or
MW for the displayed value.
Load Ref: The current load reference for the MC. The display will put a
blank, k, or M as the first letter so that the units appear as W,
kW, or MW for the displayed value.
Demand: Demand level in VA at mains.
Max Demand: Demand tattletale value in VA (peak value of demand, import
takes precedence over export).
NOTE
For all load and demand values. Export will have a positive value. Import will
have a negative value.
System Load: Percent of total rated capacity of all generators on the LON
network.
Proc Actual: The actual process level as seen by the EGCP-3. Units are
percent of rated process.
Process Ref: The process reference for the process control. Its source is
from; an internal setpoint, or an external devise, determined by
the control configuration. Units are in percent of rated process.
Load Mode: The current load control mode in operation.
26 Woodward

OFF The load controller is off because the engine is off.
ISOCH LS on load, but not in parallel with mains. MC not controlling load
BASELOAD LS on load and in parallel with mains at the internal configured kW level.
IMP/EXP Controlling the import or export of power on mains, setpoint is internal setting
PROCESS Controlling using Temperature or Pressure Process input.
REM PROC Controlling based on Temperature/Pressure Process input and a remote process
reference.
PEAKING System is supplying load in a peak shaving mode.
REM BASELD Controlling in parallel with the mains to a BaseLoad reference provided by an
analog input.
REM IMP/EXP Controlling the import or export of power on mains, setpoint is provided by an
analog input.
Load Share Same as ISOCH with two or more LS’s tied to the same bus
State: The state of the load controller:

OFF Not in auto
OFF/AUTO MC in auto but not performing load control
RAMPING UP The load is being increased, automatically or manually, at the configured ramp
rate.
PAUSE A user has manually (or through Modbus) stopped a load ramp.
RAMPING DOWN The load is being decreased, automatically or manually, at the configured ramp
rate.
AT REFERENCE The load has reached the configured level and is tracking.
MANUAL The load controller was placed in a manual mode and load is being controlled by
external inputs. It is no longer at the configured reference.
KW Load Status Screen #2 contains Demand and Peaking information.
D M D : 0 . 0 k V A K V A S w i t c h : OF F
Ma x D M D : 0 . 0 k V A D em a n d T i m e r : - - -
T o t a l D M D : 0 . 0 k V A
T OT Ma x D M D : 0 . 0 k V A N o S c h e d u l e
KW Load Status #2
DMD: Current Demand level in VA at mains.

Max DMD: Demand tattletale value in VA (peak value of demand).
Total DMD: The total demand of all mains on the same active
segment.
TOT Max DMD: The demand of the tattletale value of the total demand.
KVA Switch: Position of VA level switch (even if it is not mapped to an
output).
Demand Timer: A countdown timer that activates when demand level is
exceeded, showing time before sending start command
to LS unit. It will show (---) if disabled. (integer only)
Next Demand Start: The time and day of the week that the next time
scheduled start is to occur. This should indicate “No
Schedule” if Time-of-Day peaking is not enabled.
KW Load Status Screen #3 contains the total load reference for all LS’s online,
the current system load as well as the load shed status of all three priority
loadsheds.
Woodward 27
L OA D R E F E R E N C E L o a d S h e d S t a t u s
0 . 0 W 0 . 0 % P r i o r i t y 1 : N O N E
S Y S T E M L OA D P r i o r i t y 2 : N O N E
0 . 0 W 0 . 0 % P r i o r i t y 3 : N O N E
KW Load Status #3
Load Reference: The load reference for the generator(s). Both the power
value and the percent load reference send to LS units on
LON.
System Load: Shows both the power value and the percent load of the
active bus from LON.
Priority#: There are 3 priority levels for load shed. None, some, or
all may be configured. If not configured, it will show
NONE. If configured, the state is either SHED to indicate
it was Shed or ON-LINE to indicate it is still being
served.
KW Load Status Screen #4 contains the total load of all LS units, the bus, this
MC’s mains and all MC’s mains in real power units. The online capacity in real
power units as well as the active and reserve units.
G e n L o a d : 0 . 0 k W On l i n e C a p : 0 . 0 W
B u s L o a d : 0 . 0 k W # Of f l i n e U n i t s : 0
M N S L o a d : 0 . 0 k W # On l i n e U n i t s : 0
T O TM N S L o a d : 0 . 0 k W
KW Load Status #4
Gen Load: Real power output sum of generator(s) on the active

segment. Value from LON.
Bus Load: Measured load of bus segment connected to this MC.
MNS Load: Measured load in or out of the mains, connected to this
MC.
TOT MNS Load: Instantaneous sum of all mains loads on the same active
segment.
Online Capacity: The sum of the rated kW values for all LS units with
breakers closed.
Offline Units: # Units ready to start (on same active bus).
Online Units: # LS units with breaker closed (on same active bus).
PF/KVAR Status Screens

PF/KVAR Status Screen #1 contains PF/KVAR data. It is the only screen in the
PF/KVAR Status section.
M o d e : P F C ON T R OL B U S MAI N S
S t a t e : R A MP I N G 0 . 9 9 L G 1 . 0 0 L D
P F R e f : 0 . 9 9 L G 2 0 . 8 k V A R - 4 . 3 k V A R
V A R R e f : - - - PF C md : 0 . 9 9
KVAR/PF Status #1
Mode: The actual VAR/PF control mode.
28 Woodward

OFF MC is not a master or is not in any VAR/PF control
PF CONTROL At least one LS in parallel with the mains and the MC is in PF control mode.
VAR CONTROL At least one LS in parallel with the mains and the MC is in VAR control mode.
RMT CONTROL At least one LS in parallel with the mains and the MC is in Remote control mode
using analog inputs for reference values.
MANUAL A manual mode is selected so the user controls voltage bias using panel
raise/lower switches.
IMP/EXP PF The process controller is actively controlling import/export levels and the mode
was configured for PF control.
IMP/EXP VAR The process controller is actively controlling import/export levels and the mode
was configured for VAR control.
State: The state of the load controller:

RAMPING UP Reactive load is being increased, automatically or manually, at the configured ramp
rate.
PAUSE A user has manually (or through Modbus) stopped a the ramp with a ramp pause.
RAMPING DOWN Reactive load is being decreased, automatically or manually, at the configured
ramp rate.
AT REFERENCE The load has reached the configured level.
OFF/AUTO MC is not a master or is not in any VAR/PF control but is in AUTO
OFF MC is not in AUTO
MANUAL The VAR/PF controller was placed in a manual mode and load is being controlled
by external inputs.
PF REF: The PF control reference value for the control. This field will
show ‘– – –‘ if the control is using VAR or Remote control
modes. The display shows LAG or LEAD as appropriate.
VAR REF: The VAR control reference value for the control. This field will
show ‘– – –‘ if the control is using PF or Remote control
modes. The display will put a blank, k, or M as the first letter
so that the units appear as VAR, kVAR, or MVAR for the
displayed value.
PF: The average three phase PF of the bus or mains. The display
shows LAG or LEAD depending on the power factor detected.
KVAR: The total VAR reading for the bus or mains. The display will
put a blank, k, or M as the first letter so that the units appear
as VAR, kVAR, or MVAR for the displayed value.
PF Cmd: PF command sent to the LON.
Sequence Status Screens

Sequence Status Screen #1 contains breaker and bus data as well as current LS
sequencing data.
U n i t : 1 S t a t e : OF F N e x t On : 1
M a i n s B r e a k e r : C L OS E D N e x t Of f : 0
G r o u p B r e a k e r : C L OS E D
B U S : A # U n i t s On L o a d : 1
Sequence Status #1
Unit: Network Address (Unit number) of this unit.

State: Indicates the sequence state of the MC
Woodward 29

READY Unit is in AUTO and ready to perform any action
ALARM An LON alarm has been sensed.
OFF Unit is not in AUTO
Mains Breaker: The status of the mains breaker as determined by the

mains CB aux discrete input.
Group Breaker: The status of the group breaker as determined by the
group CB aux discrete input.
Bus: The Active bus(es) that this unit is controlling (or joining).
It may be any combination of the four letters (A, B, C, or
D).
Next On: Unit Number of next unit to be sequenced onto the
network. Will show ALL if all are being started. Places an
asterisk (*) after the unit number when this unit is
currently being sequenced (while Seq. Delay timer
decrements).
Next Off: Unit Number of next unit to be sequenced off the
network. Will show ALL if all are being stopped. Places
an asterisk (*) after the unit number when this unit is
currently being sequenced (while Seq. Delay timer
decrements).
#Units On Load: Total number of units with their breakers closed.
Sequence Status Screen #2 contains data related to current LS units availability

as well as bus segment information.
S e g U n i t s : 1 T I E B U S M A I N S
S t a r t R e a d y U n i t s : 0 WX Y Z A B C D C L OS E D
S t o p R e a d y U n i t s : 0 X X X
L S Un i t s : 0 N e t U n i t s : 1
Sequence Status #2
Seg Units: Number of units on the active bus segment.

Start Ready Units: Number of units on the active bus ready to start.
Stop Ready Units: Number of units on the active bus ready to stop.
LS Units: Number of LS units with their load share bit true on the
active bus segment.
TIE: Status Tie breakers W,X,Y,Z, ‘X’ below the breaker
identification means the breaker is closed, and ‘_‘
(blank) means it is open.
BUS: Each bus segment A,B,C,D is indicated where ‘X’ means
it is part of the active bus and ‘_‘ (blank) means it is not
included.
MAINS Status of the mains breaker.
Net Units: Number of units communicating on the LON network.
30 Woodward
ATS Status Screens

ATS Status Screen #1 contains breaker and synchronization data on the left
screen. On the right screen is transition timing and the current mode and state of
the MC.
M A I N S : + + B U S : - - M a i n s D e a d ? F a l s e
M a i n s B r e a k e r : C L OS E D T o t a l D e l a y : 5 s e c
G r p B r e a k e r : OP E N M o d e : C L O S E D T R A N S
S y n c h r o : R U N / A U T O S t a t e : S T A R T I N G
ATS Status #1
MAINS: A graphic display of the mains condition. Two minus

symbols (--) indicates the mains are out of spec, one plus
symbol (+-) indicates the mains are in spec, but not declared
stable, two plus symbols (++) indicate mains are in spec and
stable.
Bus: A graphic display of the bus condition. Two minus symbols (-
-) indicates the bus is out of spec, one plus symbol (+-)
indicates the bus is in spec, but not declared stable, two plus
symbols (++) indicate bus is in spec and stable.
Mains Breaker: The state of the mains breaker as determined by the mains
CB aux discrete input.
Grp Breaker: The state of the group breaker as determined by the group
CB aux discrete input.
Synchro: The synchronizer control mode. (See Synchronizer Status
for modes)
Mains Dead: An indication of a live or dead local bus as determined by the
voltage on the bus, and state of the generator and mains
breaker inputs.
Total Delay: If the LS units are NOT supplying an isolated bus, then this
shows the LOM Action Delay + Gen Stable Delay + Fast
Transfer Delay as a countdown. If the ATS controller is OFF,
it will show ---. If the EPS is now supplying the load, then this
shows the Mains Stable Delay + Fast Transfer Delay as a
countdown. The countdown will not be moving until the
controller has decided to return the load to the mains.
Mode: The actual ATS mode being used:

OFF ATS mode is selected as Off
TEST ATS Unit is currently performing a TEST ATS (Test and Auto SW).
Open or closed transition can be selected.
OPEN TRANS No parallel ATS mode is selected.
CLOSED TRANS Parallel ATS mode is selected
State: The actual ATS State
Woodward 31

LOM DELAY Currently waiting for the LOM delay timer to expire
STARTING Currently starting the ATS
BUS DELAY Currently waiting for the Bus Stable delay timer to expire
FAST DELAY Currently waiting for the Fast Transfer delay timer to expire
MAINS DELAY Currently waiting for the Mains Stable delay timer to expire
RUNNING LS units are supplying the load
STOPPING Stopping the ATS
SYNCHRONIZING Delay timers may be expired but synchronism is not
achieved yet.
--- ATS is configured Off
ATS Status Screen #2 contains breaker and synchronization data on the left
screen. On the right screen is advanced transition timing.
M A I N S : + + B U S : - - B U S T i m e r : - - -
M a i n s B r e a k e r : C L OS E D M a i n s T i m e r : - - -
G r p B r e a k e r : OP E N L O M T i m e r : 0 s e c
T o t a l D e l a y : 5 s e c F a s t T i m e r : - - -
ATS Status #2
Bus Timer: Countdown timer from Bus Stable Delay time. Will show ‘---‘
if not active.
Mains Timer: Countdown timer from Mains Stable Delay time. Will show ‘--
-‘ if not active.
LOM Timer: Countdown timer from Loss of Mains Delay time. Will show ‘-
--‘ if not active.
Fast Timer: Countdown timer from Fast Transfer Delay time. Will show ‘-
--‘ if not active.
Security Access
The EGCP-3 has built-in security to protect against configuration changes and
alarm log purges by unauthorized personnel. There are five levels of access to
the configuration menus. They are listed in the table below. Each successive
level has access to all of the levels above. A four-digit security code is required
for access to the configuration menus. If a proper code is not entered within 60
seconds, the display will default to the System Status display.
For security purposes, all passwords may be changed. In order to change any
password, you must log in at the Technician or Factory level. See Calibration
Menu for ability to change passwords.
Security access is cleared once the escape (ESC) key is pressed while at the
configuration menu screen. A password must be re-entered if accessed is again
desired. While in the configuration modes, the Status menus may be selected for
monitoring, then press CONFIG to return to configuration menus.
32 Woodward
Level Type of Access Default Password

Monitor View Status Screens, None Required
View current events and event history log
Silence-Acknowledge alarms
View and Reset (clear) current Alarm/Event
Operator View Status Screens, 9002
View Configuration menus
Supervisor View Status Screens, 9003
Set Time/Date, Peaking mode, and Peaking schedules.
View Configuration menus
Technician View Status Screens, 9004
Change Operator and Supervisor passwords,
Set all Configuration points, except engine run time and MW-Hour
accumulators
Factory Full access ****
Table 2-1. Security Access Codes
Entering and Changing Values

When changing component menu values in the Configuration mode, and to enter
the security code use the following procedure.
To change an analog value or integer: Use the Left or Right Scroll key to move
the cursor to the position or digit in the number that is to be changed. Then use
the Up or Down scroll key to change that number. To change another digit in the
number, use the Left/Right key to move to the next digit/position to change. If a
value cannot be changed, it may be a its highest or lowest limit. Pressing the Up
key when the digit is at 9 will roll the value to 0, and the digit to the left will
increment. Pressing the Down key when a 0 is displayed will roll that digit to 9,
and the digit to the left will decrement. After all digits have been changed to the
desired value, press the ENTER key to save the value. To return to the last
saved value, and return to the previous menu list, press the ESC key.
To change an action or function when a function string is shown: Press the

Scroll Up/Down key until the desired action/function is displayed. These selection
menus wrap-around, so all options can be seen when pressing the up or down
key. When the desired action is shown, press the ENTER key to save the
displayed action or function. To revert to the last saved function and to return to
the previous menu list, press the ESC key.
Configuration Menus
For descriptions on the configuration menu and how it is used refer to Chapter 3
Configuration.
Woodward 33
Chapter 3.
Control Configuration
Introduction
The EGCP-3 MC must be configured before it can be used. All configuration
points that are necessary for standard operation are available from the front
panel display. These configuration points plus additional points are also available
by using Watch Window software through the ServLink communications serial
link. The additional configuration points enable additional features but are not
required for basic operation.
Configuration with the Front Panel

To enter the configure mode, press the CONFIG key, and then press ENTER.
The cursor will move to the second line. After setting the proper Security Code
number, press ENTER. When a valid security code has been entered, the
configuration menu list will be displayed on the right side screen. If a low-level
security code is entered, the configuration menu, and all component values can
be observed, but only the values authorized for the entered code can be
changed. The configuration list allows the user to configure, calibrate, and adjust
all common items for EGCP-3 operation. Only four menu items may be viewed at
a time but the complete list is shown below for simplicity. The Up and Down
Scroll keys allow one to navigate to different menu items in the list. There is no
wrap-around feature in this menu. The blinking cursor will indicate which menu
item is currently selected. Pressing the ENTER key will display the selected
menu item components, press ENTER again to see and adjust the components
value or function. See the Menu Navigation section of this manual for more
information on navigating through the configuration menus.
Below is the general format of the configuration menu and how to navigate once
inside:
Configuration Menu List: Cursor will blink over the first letter of the menu item
listed above. Press ESC to exit configuration mode. The Security code will have
to be re-entered to return to the configuration menu. Press ENTER to move to
the component menu.
Component Menu: There is a ‘>’ (greater than) symbol as the first character of
each item to be configured. Press ESC to return to the configure menu list, press
ENTER to change the value.
Component Value: The component name and its value will be shown. The third
and fourth line will display the language selected, and display CONFIGURATION
MENUS to flag the value-adjust screen. If the proper security code has not been
entered the value can be observed, but not changed. Press ESC to return to the
component menu.
34 Woodward
ENTER After Security code is

CONFIG
set
ENTER
First Time Startup
Engine Protection COMPONENT
ESC Generator Protection MENU
Mains Protection
Engine Protection
>LANGUAGE
.
>GEN CT RATIO
.
>GEN PT RATIO
.
>GEN SENSING TYPE
.
>GEN HW RANGE
.
. ENTER
.
CONFIGURATION >RATED GEN VAR Component
>RATED GEN W
MENU . Value
ESC .
. RATED GEN W
503.34 KW
ENGLISH
ENTER CONFIGURATION MENUS
Saves New Value OR
Return To Original
ESC
Value
Figure 3-1. Navigation in Configure Mode
Configuration with Watch Window

If you will be performing configuration via Watch Window use the following
procedure to initiate communications with the MC.
1) Connect a serial RS-232 null modem cable between COM3

of the MC and your local computer
a. COM3 is a dedicated RS-232 ServLink
communications port located on the SmartCore
Board (board closest to the display)
b. The COM port is a female serial connector
2) Turn on computer and open Woodward ServLink I/O
software
3) Open a new network file by selecting NEW from the FILE
menu
4) Select the proper communications port
5) Select the Mode to be Point-to-point
6) Select a Baud rate of 115200
7) Press OK
The software will begin downloading the control information from the EGCP-3
MC. This process will take several minutes. When completed the downloading
screen will disappear and show an expandable control list. Save this net file for
future configuration.
Woodward 35
Once the .NET file has been saved open Watch Window. The Service and
Configure sheets in Watch Window are designed to mimic the front panel display
menu structure. This structure allows a user to utilize the Quick Configure feature
of Watch Window to create logical and manageable sheets (tabs) of parameters.
To create these sheets (menus), ‘click’ on the large Q near the left end of the
Windows Menu-bar. The table below indicates the sheets that will be created by
a Quick Configure agent. The agent will sort the Service sheets first followed by
the Configure sheets in order from left to right as shown top to bottom in the table
below. The window containing the Quick Configure sheets is referred to as an
Inspector Window. Multiple inspectors can be used at once. Customized
inspectors can be made by adding or deleting sheets, or parameter within a
sheet.
The organization of tunable parameters is important because of the sheer

number of them and due to the existence of a front panel display. The first
character of most sheet names is a letter to allow control of the sheet order.
Within the sheet, the parameters are numbered to control their order. This also
gives a logical reference to refer to parameters, i.e. generator overvoltage trip
level is set on sheet C, line 03. The numbering of the STATUSXX sheets also
controls their order of placement.
Parameters are separated in Configure and Service blocks. All parameters that
should not be changed while the MC is controlling LS’s are placed in Configure
blocks. Configure blocks require IO Lock to be set in order to allow changes in a
parameter. Many of the parameters in Watch Window Configure blocks are also
parameters in the First Time Startup menu on the front panel display.
Many of the Service sheets are intended to allow the user to monitor operation of
the bus and mains. The sheets named STATUS01 – STATUS10 will present
data that closely resembles the STATUS screens of the front panel.
There are additional configuration settings within many of the Quick Configure
tabs. They are inserted in a logical order together with the front panel content.
Service and Configure sheets and corresponding menu item(s) from the front
panel display are listed below. Those that do not have a matching front panel
menu are marked with ‘XX’ in the table below.
Corresponding Configure Sheet Names Comments / Function

Front Panel Menu
First Time Startup A# FIRST TIME CONFIG ## System Configuration values at installation
Digital Inputs B# DIGITAL INPUTS ## Define Function of Configurable Discrete
Inputs
Digital Outputs C# DIGITAL OUTPUTS ## Define Function of Configurable Relay Driver
Outputs
Corresponding Service Sheet Names Comments / Function

Front Panel Menu
System Status 01STATUS SYSTEM Displays the System Operating Status and
Values
Bus Status 02STATUS BUS Observe the Bus Operation Values
Mains Status 03STATUS MAINS Displays the Mains Operation Values
I/O Status 04STATUS I/O Displays EGCP-3 Inputs and Outputs
Sync Status 05STATUS SYNCHRONIZER Displays Synchronizer States
KW Load Status 06STATUS KW LOAD Displays Load Control Values and Status
PF/KVAR Status 07STATUS PF / KVAR Displays VAR/PF control Values and Status
Sequence Status 08STATUS SEQUENCE Displays Sequencing operation States
ATS Status 09STATUS ATS ATS function values
Alarms/Event 10STATUS ALARMS Displays Order of Alarm Occurrence and
Times
Metering Status 11STATUS METERING Displays power-hour values
36 Woodward
Shutdowns and A SHUTDOWN AND ALARMS Define Alarm Thresholds
Alarms
Bus Protection B BUS PROTECTION Define Bus Trip Levels
Mains Protection C MAINS PROTECTION Define mains Trip Levels
Metering Control D METER CONTROL Setup power meter reading
Synchronizer E SYNCHRONIZER Define Synchronizer operating Parameters
Real Load Control F REAL LOAD CONTROL Set Load Control Parameters
Reactive Load Cntrl G REACTIVE LOAD CNTRL Set Reactive Load Control Parameters
Process Control H PROCESS CONTROL Define Process Control Function, Parameters
Transfer Switch I TRANSFER SWITCH Define ATS Mode and Timing
Peaking Control J PEAKING Define Peak Shaving / Demand Control
Sequencing K SEQUENCING Setup Auto Start/Stop Conditions
Communications L COMMUNICATIONS Serial Port Setup Values
Calibration M CALIBRATION Set Clock and Hardware Input/Output
Calibration
Remote Alarm N REMOTE ALARM INPUTS Set Remote Discrete Alarm Functions
Analog Outputs O ANALOG OUTPUTS Define Function and Scaling of Analog Outputs
Analog Inputs P ANALOG INPUTS Define Function and Scaling of Analog Inputs
XX Q FORCE RELAYS Enables test and manual operation of Discrete
Outputs
XX R REMOTE CONTROL Monitor ServLink Parameters
XX S SEQUENCE STATES Use to Observe the State of the EGCP-3
breaker Sequence
XX T UNITS Displays the Units (KW, MW) of the System
XX U LON MESSAGING Displays the status of LON Inputs and Outputs
XX No corresponding menu on the front panel.
Table 3-1. Front Panel Menu ↔ Watch Window Sheet
Parameter Descriptions
Within a given menu in the following sections, each parameter will be described
in detail. Separating each parameter will be a quick reference block like the one
shown below. Details for the parameter will follow the quick reference block.
Item Display Name WW Min Max Default Units

Mains Over Voltage MNS VOLT HI LVL 50 30000 600 Volts
Alarm Level
The display name is the description used on the front panel display or in Watch
Window. The names may differ because the field is limited to 20 characters on
the display and 27 in Watch Window. Both interfaces use upper case for the
parameter name; the parameter value (when in text form) uses upper and lower
case. Numeric values may be shown as integer or real with appropriate
decimals. An “WW” in the WW column indicates that the item is only available in
Watch Window. “Min” and “Max” define the minimum and maximum values that
may be entered. The Default value is the value that this parameter will be when
shipped from the factory.
The Units column indicates the configuration units for a numerical parameter. For
items in electrical units, an asterisk (*) will precede the unit in the table. This
indicates that the units are variable (_, K, or M). The variable units depend on the
configured CT Ratio, PT Ratio, Sensing Type, and Hardware Range for the bus
or mains input. The appropriate units calculated by the EGCP-3 are shown on
the V UNITS sheet of Watch Window, or throughout the Status screens on the
display.
Woodward 37
In Watch Window, an integer value is used to select an item in an enumerated

list. Therefore, the Min and Max fields will show the valid integer value range but
the Default column will show both the text and the enumeration. In Watch
Window, the text related to the selected enumeration will always appear as
another row directly below the parameter being configured.
Alarm Action Definition

Below is the enumerated list for configuration of alarm action. For more
information on these actions refer to Chapter 9 Alarms.
Alarm Actions
Value Display Notes
Definition
Loss of Mains With Initiates LOM engine start, adds an event to the
8 LOM w/Alarm
Alarm alarm list.
Initiates an LOM start, no alarm is added to the
7 Loss of Mains LOM
alarm list
6 Trip Mains Breaker Trip Mains Breaker Mains Breaker is opened
Non-critical shutdown, smooth unload, open
5 Stop All Engines Stop All Engines
breakers, cooldown, then shutdown
A discrete output will be given, connected to an
4 Audible Alarm Audible Alarm external audible device, An acknowledge from
ALARM CLEAR will turn this output off.
A discrete output will be given, connected to an
3 Visual Alarm Visual Alarm external visual indication device. This is not
effected by an Acknowledge
2 Warning Warning An event will be shown on the alarm list only
1 Disabled Disabled No Action will be taken
Table 3-2. Alarm Action Definitions
Program Configuration Checks

In order to prevent improper configuration of the control, “sanity checks” are
made automatically in software.
Safety related Parameters (values that could cause equipment damage) must be
within a specified range, calculated from the following:
• Rated VA, VAR, Watts
• Function selection of discrete inputs
• Function selection of analog inputs
If an entered value does not pass the configuration check when compared to
other entered values, an alarm will be logged in the Alarm/Event list and the
control will not be available for operation until this value is corrected, and a
reset/clear given.
The sanity checks are as follows:
1) Rated W must be between 70% and 100% of Rated VA

2) Rated VAR must be less than 70% of Rated VA
3) No two Analog Inputs can have the same input configuration
4) No two Digital Inputs can have the same input configuration
If there is a configuration error it can be diagnosed with Watch Window on the 01

STATUS – SYSTEM page under 13 Configuration Status and 14 Contact In
Configuration Err.
38 Woodward
MC Configuration Menu’s
First Time Configure Menu
The First Time Startup Menu is included in both the front panel display and
Watch Window. Items in it can be viewed but not edited unless Auto, Test and
Run w/Load digital inputs are off or the control is in I/O lock.
Every item in the First Time Startup menu must ALWAYS be checked and
configured upon first usage of the control.

Language LANGUAGE Both 1 1 1=English NA
Currently the only Language available is English therefore it is not suggested to

change this value.

Bus CT Ratio BUS CT RATIO Both 5.0 30000.0 1.0 Ratio
This value represents a scalar for the bus ac current inputs. If a CT has a turns
ratio of 1500:5, then the value to enter here is 1500. The value actually
represents the Primary Turns on the transformer. The EGCP-3 will multiply the
sensed current at the input by this value to determine the actual current on the
bus for the given phase.

Bus PT Ratio BUS PT RATIO Both 1.0 1000.0 1.0 Ratio
This value represents a scalar for the bus ac voltage inputs. If a PT has a turns
ratio of 13,800:120, then the value to enter here is 115. (13800 ÷ 120 = 115) The
EGCP-3 will multiply the sensed voltage at the input by this value to determine
the actual voltage on the bus for the given phase. The EGCP-3 will also need to
know the next two parameters to fully define the voltage.

Bus Sensing Type BUS SENSING TYPE Both False True True=3∅
This value is an enumerated list that can be either 1∅ or 3∅ with a default of 3∅.
If set to 1∅, the EGCP-3 will ignore any inputs on the B and C phase bus ac
voltage inputs and current inputs, and set these phase values to zero. When 1Ø
is selected the power measurements will be a per-phase value, and not the total.

Bus Hardware Range BUS HW RANGE Both 1 3 3=240V
This value is an enumerated list that can be either 70, 120, or 240 Vac with a
default of 240 Vac. This setting is important to the EGCP-3 for both calibration
accuracy as well as ability to measure the voltage. The range limits for each
selection are indicated in the table below. When the bus or mains input drops
below the Dead Bus Voltage, Dead Bus operating mode to be initiated. Above
this value the generator/bus is considered active.
Value Configured Dead Bus Voltage Detected Maximum Voltage

Range
1 70 <27 Vac 100 Vac
2 120 <40 Vac 150 Vac
3 240 <80 Vac 300 Vac
Woodward 39

Mains CT Ratio Mains CT RATIO Both 5.0 30000.0 1.0 Ratio
This value represents a scalar for the mains ac current inputs. If a CT has a turns
ratio of 1500:5, then the value to enter here is 1500. The value actually
represents the Primary Turns on the transformer. The EGCP-3 will multiply the
sensed current at the input by this value to determine the actual current on the
bus for the given phase.

Mains PT Ratio Mains PT RATIO Both 1.0 1000.0 1.0 Ratio
This value represents a scalar for the mains ac voltage inputs. If a PT has a turns
ratio of 13,800:120, then the value to enter here is 115. (13800 ÷ 120 = 115) The
EGCP-3 will multiply the sensed voltage at the input by this value to determine
the actual voltage on the mains for the given phase. The EGCP-3 will also need
to know the next two parameters to fully define the voltage.

Mains Sensing MAINS SENSING Both False True True=3∅
Type TYPE
This value is an enumerated list that can be either 1∅ or 3∅ with a default of 3∅.
If set to 1∅, the EGCP-3 will ignore any inputs on the B and C phase mains ac
voltage inputs and current inputs, and set these phase values to zero. When 1Ø
is selected the power measurements will only be a per-phase value, and not the
total.

Mains Hardware Range MAINS HW RANGE Both 1 3 3=240V NA
This value is an enumerated list that can be either 70, 120, or 240 Vac with a
default of 240 Vac. This setting is important to the EGCP-3 for both calibration
accuracy as well as ability to measure the voltage. The range limits for each
selection are the same as those listed above for the Bus Hardware Range.
CAUTION
It is very important that PT Ratio, CT Ratio, Sensing Type, and Hardware
Range be configured for each bus prior to anything else. These values are
used to determine the units for all other configurable parameters.

Rated Bus VA RATED BUS VA Both 10 10000.0 156.0 *VA
This value is the Volt-Ampere (VA) rating for the bus. It should be based on the
bus side values seen by the PTs and CTs. Be careful to observe the indicated
units when configuring this parameter. When using Watch Window, the units are
in a separate Quick Configure Sheet labeled UNITS.

Rated Bus VAR RATED BUS VAR Both 1.0 30000.0 1000.0 *VAR
This value is the Volt-Ampere-Reactive (VAR) rating for the bus. It should be
based on the bus side values seen by the PTs and CTs. Be careful to observe
the indicated units when configuring this parameter. When using Watch Window,
the units are in a separate Quick Configure Sheet labeled UNITS.
40 Woodward

Rated Bus Watts RATED BUS W Both 0.001 30000.0 1000.0 *Watts
This value is the Watt (W) rating for the bus. It should be based on the bus side
values seen by the PTs and CTs. Be careful to observe the indicated units when
configuring this parameter. When using Watch Window, the units are in a
separate Quick Configure Sheet labeled UNITS.

Rated Bus Voltage RATED BUS VOLTAGE Both 0.001 30000.0 220.0 *Volts
This value is the voltage of the bus where the buses PTs are connected. Be
careful to observe the indicated units when configuring this parameter. When
using Watch Window, the units are in a separate Quick Configure Sheet labeled
UNITS.

Bus Configuration BUS PT CONFIGURATION Both 1 2 1=Delta(L-L) NA
This value is an enumerated list that can be either Wye (Star, Line-to-Neutral) or
Delta (Line-to-Line). If the item is set to Wye, the wiring between the bus and the
EGCP-3 is configured in a L-N manner. It does NOT necessarily relate to how
the bus is connected to the load. For example, the bus could be wired to the load
as Wye but wired to EGCP-3 as Delta using Open Delta transformers.

Mains Rated VA RATED MAINS VA Both 10 10000.0 240.0 *VA
This value is the Volt-Ampere (VA) rating of the mains tie. It should be based on
the mains side values seen by the PTs and CTs. Be careful to observe the
indicated units when configuring this parameter. When using Watch Window, the
units are in a separate Quick Configure Sheet labeled UNITS.

Mains Rated VAR RATED MAINS VAR Both 0.001 30000.0 1000.0 *VAR
This value is the Volt-Ampere-Reactive (VAR) rating of the mains tie. It should be
based on the mains side values seen by the PTs and CTs. Be careful to observe
the indicated units when configuring this parameter. When using Watch Window,
the units are in a separate Quick Configure Sheet labeled UNITS.

Mains Rated Watts RATED MAINS WATTS Both 0.001 30000.0 1000.0 *Watts
This value is the Watt (W) rating of the mains tie. It should be based on the
mains side values seen by the PTs and CTs .Be careful to observe the indicated
units when configuring this parameter. When using Watch Window, the units are
in a separate Quick Configure Sheet labeled UNITS.

Mains Rated Voltage RATED MAINS VOLTAGE Both 0.001 30000.0 220.0 *Volts
This value is the voltage of the mains bus where the mains PTs are connected.
Be careful to observe the indicated units when configuring this parameter. When
using Watch Window, the units are in a separate Quick Configure Sheet labeled
UNITS.
Woodward 41

Mains Configuration MAINS PT CONFIGURATION Both 1 2 1=Delta (L-L)
This value is an enumerated selection that can be either Wye (Star, Line-to-
Neutral) or Delta (Line-to-Line). If the item is set to Wye, the wiring between the
bus and the EGCP-3 is configured in a L-N manner. It does NOT necessarily
relate to the mains configuration.

System Frequency SYSTEM FREQUENCY Both 1 2 2=60 Hertz
This value is an enumerated selection that can be either 50Hz or 60Hz with a
default of 60Hz. It applies to both the generator and mains inputs.

System Phase Rotation SYS PHASE ROTATION Both False True True=CW, ABC NA
This value is a True/False selection that can be either CW (ABC-Clockwise) or

CCW (ACB-Counterclockwise). It is best to wire the PT inputs to the EGCP-3
with the same phase relationship as the actual generator, bus, and mains
combination. This configuration is used when determining negative phase
sequence metering values.

Group Breaker Type GROUP BREAKER TYPE Both 1 2 1=Breaker NA
This value is an enumerated selection that can be either Breaker or Contactor. If

the item is set to breaker, the EGCP-3 operates the Group Breaker Open (Shunt
Trip) and Close outputs in a manner consistent with connection to a breaker. If
set to contactor, the EGCP-3 operates the Group Breaker Close output as an
Open/Close output to open and close a contactor. When the contactor option is
selected, the Group Shunt Trip output is not used.

Mains Breaker Type MAINS BREAKER TYPE Both 1 2 1=Breaker NA
This value is an enumerated selection that can be either Breaker or Contactor. If

the item is set to breaker, the EGCP-3 operates the Mains Breaker Open (Shunt
Trip) and Close outputs in a manner consistent with connection to a breaker. If
set to contactor, the EGCP-3 operates the Mains Breaker Close output as an
Open/Close output to open and close a contactor. When the contactor option is
selected, the Mains Shunt Trip output is not used.

ServLink Address SERVLINK ADDRESS Both 0 15 0
When the ServLink communication is configured for Multi-drop (multiple ServLink

devices sharing the same information) enter the address of this control.

Unit Number UNIT NUMBER Both 1 16 1 NA
This is the LON network address for his EGCP-3. It must be unique for all units
communicating on the same network; two units cannot be assigned the same
number. The Unit numbers in the system need not be consecutive.
42 Woodward

Bus Segment BUS SEGMENT Both 1 4 1=A Segment
Assignment
Enter the bus segment this EGCP-3 is connected to via PT/CT and breaker
wiring. The table below shows the different bus segment options. Application of
Digital Input Selectable requires a digital input or multiple digital inputs to select
the bus segment. This also limits the functionality of the W, X, Y, and Z
tiebreaker feedback. Example: If an MC unit has digital inputs for Bus A and Bus
B, and they are closed, the unit will be on bus AB even if tiebreaker W is open.
Value Bus segment

1 A Segment
2 B Segment
3 C Segment
4 D Segment
5 Digital Input Selectable

Process Action PROCESS ACTION Both False True True=Direct
This value is a True/False selection that can be either Direct or Indirect. If set
TRUE, the action is set to Direct, and an increase in process is proportional to an
increase in kW. If the item is set FALSE, the control action is set to Indirect, an
increase in process is directly proportional to a decrease in kW. For example, a
co-generation unit that was being used to create steam would be a direct
process. An increase in kW would give an increase in steam. An example of an
indirect process would be a generator using landfill gas as fuel. As the generator
increased in kW, the gas fuel pressure would decrease.

Analog Input 1 Function AN IN 1 FUNCTION Both 1 7 1=Not Used
This value is an enumerated list detailed in the table below.
Value Command Display Notes

7 Remote Analog Level Alarm Analog Alarm Transducer connection for
alarm and value display
6 Remote KVAR Reference VAR Reference Overrides the internal VAR
control configuration
5 Remote PF Reference PF Reference Overrides the internal PF
control configuration
4 Remote Process Reference Proc/ImpExp Ref Overrides the internal
Process or Import/Export
level configuration
3 Process Control Input Proc Control Input Transducer connection
2 Remote BaseLoad Reference BaseLoad Reference Overrides the internal
BaseLoad configuration
1 Not Used Not Used

Analog Input 2 Function AN IN 2 FUNCTION Both 1 7 1=Not Used
The function of Analog Input 2 can be selected from the enumerated list detailed
in the table above.
Woodward 43

Analog 3 Function AN IN 3 FUNCTION Both 1 7 4=Proc Ref
in the table above.

Analog 4 Function AN IN 4 FUNCTION Both 1 7 6=VAR Ref
in the table above.
Digital Input Menu

The Digital Input Menu is included in both the front panel display and Watch
Window. All items appear in both. In Watch Window, the Digital Input Menu is a
Configure menu following the First Time Startup Menu. When using Watch
Window, IO Lock must be set.
The following table lists the configurable digital inputs. All digital inputs not listed
below are fixed function inputs and cannot be changed.

Digital Input DIGITAL INPUT Both 1 24 17=reset Alarm/Fault
1 1
Digital Input DIGITAL INPUT Both 1 24 2=Group breaker aux
6 6 contact
Digital Input DIGITAL INPUT Both 1 24 11=Remote Alarm #1
7 7
Digital Input DIGITAL INPUT Both 1 24 12=Remote Alarm #2
8 8
Digital Input DIGITAL INPUT Both 1 24 2=Voltage/PF/VAR Raise
9 9
Digital Input DIGITAL INPUT Both 1 24 3=Voltage/PF/VAR Lower
10 10
Digital Input DIGITAL INPUT Both 1 24 4=Load/Speed Raise
11 11
Digital Input DIGITAL INPUT Both 1 24 5=Load/Speed Lower
12 12
Digital Input DIGITAL INPUT Both 1 24 7=Load Ramp Pause
13 13
Digital Input DIGITAL INPUT Both 1 24 9=Process Control Enable
14 14
Digital Input DIGITAL INPUT Both 1 24 9=Meter Phase Select A
15 15
Digital Input DIGITAL INPUT Both 1 24 10=Meter Phase Select B
16 16
The configurable functions are shown in the enumerated list below. The
enumerations are identical for all the configurable digital inputs. No two inputs
should be configured to the same function. An error will result if two inputs are
configured for the same function and the engine will not be allowed to start until it
is corrected.
44 Woodward

28 Enable Bus Segment D Bus Segment D Puts control unit on bus D
27 Enable Bus Segment C Bus Segment C Puts control unit on bus C
26 Enable Bus Segment B Bus Segment B Puts control unit on bus B
25 Enable Bus Segment A Bus Segment A Puts control unit on bus A
24 Reset to Internal Load Reset Load Ref Should be a momentary switch
Setting
23 Z Segment Breaker Aux Z Breaker Aux Contact Breaker Connects Bus Seg D to A
22 Y Segment Breaker Aux Y Breaker Aux Contact Breaker Connects Bus Seg C to D
21 X Segment Breaker Aux X Breaker Aux Contact Breaker Connects Bus Seg B to C
20 W Segment Breaker Aux W Breaker Aux Contact Breaker Connects Bus Seg A to B
19 Unload Command Unload Command Ramp Load to minimum
18 Enable VAR/PF Control Enable VAR/PF Reactive Load Control Enabled
Control
17 Reset Alarm/Fault Reset Alarm/Fault Similar functionality to the Alarm Clear
on the front panel
16 Remote Alarm Input #6 Remote Alarm #6 See also Remote Alarm Menu
14 Remote Alarm Input#4 Remote Alarm #4 See also Remote Alarm Menu
10 Meter Phase Select B Meter Phase Select B Must be used together with Meter Phase
Select A as a multiplexed pair
9 Meter Phase Select A Meter Phase Select A Must be used together with Meter Phase
Select B as a multiplexed pair
8 Enable Process Control Enable Process Close to enable control for Process
Control
7 Load Ramp Pause Load Ramp Pause Pauses all ramping functions
6 Load / Speed Lower Load / Speed Lower Should always be used together with
Command Command Load/Speed Raise Command as a pair
5 Load / Speed Raise Load / Speed Raise Should always be used together with
Command Command Load/Speed Lower Command as a pair
4 Voltage/PF/VAR Lower Voltage/PF/VAR Lower Should always be used together with
Command Command Voltage/PF/VAR Raise Command as a
pair
3 Voltage/PF/VAR Raise Voltage/PF/VAR Raise Should always be used together with
Command Command Voltage/PF/VAR Lower Command as a
pair
2 Group Breaker Aux Group Breaker Aux Only required when MC is connected to
Contact Contact a group.
1 Not Used Not Used Configures DI for no operation
The Meter Phase Select pair is a multiplexed input pair intended to be used
together with analog outputs configured to indicate Power Metering values. The
output of the Power Metering analog outputs will follow the Meter Select
multiplexed input as indicated in the below table. There are four possible
positions of the Meter Select input. A ‘0’ indicates no connection and a ‘1’
indicates the input is active.
Meter Phase Select A Meter Phase Select B Meter Output

1 0 Phase A
0 1 Phase B
1 1 Phase C
0 0 Average/Total
When a Discrete Input is selected to have a function of Remote Alarm 1-6, the
alarm characteristics need to be configured in the REMOTE ALARM INPUT
menu.
Woodward 45
Digital Output Menu

Selection of Digital Output functions is included in both the front panel display
and Watch Window menus. Some configurable items appear only in Watch
Window. Configure: “C# DIGITAL OUTPUTS ## “ Watch Window menu is
located at the end (right) of the Quick Configure tabs. Items in the menu can be
viewed but not edited until the EGCP-3 is in I/O Lock. Some items from this
menu are also present on the front panel display in the CONFIG, Digital Outputs
menu.
Output channels 3,4, and 9 are pre-configured outputs and cannot be changed.
The function parameter in the Watch Window menu is an enumerated list. The
enumerations are identical for all the configurable digital output functions. It is
possible to configure more than one digital output for the same function, no error
will result.

2=Grp Breaker
Digital Output 1 DIGITAL OUTPUT 1 Both 1 23
Close Command
3=Grp Breaker
Digital Output 2 DIGITAL OUTPUT 2 Both 1 23
Trip Command
Digital Output 5 DIGITAL OUTPUT 5 Both 1 23 13=KVA Switch
Digital Output 6 DIGITAL OUTPUT 6 Both 1 23 4=LOM
Digital Output 7 DIGITAL OUTPUT 7 Both 5=kW-hr Pulse
1 23
Digital Output 8 DIGITAL OUTPUT 8 Both 12=EPS Supplying
1 23
Load
Digital Output 10 DIGITAL OUTPUT 10 Both 18=Warning
1 23
Digital Output 11 DIGITAL OUTPUT 11 Both 19=Stop All Engines
1 23
Issued
Digital Output 12 DIGITAL OUTPUT 12 Both 20=Trip Mains
1 23
Breaker Issued
Each configurable digital output can be one of the 23 functions described in the
enumeration table below.

25 Node Num Mismatch LON Node Num Node numbers on LON do not match the
Mismatch expected node number in the sequencing
menu
24 MC Loss of Power MC Loss of Power To configure an output for MC loss of power
to the control
23 Shed highest priority Load Shed Priority
Command to shed this load group
load group #3
22 Shed medium priority Load Shed Priority
load group #2
21 Shed Lowest Priority Load Shed Priority
Load group #1
20 Trip Mains Breaker Trip Mains Breaker
Open Mains Breaker command
Shunt Trip Cmd..
19 Stop all engines Stop All Engines Active when conditions call for all engines to
unload, open breakers, cooldown, shutdown
18 Warning Alarm Warning Alarm Active for any Warning or higher alarm.
Latches closed until alarm is cleared from the
alarm log.
17 Analog Pre-Alarm 4 AI-4 Pre-Alarm Provides discrete indication of an analog Pre-
Occurred Alarm occurrence
46 Woodward
13 KVA Switch KVA Switch Indicates when generator power output
exceeds a configurable level
12 EPS Supplying Load EPS Supplying Indicates when the generator(s) only
Load providing power to the load
11 Analog Alarm 4 AI-4 Alarm Provides discrete indication of an analog
Occurred Occurred alarm occurrence
7 KVAR-hr pulse KVAR - hr pulse Pulses every 100 kVAR-hrs for 100msec
duration
6 KVA-hr pulse KVA- hr pulse Pulses every 100 kVA-hrs for 100msec
duration
5 KW-hr pulse KW - hr pulse Pulses every 100 kW-hrs for 100msec
duration
4 Mains Failed Loss of Mains Used to switch external governor modes
3 Group Breaker Open Group Bkr Shunt
Open the breaker command
Command Trip
2 Group Breaker Close Group Bkr Close
Close the breaker or contactor
Command Cmd
1 Not Used Not Used Configures DO for no operation
The second half of the Digital Outputs menu is located in Watch Window only. It
configures the action state of the relay driver.
Item Display Name WW Min Max Default

Digital Output 1 DIGITAL OUTPUT 1 WW FALSE TRUE TRUE=Normally Open
Normal State ACTION
Normal State ACTION
Normal State ACTION
Normal State ACTION
Normal State ACTION
Normal State e ACTION
Normal State ACTION
Normal State ACTION
Normal State ACTION
Normal State ACTION
Normal State ACTION
The normal output state for discrete outputs can be Normally Open or Normally
Closed. Each can be configured to close (source voltage) when active or open
(float) when active. These modes mimic a Normally Open and Normally Closed
relay.
Woodward 47
MC Service Menus
Shutdowns and Alarms Menu
The Shutdowns & Alarms Menu is included in both the front panel display and
Watch Window.
Refer to Table 3-2 for the enumerated list of alarm actions. It is used in many
places within the Shutdowns & Alarms Menu.

Battery Voltage High BATT VOLT HIGH Both 1 6 4=Audible
Alarm ALM
Battery Voltage High BATT VOLT HIGH Both 24.0 45.0 28.0 Vdc
Alarm Level LVL
This alarm will trip if the input supply voltage exceeds this level for 1.0 second. It
should be set to a value higher than the normal battery charging voltage. The
action is defined by Battery Voltage High Alarm.

Battery Voltage Low BATT VOLT LOW Both 1 6 4=Audible
Alarm ALM
Battery Voltage Low BATT VOLT LOW Both 5.0 24.0 18.0 Vdc
Alarm Level LVL
This alarm will trip if the input supply voltage is below this level for 1.0 second. It
should be set to a value lower than the nominal battery voltage. The action is
defined by Battery Voltage Low Alarm.

PowerSense Board POWER MODULE WW 1 8 5=Stop All
Fault Alarm FAULT Engines
This alarm becomes active when the processor on the PowerSense board
determines that it cannot function properly. It will trip based on internal algorithms
that cannot be changed.
This alarm is continuously enabled.
Bus Protection Menu

The Bus Protection Menu is included in both the front panel display and Watch
Window. Refer to the enumerated list (Table 3-2) for configuration of alarm
action.

Bus Over Voltage Alarm BUS VOLT HI ALM Both 1 6 1=Disabled
Bus Over Voltage Alarm BUS VOLT HI ALM Both 0 30000 600 *Volts
Level LVL
This alarm will trip when the highest phase voltage is continuously greater than
the limit setting for the time delay setting. It is continuously enabled. It should be
set to a value higher than the Bus Over Voltage Pre-Alarm. The action is defined
by Bus Over Voltage Alarm.
48 Woodward

Bus Over Voltage Pre- BUS VOLT HI PRE- WW 1 6 1=Disabled
Alarm ALM
Bus Over Voltage Pre- BUS VOLT HI PRE- WW 0 30000 550 *Volts
Alarm Level ALM LVL
This alarm input is also the highest phase voltage, and is continuously enabled. It
should be set to a value lower than the Bus Over Voltage Alarm. The action is
defined by Bus Over Voltage Pre-Alarm.

Bus Under Voltage Pre- BUS VOLT LO PRE- WW 1 6 1=Disabled
Alarm ALM
Bus Under Voltage Pre- BUS VOLT LO PRE- WW 0 30000 400 *Volts
Alarm Level ALM LVL
The Bus Under Voltage Pre-Alarm is the lowest phase voltage and is enabled if an
LS unit is on the bus or if the group breaker is configured and closed. It should
be set to a value lower than Rated Bus Voltage and higher than Bus Under
Voltage Alarm. The action is defined by Bus Under Voltage Pre-Alarm.

Bus Under Voltage Alarm BUS VOLT LO Both 1 6 1=Disabled
ALM
Bus Under Voltage Alarm BUS VOLT LO Both 0 30000 300 *Volts
Level ALM LVL
This alarm will trip when the lowest phase voltage (or AØ when 1Ø is selected) is
continuously less than the limit setting for the time delay setting. This alarm is
enabled if an LS unit is on the bus or if the group breaker is configured and
closed.. It should be set to a value lower than the Bus Under Voltage Pre-Alarm.
The action is defined by Bus Under Voltage Alarm.

Bus Voltage Pre-Alarm BUS VOLT PRE-ALM WW 0.1 120.0 5.0 Seconds
Delay DELAY
This value determines the amount of time that the Bus voltage must be above the
Bus Over Voltage Pre-Alarm Level or below the Bus Under Voltage Pre-Alarm
Level before declaring an alarm.

Bus Voltage Alarm Delay BUS VOLT ALM Both 0.1 120.0 10.0 Seconds
DELAY
This value determines the amount of time that the bus voltage must be above the
Bus Over Voltage Alarm Level or below the Bus Under Voltage Alarm Level
before declaring an alarm.

Bus Phase Over BUS CURRENT HI Both 1 6 1=Disabled
Current Alarm ALM
Bus Phase Over BUS CURRENT HI Both 0 30000 1500 *Amps
Current Alarm Level ALM LVL
This alarm is continuously enabled. It first selects the Bus phase with the highest
current. It will trip when that phase current exceeds the set limit. It should be set
to a value higher than the Bus Phase Over Current Pre-Alarm. The action is
defined by Bus Phase Over Current Alarm.
Woodward 49

Bus Phase Over BUS CURRENT HI WW 1 6 1=Disabled
Current Pre-Alarm PRE-ALM
Bus Phase Over BUS CURR HI PRE- WW 0 30000 1000 *Amps
Current Pre-Alarm Level ALM LVL
This alarm is continuously enabled. It will trip when a bus phase current exceeds
the set limit. It should be set to a value lower than the Bus Phase Over Current
Alarm but higher than Rated Bus Current. The action is defined by Bus Phase
Over Current Pre-Alarm.

Bus Phase Over Current BUS CURR CURVE Both 0.01 10.0 1.0
Curve Shift SHIFT
This value acts to level shift the inverse time curve, defined by IEEE and IEC.
Increasing the shift value above 1.0 will increase the time delay, below 1.0 will
decrease the delay. See also Chapter 9 for a detailed description of the Inverse
Time Curve.

Bus Over Frequency BUS FREQ HI ALM Both 1 6 1=Disabled
Alarm
Bus Over Frequency BUS FREQ HI ALM Both 40.0 70.0 70.0 Hertz
Alarm Level LVL
This alarm and is enabled if an LS unit is on the bus or if the group breaker is
configured and closed.. It should be set to a value higher than the Bus Over
Frequency Pre-Alarm. The action is defined by Bus Over Frequency Alarm.

Bus Over Frequency BUS FREQ HI PRE- WW 1 6 1=Disabled
Pre-Alarm ALM
Bus Over Frequency BUS FREQ HI PRE- WW 40.0 70.0 65.0 Hertz
Pre-Alarm Level ALM LVL
configured and closed. It should be set to a value lower than the Bus Over
Frequency Alarm but higher than the System Rated Frequency. The action is
defined by Bus Over Frequency Pre-Alarm.

Bus Under Frequency BUS FREQ LO PRE- WW 1 6 1=Disabled
Pre-Alarm ALM
Bus Under Frequency BUS FREQ LO PRE- WW 40.0 70.0 45.0 Hertz
configured and closed. It should be set to a value lower than System Rated
Frequency and higher than Bus Under Frequency Alarm. The action is defined
by Bus Under Frequency Pre-Alarm.
50 Woodward

Bus Under Frequency BUS FREQ LO ALM Both 1 6 1=Disabled
Alarm
Bus Under Frequency BUS FREQ LO ALM Both 40.0 70.0 40.0 Hertz
Alarm Level LVL
configured and closed. It should be set to a value lower than the Bus Under
Frequency Pre-Alarm. The action is defined by Bus Under Frequency Alarm.

Bus Frequency Pre- BUS FREQ PRE- WW 0.1 120.0 5.0 Seconds
Alarm Delay ALM DELAY
This value determines the amount of time that the Bus frequency must be above
the Bus Over Frequency Pre-Alarm Level. This value also determines the
amount of time that the Bus frequency must be below the Bus Under Frequency
Pre-Alarm Level before declaring an alarm.

Bus Frequency Alarm BUS FREQ ALM Both 0.1 120.0 10.0 Seconds
Delay DELAY
This value determines the amount of time that the Bus frequency must be above
the Bus Over Frequency Alarm Level before declaring an alarm. This value also
determines the amount of time that the Bus frequency must be below the Bus
Under Frequency Alarm Level before declaring an alarm.

Bus Over Power Alarm BUS PWR HI Both 1 6 1=Disabled
ALM
Bus Over Power Alarm BUS PWR HI Both -30000 30000 1500 *Watts
Level LVL
Bus Over Power Rated BUS RATED HI- WW 0.001 10000 10000.0 *Watts
POWER
This alarm is continuously enabled. It should be set to a value higher than the
Bus Over Power Pre-Alarm. The action is defined by Bus Over Power Alarm.

Bus Over Power Pre- BUS PWR HI PRE- WW 1 6 1=Disabled
Alarm ALM
Bus Over Power Pre- BUS PWR HI PRE- WW -30000 30000 1000 *Watts
Alarm Level ALM LVL
This alarm is continuously enabled. It should be set to a value lower than the Bus
Over Power Alarm but higher than Rated Bus Real Power. The action is defined
by Bus Over Power Pre-Alarm.

Bus Reverse Power Pre- BUS REV-PWR WW 1 6 1=Disabled
Alarm PRE-ALM
Bus Reverse Power Pre- BUS REV-PWR WW -30000 30000 -10 *Watts
Alarm Level PRE-ALM LVL
Bus Reverse Power Alarm but lower than Rated Bus Real Power. The action is
defined by Bus Reverse Power Pre-Alarm.
Woodward 51

Bus Reverse Power BUS REV-PWR Both 1 6 1=Disabled
Alarm ALM
Bus Reverse Power BUS REV-PWR Both -30000 30000 -50 *Watts
Alarm Level LVL
Bus Reverse Power BUS RATED REV- WW 0.001 10000 10.0 *Watts
Rated POWER
Reverse Power Pre-Alarm. The action is defined by Bus Reverse Power Alarm.

Bus Directional Power BUS PWR CURVE Both 0.01 10.0 1.0
Curve Shift SHIFT
Time Curve.

Bus Over VAR Alarm BUS VAR HI ALM Both 1 6 1=Disabled
Bus Over VAR Alarm BUS VAR HI LVL Both -30000 30000 1500 *VAR
Level
Bus Over VAR Pre-Alarm. The action is defined by Bus Over VAR Alarm.

Bus Over VAR Pre- BUS VAR HI PRE- WW 1 6 1=Disabled
Alarm ALM
Bus Over VAR Pre- BUS VAR HI PRE- WW -30000 30000 1000 *VAR
Alarm Level ALM LVL
Over VAR Alarm but higher than Bus Rated VAR. The action is defined by Bus
Over VAR Pre-Alarm.

Bus Reverse VAR Pre- BUS REV-VAR WW 1 6 1=Disabled
Alarm PRE-ALM
Bus Reverse VAR Pre- BUS REV-VAR WW -30000 30000 -10 *VAR
Bus Reverse VAR Alarm but lower than Bus Rated VAR. The action is defined by
Bus Reverse VAR Pre-Alarm.

Bus Reverse VAR BUS REV-VAR Both 1 6 1=Disabled
Alarm ALM
Bus Reverse VAR BUS REV-VAR LVL Both -30000 30000 -50 *VAR
Alarm Level
Reverse VAR Pre-Alarm. The action is defined by Bus Reverse VAR Alarm.
52 Woodward

Bus Directional VAR Pre- BUS VAR PRE-ALM WW 0.1 120.0 5.0 Seconds
Alarm Delay DELAY
This value determines the amount of time that the Bus VAR must be above the
Bus Over VAR Pre-Alarm Level before declaring an alarm. This value also
determines the amount of time that the Bus VAR must be below the Bus Reverse
VAR Pre-Alarm Level before declaring an alarm.

Bus Directional VAR BUS VAR ALM Both 0.1 120.0 10.0 Seconds
Alarm Delay DELAY
This value determines the amount of time that the Bus VAR must be above the
Bus Over VAR Alarm Level before declaring an alarm. This value also
determines the amount of time that the Bus VAR must be below the Bus Reverse
VAR Alarm Level before declaring an alarm.

Bus Negative Phase BUS NEG SEQ- Both 1 6 1=Disabled
Sequence Over Voltage Alarm V HI ALM
Bus Negative Phase BUS NEG SEQ- Both 0 30000 150 *Volts
Sequence Over Voltage Alarm V HI ALM LVL
Level
Bus Negative Phase Sequence Over Voltage Pre-Alarm but lower than Bus
Rated Voltage. The action is defined by Bus Negative Phase Sequence Over
Voltage Alarm.

Bus Negative Phase Sequence BUS NEG SEQ- WW 1 6 1=Disabled
Over Voltage Pre-Alarm V HI PRE-ALM
Bus Negative Phase Sequence BUS NEG SEQ- WW 0 30000 100 *Volts
Over Voltage Pre-Alarm Level V HI PALM LVL
Negative Phase Sequence Over Voltage Alarm. The action is defined by Bus
Negative Phase Sequence Over Voltage Pre-Alarm.

Bus Negative Phase BUS NEG SEQ-V HI WW 0.1 120.0 5.0 Seconds
Sequence Over Voltage PALM DLY
Pre-Alarm Delay
This value determines the amount of time that the Bus Negative Phase
Sequence voltage must be above the Bus Negative Phase Sequence Over
Voltage Pre-Alarm Level but below the Bus Negative Phase Sequence Over
Voltage Alarm Level before declaring an alarm.

Bus Negative Phase BUS NEG SEQ-V HI Both 0.1 120.0 10.0 Seconds
Sequence Over Voltage ALM DLY
Alarm Delay
Sequence voltage must be above the Bus Negative Phase Sequence Over
Woodward 53

Bus Negative Phase Sequence BUS NEG SEQ-I Both 1 6 1=Disabled
Over Current Alarm HI ALM
Bus Negative Phase Sequence BUS NEG SEQ-I Both 0 30000 150 Amps
Over Current Alarm Level HI ALM LVL
Bus Negative Phase Sequence Over Current Pre-Alarm but lower than Bus
Rated Current. The action is defined by Bus Negative Phase Sequence Over
Current Alarm.

Bus Negative Phase Sequence BUS NEG SEQ-I WW 1 6 Disabled
Over Current Pre-Alarm HI PRE-ALM
Bus Negative Phase Sequence BUS NEG SEQ-I WW 0 30000 100 Amps
Over Current Pre-Alarm Level HI PALM LV
Negative Phase Sequence Over Current Alarm. The action is defined by Bus
Negative Phase Sequence Over Current Pre-Alarm.

Bus Negative Phase BUS NEG SEQ-I HI WW 0.1 120 5 Seconds
Sequence Over Current PALM DL
Pre-Alarm Delay
Sequence Current must be above the Bus Negative Phase Sequence Over
Current Pre-Alarm Level but below the Bus Negative Phase Sequence Over
Current Alarm Level before declaring an alarm.

Bus Negative Phase BUS NEG SEQ-I HI Both 0.1 120 10 Seconds
Sequence Over Current ALM DLY
Alarm Delay
Sequence Current must be above the Bus Negative Phase Sequence Over

Bus Phase Current BUS DIFF CURRENT Both 1 6 5=Stop
Differential Alarm ALM All
Engines
Bus Phase Current BUS DIFF CURRENT Both 0 30000 150 *Amps
Differential High Alarm ALM LVL
Level
Bus Phase Current Differential Pre-Alarm but lower than Rated Bus Current. The
action is defined by Bus Phase Current Differential Alarm.
54 Woodward

Bus Phase Current BUS DIFF WW 1 6 1=Disabled
Differential Pre-Alarm CURRENT PRE-
ALM
Bus Phase Current BUS DIFF CURR WW 0 30000 100 *Amps
Differential High Pre- PREALM LVL
Alarm Level
Phase Current Differential Alarm. The action is defined by Bus Phase Current
Differential Pre-Alarm.

Bus Phase Current BUS DIFF CURR Both 0.01 10.0 1.0
Differential Curve Shift SHIFT
Time Curve.

Bus Voltage Restrained BUS RES CURR HI Both 1 6 1=Disabled
Phase Over Current ALM
Alarm
Bus Voltage Restrained BUS RES CURR HI Both 0 30000 1500 *Amps
Phase Over Current ALM LVL
Alarm Level
Bus Voltage Restrained Phase Over Current Pre-Alarm. The action is defined by
Bus Voltage Restrained Phase Over Current Alarm.

Bus Voltage Restrained BUS RES CURR HI WW 1 6 1=Disabled
Phase Over Current Pre- PRE-ALM
Alarm
Bus Voltage Restrained BUS RES CURR HI WW 0 30000 1000 *Amps
Phase Over Current Pre- PALM LVL
Alarm Level
Voltage Restrained Phase Over Current Alarm but higher than Rated Bus
Current. The action is defined by Bus Voltage Restrained Phase Over Current
Pre-Alarm.

Bus Voltage Restrained BUS RES CURVE Both 0.01 10 1.0
Phase Over Current SHIFT
Curve Shift
Time Curve.
Woodward 55

Bus Breaker Aux BUS FEEDBACK WW 1 6 1=Disabled
Feedback-Alarm ERROR ALM
Set the alarm action for an error of the EGCP-3 Bus breaker output not matching
the auxiliary contact input.

Bus Breaker Opening BUS SHUNT TRIP WW 1 6 5=Stop All
Alarm ERROR Engines
Set the alarm action for an error of the EGCP-3 Bus breaker shunt trip output not
matching the auxiliary contact input.
Mains Protection Menu

The Mains Protection Menu is included in both the front panel display and Watch
Window. Items in it can be viewed and edited with caution while the engine is
running. Items in this menu are part of a Service block. Refer to Table 3-2 for the
enumerated list for alarm action.

Mains Over Voltage MNS VOLT HI Both 1 8 8=LOM w/
Alarm ALM ALARMS
Mains Over Voltage MNS VOLT HI Both 0 30000 600 *Volts
Alarm Level LVL
This alarm will trip when the highest phase voltage is continuously greater than
the limit setting for the time delay setting. It is continuously enabled. It should be
set to a value higher than the Mains Over Voltage Pre-Alarm. The action is
defined by Mains Over Voltage Alarm.

Mains Over Voltage Pre- MNS VOLT HI PRE- WW 1 8 1=Disabled
Alarm ALM
Mains Over Voltage Pre- MNS VOLT HI PRE- WW 0 30000 550 *Volts
Alarm Level ALM LVL
This alarm input is also the highest phase voltage, and is continuously enabled. It
should be set to a value lower than the Mains Over Voltage Alarm. The action is
defined by Mains Over Voltage Pre-Alarm.

Mains Under Voltage MNS VOLT LO WW 1 8 1=Disabled
Pre-Alarm PRE-ALM
Mains Under Voltage MNS VOLT LO WW 0 30000 400 *Volts
Pre-Alarm Level PRE-ALM LVL
This alarm is only enabled when the Mains breaker is closed. It should be set to
a value lower than Rated Mains Voltage and higher than Mains Under Voltage
Alarm. The action is defined by Mains Under Voltage Pre-Alarm.
56 Woodward

Mains Under Voltage MNS VOLT LO Both 1 8 8=LOM w/
Alarm ALM ALARMS
Mains Under Voltage MNS VOLT LO LVL Both 0 30000 300 *Volts
Alarm Level
This alarm will trip when the lowest phase voltage (or AØ when 1Ø is selected) is
continuously less than the limit setting for the time delay setting. It is only
enabled when the Mains breaker is closed. It should be set to a value lower than
the Mains Under Voltage Pre-Alarm. The action is defined by Mains Under
Voltage Alarm.

Mains Voltage Pre-Alarm MNS VOLT PRE- WW 0.1 120.0 5.0 Seconds
Delay ALM DELAY
This value determines the amount of time that the Mains voltage must be above
the Mains Over Voltage Pre-Alarm Level or below the Mains Under Voltage Pre-
Alarm Level before declaring an alarm.

Mains Voltage Alarm MNS VOLT ALM Both 0.1 120.0 10.0 Seconds
Delay DELAY
This value determines the amount of time that the Mains voltage must be above
the Mains Over Voltage Alarm Level, or below the Mains Under Voltage Alarm
Level before declaring an alarm.

Mains Phase Over MNS CURRENT HI Both 1 8 2=Warning
Current Alarm ALM
Mains Phase Over MNS CURRENT HI Both 0 30000 1500 *Amps
Current Alarm Level LVL
This alarm is continuously enabled. It first selects the Mains phase with the
highest current. It will trip when that phase current exceeds the set limit. It should
be set to a value higher than the Mains Phase Over Current Pre-Alarm. The
action is defined by Mains Phase Over Current Alarm.

Mains Phase Over MNS CURRENT HI WW 1 6 1=Disabled
Current Pre-Alarm PRE-ALM
Mains Phase Over MNS CURRENT HI WW 0 30000 1000 *Amps
Current Pre-Alarm Level PRE-ALM LVL
This alarm is continuously enabled. It will trip when a Mains phase current
exceeds the set limit. It should be set to a value lower than the Mains Phase
Over Current Alarm but higher than Rated Mains Current. The action is defined
by Mains Phase Over Current Pre-Alarm.

Mains Phase Over MNS CURR Both 0.01 10.0 1.0
Current Curve Shift CURVE SHIFT
Time Curve.
Woodward 57

Mains Over Frequency MNS FREQ HI ALM Both 1 8 8=LOM w/
Alarm ALARMS
Mains Over Frequency MNS FREQ HI LVL Both 40.0 70.0 70.0 Hertz
Alarm Level
Mains Over Frequency Pre-Alarm. The action is defined by Mains Over
Frequency Alarm.

Mains Over Frequency MNS FREQ HI PRE- WW 1 8 1=Disabled
Pre-Alarm ALM
Mains Over Frequency MNS FREQ HI PRE- WW 40.0 70.0 65.0 Hertz
This alarm is continuously enabled. It should be set to a value lower than the
Mains Over Frequency Alarm but higher than the System Rated Frequency. The
action is defined by Mains Over Frequency Pre-Alarm.

Mains Under Frequency MNS FREQ LO PRE- WW 1 8 1=Disabled
Pre-Alarm ALM
Mains Under Frequency MNS FREQ LO PRE- WW 40.0 70.0 45.0 Hertz
This alarm is only enabled only when the Mains breaker is closed. It should be
set to a value lower than System Rated Frequency and higher than Mains Under
Frequency Alarm. The action is defined by Mains Under Frequency Pre-Alarm.

Mains Under Frequency MNS FREQ LO ALM Both 1 8 8=LOM w/
Alarm ALARMS
Mains Under Frequency MNS FREQ LO LVL Both 40.0 70.0 40.0 Hertz
Alarm Level
This alarm is only enabled when the Mains breaker is closed. It should be set to
a value lower than the Mains Under Frequency Pre-Alarm. The action is defined
by Mains Under Frequency Alarm.

Mains Frequency Pre- MNS FREQ PRE- WW 0.1 120.0 5.0 Seconds
Alarm Delay ALM DELAY
This value determines the amount of time that the Mains frequency must be
above the Mains Over Frequency Pre-Alarm Level. This value also determines
the amount of time that the Mains frequency must be below the Mains Under
Frequency Pre-Alarm Level before declaring an alarm.

Mains Frequency Alarm MNS FREQ ALM Both 0.1 120.0 10.0 Seconds
Delay DELAY
This value determines the amount of time that the Mains frequency must be
above the Mains Over Frequency Alarm Level before declaring an alarm. This
value also determines the amount of time that the Mains frequency must be
below the Mains Under Frequency Alarm Level before declaring an alarm.
58 Woodward

Mains Export Power MNS EXP-PWR Both 1 6 6=Trip
Alarm HI ALM Mains Bkr
Mains Export Power MNS EXP-PWR Both -30000 30000 1500 *Watts
Alarm Level HI ALM LVL
Mains Export Rated MNS EXP RATED WW 0.001 10000 10.0 *Watts
Power POWER
This alarm is continuously enabled. It should be set to a value indicating the

Mains export level is above an alarm condition. . The action is defined by Mains
Export Power Alarm. Negative numbers indicate Importing power and Positive
numbers indicate exporting power.

Mains Export Power MNS EXP-PWR HI WW 1 6 1=Disabled
Pre-Alarm PRE-ALM
Mains Export Power BS EX-PW PRE- WW -30000 30000 1000 *Watts

Mains export level is above a warning (pre-alarm) condition. The action is
defined by Mains Export Power Pre-Alarm. Negative numbers indicate Importing
power and Positive numbers indicate exporting power.

Mains Import Power MNS IMP-PWR WW 1 6 1=Disabled
Pre-Alarm PRE-ALM
Mains Import Power MNS IMP-PWR WW -30000 30000 -10 *Watts
Pre-Alarm Level PRE-ALM LVL

Mains import level is greater (more negative) than an alarm condition. The action
is defined by Mains Import Power Pre-Alarm. Negative numbers indicate
Importing power and Positive numbers indicate exporting power.

Mains Import Power MNS IMP-PWR Both 1 6 2=Warning
Alarm ALM
Mains Import Power MNS IMP-PWR Both -30000 30000 -100 *Watts
Alarm Level ALM LVL
Mains Import Rated MNS IMP RATED WW 0.001 10000 10000.0 *Watts
Power POWER

Mains import level is greater than a warning (pre-alarm) condition. The action is
defined by Mains Import Power Alarm. Negative numbers indicate Importing
power and Positive numbers indicate exporting power.

Mains Directional Power MNS PWR CURVE Both 0.01 10.0 1.0
Curve Shift SHIFT
Time Curve.
Woodward 59

Mains Export VAR MNS EXP-VAR HI Both 1 6 6=Trip
Alarm ALM Mains
Breaker
Mains Export VAR MNS EXP-VAR HI Both -30000 30000 1500 *VAR
Alarm Level ALM LVL

Mains export VAR level is greater than an alarm condition. The action is defined
by Mains Export VAR Alarm. Negative numbers indicate a leading or capacitive
power factor and Positive numbers indicate a lagging or inductive power factor.

Mains Export VAR Pre- MNS EXP-VAR HI WW 1 6 1=Disabled
Alarm PRE-ALM
Mains Export VAR Pre- MNS EXP-VAR HI WW -30000 30000 1000 *VAR

Mains export VAR level is greater than a warning (pre-alarm) condition. The
action is defined by Mains Export VAR Pre-Alarm. Negative numbers indicate a
leading or capacitive power factor and Positive numbers indicate a lagging or
inductive power factor.

Mains Import VAR Pre- MNS IMP-VAR WW 1 6 1=Disabled
Alarm PRE-ALM
Mains Import VAR Pre- MNS IMP-VAR WW -30000 30000 -10 *VAR

Mains import VAR level is greater than a warning (pre-alarm) condition. The
action is defined by Mains Import VAR Pre-Alarm. Negative numbers indicate a

Mains Import VAR MNS IMP-VAR Both 1 6 6=Trip
Alarm ALM Mains
Breaker
Mains Import VAR MNS IMP-VAR Both -30000 30000 -150 *VAR
Alarm Level ALM LVL

Mains import VAR level is greater (more negative) than an alarm condition. The
action is defined by Mains Import VAR Alarm. Negative numbers indicate a

Mains Directional VAR MNS VAR PRE-ALM WW 0.1 120.0 5.0 Seconds
Pre-Alarm Delay DELAY
This value determines the amount of time that the Mains VAR must be above the
Mains Export VAR Pre-Alarm Level before declaring an alarm. This value also
determines the amount of time that the Mains VAR must be below the Mains
Import VAR Pre-Alarm Level before declaring an alarm.
60 Woodward

Mains Directional VAR MNS VAR ALM Both 0.1 120.0 10.0 Seconds
Alarm Delay DELAY
This value determines the amount of time that the Mains VAR must be above the
Mains Export VAR Alarm Level before declaring an alarm. This value also
determines the amount of time that the Mains VAR must be below the Mains
Import VAR Alarm Level before declaring an alarm.

Mains Negative Phase MNS NEG SQ V Both 1 8 1=Disabled
Sequence Over Voltage Alarm HI ALM
Mains Negative Phase MNS NEG SQ V Both 0 30000 150 *Volts
Sequence Over Voltage Alarm HI LVL
Level
Mains Negative Phase Sequence Over Voltage Pre-Alarm but lower than Mains
Rated Voltage. The action is defined by Mains Negative Phase Sequence Over
Voltage Alarm.

Mains Negative Phase MNS NEG SEQ- WW 1 8 1=Disabled
Sequence Over Voltage Pre- V HI PRE-ALM
Alarm
Mains Negative Phase MNS NEG SEQ WW 0 30000 100 *Volts
Sequence Over Voltage Pre- V HI PALM LV
Alarm Level
Mains Negative Phase Sequence Over Voltage Alarm. The action is defined by
Mains Negative Phase Sequence Over Voltage Pre-Alarm.

Mains Negative Phase MNS NSEQ-V HI WW 0.1 120.0 5.0 Seconds
Sequence Over Voltage PALM DLY
Pre-Alarm Delay
This value determines the amount of time that the Mains Negative Phase
Sequence voltage must be above the Mains Negative Phase Sequence Over
Voltage Pre-Alarm Level before declaring an alarm.

Mains Negative Phase MNS NEG SEQ V HI Both 0.1 120.0 10.0 Seconds
Sequence Over Voltage ALM DLY
Alarm Delay
Sequence voltage must be above the Mains Negative Phase Sequence Over
Woodward 61

Mains Negative Phase MNS NEG SEQ I Both 1 8 1=Disabled
Sequence Over Current Alarm HI ALM
Mains Negative Phase MNS NEG SEQ I 0 30000 150 *Amps
Sequence Over Current Alarm HI LVL Both
Level
Mains Negative Phase Sequence Over Current Pre-Alarm but lower than Mains
Rated Current. The action is defined by Mains Negative Phase Sequence Over
Current Alarm.

Mains Negative Phase MNS NEG SEQ- WW 1 8 1=Disabled
Sequence Over Current Pre- I HI PRE-ALM
Alarm
Mains Negative Phase MNS NEG SEQ- WW 0 30000 100 *Amps
Sequence Over Current Pre- I HI PALM LV
Alarm Level
Mains Negative Phase Sequence Over Current Alarm. The action is defined by
Mains Negative Phase Sequence Over Current Pre-Alarm.

Mains Negative Phase MNS NEG SEQ-I HI WW 0.1 120.0 5.0 Seconds
Sequence Over Current PALM DL
Pre-Alarm Delay
Sequence Current must be above the Mains Negative Phase Sequence Over
Current Pre-Alarm Level before declaring an alarm.

Mains Negative Phase MNS NEG SEQ-I HI Both 0.1 120.0 10.0 Seconds
Sequence Over Current ALM DLY
Alarm Delay
Sequence Current must be above the Mains Negative Phase Sequence Over

Mains Phase Current MNS DIFF CURRENT Both 1 8 2=Warning
Differential Alarm ALM
Mains Phase Current MNS DIFF CURRENT Both 0 30000 150 *Amps
Differential Alarm Level LVL
This alarm is continuously enabled in 3Ø installations. It should be set to a value

higher than the Mains Phase Current Differential Pre-Alarm but lower than Rated
Mains Current. The action is defined by Mains Phase Current Differential Alarm.
62 Woodward

Mains Phase Current MNS DIFF CURRENT WW 1 6 1=Disabled
Differential Pre-Alarm PRE-ALM
Mains Phase Current MNS DIFF WW 0 30000 100 *Amps
Differential High Pre- CURRENT PREALM
Alarm Level LVL
This alarm is continuously enabled in 3Ø installations. It should be set to a value

lower than the Mains Phase Current Differential Alarm. The action is defined by
Mains Phase Current Differential Pre-Alarm.

Mains Phase Current MNS DIFF CURR Both 0.01 10.0 1.0
Differential Curve Shift SHIFT
Time Curve.

Mains Voltage MNS RES CURR HI Both 1 8 2=Warning
Restrained Phase Over ALM
Current Alarm
Mains Voltage MNS RES CURR HI Both 0 30000 1500 *Amps
Restrained Phase Over ALM LVL
Current Alarm Level
Mains Voltage Restrained Phase Over Current Pre-Alarm. The action is defined
by Mains Voltage Restrained Phase Over Current Alarm.

Mains Voltage MNS RES CURR HI WW 1 6 1=Disabled
Restrained Phase Over PRE-ALM
Current Pre-Alarm
Mains Voltage MNS RES CURR HI WW 0 30000 1000 *Amps
Restrained Phase Over PALM LVL
Current Pre-Alarm Level
Mains Voltage Restrained Phase Over Current Alarm but higher than Rated
Mains Current. The action is defined by Mains Voltage Restrained Phase Over
Current Pre-Alarm.

Mains Voltage MNS RES CURVE Both 0.01 10 1.0
Restrained Phase Over SHIFT
Current Curve Shift
Time Curve.
Woodward 63

Mains Breaker Aux MNS FEEDBACK WW 1 6 4=Audible
Feedback-Alarm ERROR ALM
Set the alarm action for an error of the EGCP-3 Mains breaker output not
matching the auxiliary contact input.

Mains Breaker Opening MNS SHUNT TRIP WW 1 6 4=Audible
Alarm ERROR
Set the alarm action for an error of the EGCP-3 Mains breaker shunt trip output
not matching the auxiliary contact input.
Meter Control Menu

The Meter Control Menu is included in both the front panel display and Watch
Window. Items in this menu are part of a Service block
All items in the menu have the same function: To force the accumulated power-
hour meter of the function to 0.0 Hours. Set the parameter TRUE and then return
it to FALSE.

Clear accumulated RESET MAINS Both FALSE TRUE FALSE
Export VA-Hours EXPORT VA-HRS
Export VAR-Hours EXPORT VAR-HRS
Export W-Hours EXPORT W-HRS
Import VA-Hours IMPORT VA-HRS
Import VAR-Hours IMPORT VAR-HRS
Import W-Hours IMPORT W-HRS
Synchronizer Menu
The Synchronizer Menu is included in both the front panel display and Watch
Window. Items in this menu are part of a Service block. A detailed description of
the synchronizer operation and configuration options is in Chapter 10. Refer to
Table 3-2 for the enumerated list for configuration of alarm action.
64 Woodward

Synchronizer Mode SYNC MODE Both 1 4 4=Run/Auto
This value is an enumerated list used to select the synchronizer control mode. It
may be Off, Check, Permissive, or Run/Auto. The mode may be selected by the
front panel display, Watch Window menu, or Modbus HMI. The last mode
selected by any of these interface methods will be the mode of operation used.
Off mode, the EGCP-3 performs no synchronization functions. All breaker
closures must be performed manually.
Check mode is used to confirm that the synchronizer works properly by allowing
synchronizing to be performed without closing the breaker. The Synchronizer
status screen can be used to observe the Slip, Phase, and voltage indication,
(Displays ++ when matched).
Permissive mode is used to replace a sync check relay function, the bias
outputs are passive, but the breaker command will be given when speed, phase,
and voltage parameters are within the window.
Run/Auto mode is the normal mode with active synchronizing and breaker
control.
NOTE: Due to delays in communication to the display or Watch Window the
phase information and breaker closing indication may be inaccurate or delayed
from actual values. This would be most obvious in systems configured with large
slip windows.

Synchronizer Gain SYNC GAIN Both 0.001 20.00 0.10
This value is the proportional gain of a P-I controller. It determines how fast the
synchronizer responds to an error in speed or phase. Adjust this gain to provide
stable control during synchronizing. Lower the value to slow the response.

Synchronizer Integral SYNC INTEGRAL Both 0.05 100.00 1.0
Gain
This value is the integral gain of a P-I controller. It determines how quickly the
synchronizer responds to a large error in synchronism and prevents low
frequency hunting and damping (overshoot or undershoot) when the
synchronizer is first enabled or when a speed transient occurs during
synchronizing. Lower the value to slow the response.
A monitor value of the phase angle, or Synchroscope is provided in Watch
Window to observe the response and assist with dynamic adjustment.

Voltage Matching VOLTAGE MATCHING Both False True True=Enabled
This value will Enabled or Disabled the voltage matching function of the
synchronizer. When enabled, the synchronizer output will match the bus and
Mains voltages.

Voltage Match Window VOLTAGE WINDOW Both 0.1 10.0 1.0 Percent (%)
When voltage matching is enabled, this value is the allowable percent the Mains
voltage may be above or below the bus voltage for the synchronizer to initiate
breaker closure.
Woodward 65

Type of Synchronizer SYNC TYPE Both 1 2 1=Phase
Action Matching
This value is an enumerated list that indicates Phase Matching (=1), Slip
Frequency (=2), or Off/None (=3). When Phase Matching is selected, the
synchronizer will match the Mains phase to the bus phase and hold the phase
error to minimum. When the phase error is within the configured error window,
for a time based on the slip window, the synchronizer will issue a breaker close
command. When Slip Frequency is selected, the synchronizer will create a
frequency error between the bus and Mains, the breaker close command will be
given when phase error is within the phase window.

Phase Match Window PHASE WINDOW Both 2.0 20.0 10.0 Degrees
This value is the maximum allowable electrical phase angle between the bus and
Mains when the synchronizer initiates breaker closure. This parameter is used
when either type of synchronizing is selected.

Slip Window SLIP WINDOW Both -0.30 0.30 0.1 Hertz
This value is the maximum allowed deviation in slip (frequency difference) from
the slip frequency reference when initiating breaker closure. For phase control, it
determines the maximum rate through the phase window. For slip control, it
determines the error in slip frequency from the reference.

Slip Frequency SLIP FREQUENCY Both -0.30 0.30 0.1 Hertz
Reference
This value specifies the slip frequency reference. This parameter is used when
slip frequency synchronizing is selected. For Phase Matching type, this value is
internally set to 0.0.

Close Attempts CLOSE ATTEMPTS Both 1 20 3
This value is the number of attempts the synchronizer will make to close the
circuit breaker. The synch reclose alarm (if enabled) will be activated and the
synchronizer will enter the auto-off mode if the breaker fails to close in the
specified number of tries. Woodward suggests setting Close Attempts to 2 or
greater for any application.

Reclose Delay RECLOSE DELAY Both 1 1200 5 Seconds
This value is the number of seconds between attempts to close the circuit
breaker. If the CB Aux contact remains closed for one reclose delay interval,
synchronization is assumed to have occurred. If the CB Aux contact opens
during the reclose delay interval, it is considered a failed closed attempt. The
EGCP-3 will remain in the selected operating mode (run, check, or permissive)
during the Reclose Delay interval.
66 Woodward

Mains Reclose Alarm RECLOSE MAINS Both 1 8 8=LOM w/
ALARM Alarms
Bus Reclose Alarm RECLOSE BUS Both 1 5 2=Warning
ALARM
This value is an enumerated list that defines the action taken when the
synchronizer has exhausted its reclose attempts without successfully closing the
associated breaker.

Synchronizer Timeout SYNC TIMEOUT Both 0 1200 0 Seconds
This value is the interval over which the synchronizer will attempt to get
synchronization. A value of 0 seconds disables the Sync Timeout function. The
interval begins when Mains voltage is detected above the Dead Bus value and
synchronization is activated. Failure to get a CB Aux contact closure within the
specified time will result in a synch timeout alarm. This time includes the reclose
delay and should always be longer than the reclose delay.

Synchronizer Timeout MNS BKR TIMEOUT Both 1 8 8=LOM w/
Alarm for Mains Breaker ALM Alarms
Synchronizer Timeout GRP BKR TIMEOUT Both 1 5 2=Warning
Alarm for Group Breaker ALM
This value is an enumerated list that defines the action taken when the
synchronizer has exhausted the timeout without successfully closing the
indicated breaker.

Dead Bus Closure DEADBUS CLOSURE Both False True True=Enabled
This value enables or disables the synchronizer's automatic dead-bus detection

and breaker closure functions. When enabled, the synchronizer will insure a
breaker closure signal when a dead-bus is detected and the genset is ready to
assume load. When disabled, the synchronizer will not be allowed to close onto a
dead bus. A dead bus occurs when the input voltage is less than the value given
in the hardware voltage range description.

Breaker Hold Time BREAKER HOLD Both 0.0 5.0 1.0 Seconds
TIME
This value specifies the maximum elapsed time the synchronizer will maintain
the breaker closure relay driver output. Failure to receive the CB Aux contact
signal during this interval results in a failed close attempt. The breaker closure
relay driver is de-energized when: the CB Aux contact signal is received, the
specified time expires, the Mains is out of the phase window, the Mains exceeds
the slip window, or the Mains voltage exceeds the voltage window (if voltage
matching is enabled).
Woodward 67

Group Breaker Close GRP BKR CLOSE Both 0.01 2.0 0.10 Seconds
Delay Time DELAY TIME
Mains Breaker Close MNS BKR CLOSE Both 0.01 2.0 0.10 Seconds
Delay Time DELAY TIME
This value specifies the time required for the circuit breaker contacts to engage
after receiving a closure command. It is normally found in the circuit breaker
manufacturer’s specifications. The EGCP-3 will automatically subtract this time
from the calculated time to initiate breaker closure in order to maintain proper
phase alignment when performing slip frequency synchronizing.
Item Display Name WW Mi Max Default Units

n
Synchronizer Gain Factor SYNC GAIN FACTOR Both 0.8 1.0 1.0
Synchronizer Integral Gain SYNC INT GAIN Both 0.8 1.0 1.0
Factor FACTOR
These values specify the change in proportional gain and integral gain when
synchronizing a multi-genset bus to the mains. The gain factors are incorporated
into the gain with the following equation:
SyncGain(new) = SyncGain(Config ) * GainFactor ( NumberOfLoadShareUnits )

The gain factor will increase stability if multiple units are attempting to
synchronize at the same time. The sync gain factor is disabled if set to 1.0.

Enable Sync Test ENABLE SYNC Both False True False=Disabled
TEST
This configurable enables the synchronizer block but disables breaker closure.
Typically used to measure phase and voltage differences across the breakers to
check that phases are correct.
Real Load Control Menu

The Real Load Control Menu is included in both the front panel display and
Watch Window. Items in this menu are part of a Service block. Refer to Table 3-2
for the enumerated list for configuration of alarm action.

BaseLoad Reference BASELOAD REFERENCE Both 0 100 50 Percent
(%)
This value is the internal default BaseLoad set point. This setting must be greater
than the Unload Trip set point. It is the Load command when in the BaseLoad
mode when in parallel with gensets on the bus.
The Watch Window menu has a monitor value of Generator load feedback,
system load divided by the online capacity.

Unload Trip Level UNLOAD TRIP LEVEL Both 0 100 10 Percent
(%)
This value is the Load Command sent over the LON when the Unload Switch is
engaged.
68 Woodward

Load Time LOAD TIME Both 1 7200 10 Seconds
This value is the time required to automatically ramp the load from the zero load
to the internal BaseLoad set point. It is only used when first entering the internal
or remote load control mode. The Load Rate is used for changes after reaching
the reference value. Ramp time in the increase load direction when switching
from remote BaseLoad or process control is proportional to the load time set
point.

Unload Time UNLOAD TIME Both 1 7200 10 Seconds
This value is the time required to automatically ramp the load from the internal
BaseLoad set point to zero load. It is only used when first entering the internal or
remote load control mode. The Unload Rate is used for changes after reaching
the reference value. Ramp time in the decrease load direction between
isochronous load sharing, remote BaseLoad, and process control, or other load
than that specified by the BaseLoad set point, is proportional to the unload time
set point.

Load Rate LOAD RATE Both 0.01 100.00 2.00 %KW / Sec
This value is the rate at which the load is increased when the raise load
command input is activated. This is also the maximum rate at which load is
increased when the 4–20 mA remote load setting input is changed in the
increase load direction.

Unload Rate UNLOAD RATE Both 0.01 100.00 2.00 %kW / Sec
This value is the rate at which the load is decreased when the lower load
command input is activated. This is also the maximum rate at which load is
decreased when the 4–20 mA remote load setting input is changed in the
decrease load direction.

High Load Level Alarm HIGH LOAD LEVEL ALM Both 1 6 2=Warning
The configurable defines the alarm action taken when the bus load exceeds the
configured High Load Level.

High Load Alarm Level HIGH LOAD LEVEL Both -30000 30000 300 *VA
This value is the highest load that should be carried by the bus. It may be lower
than the genset Rated VA but should not be higher.

Low Load Level Alarm LOW LOAD ALM Both 1 6 1=Disabled
The configurable defines the alarm action taken when the bus load drops below
the configured Low Load Level.
Woodward 69

Low Load Alarm Level LOW LOAD LEVEL Both -30000 30000 5 *VA
This value is the lowest load that should be carried by the bus. It may be lower
than the configured Unload Trip.

KVA Switch High KVA SWITCH HIGH Both 0 30000 30 *VA
Level LVL
This value is the load level at which the KVA Switch Discrete Output (if
configured) and/or KVA Switch Alarm (if configured) will be activated. Any load at
or above this level will latch the output active. The output will remain active even
below this level until it reaches the KVA Switch Low Level.

KVA Switch Low KVA SWITCH LOW Both 0 30000 5 *VA
Level LVL
This value is the load level at which the KVA Switch Discrete Output (if
configured) and/or KVA Switch Alarm (if configured) will be de-activated. Once
inactive, the switch will remain inactive until again reaching the VA Switch High
Level.

VA Switch Alarm KVA SWITCH ALM Both 1 8 1=Disabled
Action
This value defines the action taken when the MC has activated the KVA switch.
NOTE: Configures an alarm function, and can be used to trigger a stored event.
A Discrete Output configured for the KVA Switch will not be stored to the alarm
list or alarm history.

VA Switch Direction KVA SWITCH IMP/EXP WW True False False
This value defines the direction of power flow for the MC KVA switch. A True
value will enable the KVA Switch for Export action, false will enable Import
action.
Reactive Load Control Menu

The Reactive Load Control Menu is included in both the front panel display and
Watch Window. Items in this menu are part of a Service block. Refer to Table 3-2
for the configuration list of alarm action.

VAR/PF Mode VAR/PF MODE Both 1 4 3=PF control
This value is a list used to select the control mode. It may be Manual, VAR
control, PF control, or Remote Control. Manual is only used if no automatic
control is desired. Remote control is used if external equipment will control the
VAR or PF through the EGCP-3. This may be useful in order to still have the
ability for Raise/Lower switches and voltage matching during synchronizing.
Power Factor or VAR control is used when in parallel with the mains.
70 Woodward

VAR/PF Control VAR/PF AUTO WW False True False= Contact
Auto/Manual Enable ENABLE Enable
This value enables the VAR/PF action automatically without using any digital
inputs. True enables VAR/PF control, false disables the control. If value set to
false the VAR/PF control can be still turned on by using a digital input.

VAR/PF Off Level VAR/PF OFF LEVEL WW -0.5 0.5 0.0
This is the PF_CMD that is sent over the LON to the LS units when the MC is not
VAR/PF Enabled. It is used to perform a “Baseload PF” of the LS units. All LS
units will then run at the PF_CMD.

VAR/PF Gain VAR/PF GAIN Both 0.01 20.00 3.00
This value is the proportional gain of the reactive load P-I-D controller for all
modes of operation other than VAR/PF Sharing. This value determines how fast
the VAR/PF control responds to an error between kVAR/PF and VAR or PF
reference. The gain is set to provide stable control of kVAR or power factor.
Lower the value to slow the response.

Voltage Ramp Time VOLTAGE RAMP Both 0.0 1000.0 80.0 Second
TIME
This value specifies the time required to ramp the reactive load setpoint over its
full range, PF control, VAR control, Remote control, and Manual control.

VAR/PF Integral VAR/PF INTEGRAL Both 0.00 20.00 0.30 Repeats/Sec
Gain GN
This value is the integral gain of the reactive load P-I-D controller. It determines
how fast the reactive load control responds to an error between kVAR/PF and
VAR or PF reference. It prevents slow hunting and controls damping (overshoot
or undershoot) after a load disturbance. Lower the value to slow the response.

KVAR Reference KVAR REFERENCE Both -30000 30000 10 *VAR
This value specifies the desired VAR load at which to control in the VAR control
mode. It is active when Reactive Load Control is active, and the mode is selected
as VAR control. For monitor purposes, Watch Window displays the VAR load on
the generator.

PF Reference PF REFERENCE Both -1.0 1.0 0.0 PF
This value is the PF command sent over LON when in the PF control mode. This
value is continuous over the tunable range (lead = negative) of –0.50 <-> 0.0 <->
+0.50. Where values on a Power Factor meter are discontinuous at unity (0.5
LEAD <-> 1.0 .<-> 0.5 LAG). For monitor purposes, Watch Window displays the
PF Reference converted to values as seen on a PF meter, and displays the
measured generator average PF.
Woodward 71

PF Deadband PF DEADBAND Both 0.000 1.000 0.025 PF
This value specifies an error window about the measured PF input, inside of
which the power factor control will not adjust the PF command. This value is not
used for Import/Export Control.
Process Control Menu

The Process Control Menu is included in both the front panel display and Watch
Window. Items in this menu are part of a Service block. Refer to Table 3-2 for the
configuration list of alarm action.

Process Control Mode PROCESS MODE Both False True False=
Import/Export
This variable determines the source of the process control input. FALSE =
Import/Export control, and the process source is the Mains Power sensing input.
TRUE = Temperature/Pressure and the process source is an assigned analog
input (ANIN 1-4) from a transducer measuring the parameter to be controlled.

Process Proportional PROCESS GAIN Both 0.001 20.00 0.50
Gain
This value is the proportional gain of the Process P-I-D controller. It determines
how fast the process control responds to an error between process variable and
process reference. Lower the value to slow the response.

Process Integral PROCESS INTEGRAL Both 0.00 20.00 0.10 Repeats/sec
This value is the integral gain of the process P-I-D controller. It determines how
fast the process control responds to an error between process variable and
process reference. It prevents slow hunting and controls damping (overshoot or
undershoot) after a disturbance. Lower the value to slow the response.

Process Derivative PROCESS DERIVATIVE Both 0.01 100.0 0.20
This value is the derivative gain of the process P-I-D controller. It determines the
response rate of the process control for a large load error. Lower the value to
slow the response.

Process Deadband PROCESS DEADBAND Both -30000 30000 0
This value specifies an error window about the measured process input, inside of
which the process controller will not adjust its output. This is used for control of
processes with a large noise component on the input. Set to 0 for normal, non-
deadband control. It is configured in the same units as the process input.
72 Woodward

Process Droop PROCESS DROOP Both 0 50 0 %
This value is the load droop (% change in process control point with load)
desired based on process level. It is typically only used on a very slow moving
process.

Process Filter PROCESS FILTER Both 0.01 10.00 1.00 Hz
This value adjusts the bandwidth of the low pass filter for the process controller.
Higher frequency settings than default result in faster control response, but also
more response to system noise. Lower frequency settings result in slower control
response and less response to noise.

Process Control PROCESS REFERENCE Both -30000 30000 0
Setpoint
This value is the reference used by Temperature/Pressure process control. It is

configured in the same engineering units as the analog input sensor was
calibrated.

High Process Level PROC HI LVL ALM Both 1 6 1=Disable
Alarm
This value defines the action taken when the process exceeds the configured
High Process Level.

Process High Level PROCESS HIGH Both -30000 30000 10 User units
LEVEL
This value is the highest process that should be carried by the MC. The units are
the same as configured for the assigned analog input calibration. If the monitored
process exceeds this level, a High Process Limit Alarm will be issued (if
configured).

Low Process Level PROC LOW LVL ALM Both 1 6 1=Disable
Alarm
This value defines the action taken when the process drops below the configured
Low Process Level.

Process Low Level PROCESS LOW Both -30000 30000 -10 User units
LEVEL
This value is the lowest process that should be carried by the MC. If the
monitored process drops below this level, a Low Process Limit Alarm will be
issued (if configured).

Import/Export Real IMPEXP KW LVL Both -30000 30000 0 *Watt
Power Level
This value is the reference used by Import/Export process control.
Woodward 73

Import /Export Pwr IMPEXP PF LVL Both -1.0 1.0 0.0
Factor Level
This value is the Power Factor Reference when VAR/PF control mode is
selected for PF control. When in Import/Export control, the MC will control the
mains power factor to this value.

Import/Export IMPEXP VAR LVL Both -30000 30000 0 *VAR
Reactive Power
Level
This value is the VAR Reference when VAR/PF control mode is selected for VAR
control. When in Import/Export control, the MC will control the mains VAR to this
value.
Transfer Switch Menu

The Transfer Switch Menu is included in both the front panel display and Watch

ATS Mode ATS MODE Both 1 3 3=Closed Trans
This value is used to select the control mode. It may be Off, Open Transition, or
Closed Transition. Open Transition implies the mains breaker and any LS units
will never be closed simultaneously. Closed Transition implies that the local bus
will never be dead unless a loss of mains occurs without any LS units running.

Fast Transfer Delay FAST XFER DELAY Both 0.1 300.0 0.1 Seconds
This value is the amount of time to be in parallel with the mains on a closed
transition transfer. It is also used as a delay time in open transition transfers to
allow the local bus to completely decay before closing the group breaker. When
this configurable is set to a value less than 1 second, the load controller will try to
pick up the load in one step rather than in a soft ramp.

Mains Stable Delay MAINS STABLE DLY Both 1.0 30000 15.0 Seconds
This value is the amount of time to wait upon return of the mains before
transferring the load from the LS units back to the mains.

Bus Stable Delay BUS STABLE DELAY Both 1.0 30000 5.0 Seconds
This value is the amount of time to wait after the bus reaches rated speed
voltage and load capacity before starting the fast transfer timer (OT) or closing
the group breaker (CT).
74 Woodward

Load Surge High Alarm LOAD SURGE ALM Both 1 8 8=LOM w/
Alarms
This value is used to select the action taken when a load surge condition is
detected.

Load Surge High LOAD SURGE Both 25 300 100 % load / sec
Alarm Level LEVEL
This value is the level of load change within a single second that is to be
considered a surge. The alarm is only active when the mains breaker is closed
so as not to provide nuisance alarms due to block load pickup from a dead bus.

LOM Action Delay LOM ACTION DELAY Both 0.1 30.0 0.1 Seconds
This value is the amount of time to wait after detecting a loss of mains from any
protective relay, analog input, or discrete input prior to taking action.

EPS Supplying Load EPS SUP LOAD ALM Both 1 4 1=Disabled
Alarm
This value is used to select the action taken when the LS units are supplying
plant load without the mains.

Online Capacity TRANSFER CAPACITY Both 0.001 999.9 50.0 See
required to carry load Below
The Online Capacity (total capacity of LS units that must be running stable at
rated speed and rated voltage) must be greater than this value before continuing
with transfer switch transitions. See Chapter 17 for a further description of the
operation of Transfer Capacity.

Units the Transfer XFER CAPACITY Both 1 4 2=KILOWATT
Capacity value UNITS S
This value is used to describe order of magnitude of the transfer capacity value,
i.e. W, KW, MW, GW.

Zero Power ZPT Deadband WW 0.001 10.0 5.0 Mains
Transfer Deadband Powersense
Units
This is the deadband width around zero power transfer. If the power flow through
the mains is within this deadband the mains breaker will be opened on a closed
transition start.
Woodward 75

Loss of mains action LOM ACTION WW False True False
Configuring this variable for FALSE will result in a LOM action that will open the
mains breaker upon expiration of the LOM action delay and then start all LS units
and close them onto the deadbus. Configuring this variable for TRUE will result
in starting the LS units upon the expiration of the LOM action delay first and
when they are stable on the bus an open transition will take place. Without a
group breaker the action will always open the mains breaker upon expiration of
the LOM action delay.
Peaking Menu
The Peaking Control Menu is included in both the front panel display and Watch
Window. Items in this menu are part of a Service block.

Peak Shaving Mode PEAK SHAVING MODE Both 1 4 1=Off
This value is used to select the peaking control mode. It may be No Demand
Selected, Time Schedule Only, Load Demand Only, or Load Demand and
Time. When No Demand Selected, the LS unit(s) will not be started or stopped
automatically due to mains load level or on a schedule. When in Time Schedule
Only, the LS unit(s) are started and stopped on a clock and day schedule defined
by the user. When in Load Demand Only, the LS unit(s) is started and stopped
automatically based on mains demand level. If Process is asserted, the mains
demand may be controlled, otherwise, the generator set will be operated at its
base load setting. If Load Demand and Time is selected, either mains demand
level or the Time of Day timer will cause the generator set to start or stop. The
LS unit(s) will run if either demand level or clock time is in the run mode, and
continue to run until both clock run time expires and demand level is reduced.

Immediate Demand IMMEDIATE DMD Both -30000 -0.1 -1200 *VA
Start START
This value is the mains demand level at or above which the LS unit(s) will be
immediately started and paralleled with the mains without waiting the Load
Demand Time Delay. It will only be used if the Demand Only or Time and
Demand Level mode is selected. It should be set to a value greater than the
Time Delayed Demand Start but less than the Mains Rated VA.

Time Delayed TIME DELAY DMD Both -30000 -0.1 -1000 *VA
Demand Start START
This value is the mains demand level at or above which the LS unit(s) will be
started and paralleled with the mains after waiting the Load Demand Time Delay.
It will only be used if the Load Only or Demand Load and Time mode is selected.
76 Woodward

Time Delayed TIME DELAY DMD Both -30000 -0.1 -500 *VA
Demand Stop STOP
This value is the mains demand level at or below which the LS unit(s) will be
stopped after waiting the Load Demand Time Delay. It will only be used if the
Load Only or Load and Time mode is selected. If the Load and Time mode is
selected and the Time is currently active, this level cannot stop the generator set
until the time expires.

Load Demand Time LOAD DMD TIME Both 0 1200 30 Seconds
Delay DELAY
This value is the amount of time to wait after detecting load in excess of the Time
Delayed Demand Start or under the Time Delayed Demand Stop prior to starting
or stopping the LS unit(s).

Reset Demand Input RESET MC DEMAND Both False True FALSE
to the MC control
If set to True, the demand input average measured by the Power Sense input of
this MC control will be reset to 0.0.

Reset MC Max RESET MC MAX Both False True FALSE
Demand DEMAND
If set to True, the MC Max Demand tattletale will be reset to zero.

Reset Total Demand RESET TOTAL Both False True FALSE
DEMAND
If set to True, the total demand input average measured as the sum of all the
Power Sense inputs from MC controls on this active bus will be reset to 0.0.

Reset MC Max RESET TOTAL MAX Both False True FALSE
Demand DEMAND
If set to True, the total max demand tattletale will be reset to zero.

Demand Coefficient DEMAND Both 1 1200 60 seconds
COEFFICIENT
This value is the window of time (in seconds) used to average the Mains real
load in order to create a Demand Level. See Chapter 16 for information on the
demand coefficient
Woodward 77
Item Display Name WW Mi Max Default Units

n
Sunday Program SUNDAY PROGRAM Both 0 4 0
Monday Program MONDAY PROGRAM Both 0 4 0
Tuesday Program TUESDAY PROGRAM Both 0 4 0
Wednesday Program WEDNESDAY PROGRAM Both 0 4 0
Thursday Program THURSDAY PROGRAM Both 0 4 0
Friday Program FRIDAY PROGRAM Both 0 4 0
Saturday Program SATURDAY PROGRAM Both 0 4 0
These values determine the program number to use each day of the week. Only
1 program may be used each day. There are 4 total programs numbered 1-4.
Start and stop times for each program are configured independently below. If no
programmed starts/stops are desired on a given day, configure that day for
program 0.

Program 1 Start 1 Hour PROGRAM 1 START 1 HR Both 0 24 12 Hours
Program 1 Start 1 Minute PROGRAM 1 START 1 M Both 0 60 0 Minutes
Program 1 Stop 1 Hour PROGRAM 1 STOP 1 HR Both 0 24 12 Hours
Program 1 Stop 1 Minute PROGRAM 1 STOP 1 M Both 0 60 0 Minutes
This group of two configurable pairs defines a single run period. The LS Unit(s)
will start at the hour and minute configured by “Program 1 Start 1 Hour” and
“Program 1 Start 1 Minute”. The LS’s will begin to unload, cooldown, and stop
when the time has reached “Program 1 Stop 1 Hour” and “Program 1 Stop 1
Minute”. If “Program 1 Start 2” is configured to a time before “Program 1 Stop 1”,
the LS’s will continue running until “Program 1 Stop 2”.

This group of two configurable pairs defines a single run period. The LS Unit(s)
will start at the hour and minute configured by “Program 1 Start 1 Hour” and
“Program 1 Start 1 Minute”. The LS’s will begin to unload, cooldown, and stop
when the time has reached “Program 1 Stop 1 Hour” and “Program 1 Stop 1
Minute”. “Program 1 Start 2” is intended to be programmed to follow “Program 1
Start 1”. If either Runtime 1 or 2 continues into the next day, the LS’s will
continue running until the stop time is reached.

Program 2 start 1 is set up the same as described above for program 1.

78 Woodward




Sequencing Menu
The Sequencing Menu is included in both the front panel display and Watch

Failed Auto Start AUTO START SEQ Both 1 4 2=Warning
Sequence Alarm Action ALARM
This value defines the action taken when an LS fails to start when triggered from
LON. See Chapter 14 for more details on this alarm.

Failed Auto Stop AUTO STOP SEQ Both 1 4 2=Warning
Sequence Alarm Action ALARM
This value defines the action taken when an LS fails to stop when triggered from
LON. See Chapter 14 for more details on this alarm.
Woodward 79
Item Display Name Panel / WW Min Max Default Units

Expected Number of EXPECTED NODE WW 1 16 1
Nodes in the System NUMBER
If the Net Nodes from the LON does not match this number and a digital output is
configured for LON Node Num Mismatch the digital output will be set. Used to
validate LON health.
Communications Menu
The Communications Menu is included in both the front panel display and Watch

Serial 1 Type SERIAL 1 TYPE Both 1 3 1=RS232
This value is an enumerated list used to select the serial hardware interface for
Serial Port 1. It may be RS232 =1, RS422 =2, or RS485 =3. See the EGCP-3
Installation Manual for details on each.

Serial 1 Mode SERIAL PORT 1 MODE Both 1 2 2=ServLink
This value is used to select the software protocol interface for Serial Port 1. It
may be Modbus =1 or ServLink =2. Selecting Modbus will enable the Modbus
RTU slave serial protocol. Selecting ServLink will enable the Woodward ServLink
server protocol.

Serial 1 Baud SERIAL PORT 1 BAUD Both 1 12 11=57,600
Rate
This value selects the serial baud rate for Serial Port1. The following table lists
the possible baud rates:
Value Baud Rate

12 115,200
11 57,600
10 38,400
9 19,200
8 9600
7 4800

Serial 2 Type SERIAL PORT 2 TYPE Both 1 3 1=RS232
This value is used to select the serial hardware interface for Serial Port 2. It may
be RS232, RS422, or RS485. See the EGCP-3 Installation Manual for details on
each.

Serial 2 Baud Rate SERIAL PORT 2 Both 1 12 11=57,600
BAUD
This value selects the serial baud rate for Serial Port2. See Serial 1 Baud Rate
for a list of possible choices.
80 Woodward

Serial 3 Baud SERIAL 3 PORT Both 1 12 12=115,200
Rate BAUD
This value selects the serial baud rate for Serial Port3. See Serial 1 Baud Rate
for a list of possible choices.

Serial Modbus ID MODBUS ID Both 1 247 1
This value is the Modbus communication identifier or node address. This single
configurable will setup the identifier to use for Modbus on Serial Port 2. It will also
be used to setup the identifier to use for Modbus on Serial Port 1 if that serial
port is configured as a Modbus port. The Modbus ID will always be identical on
each port.

Modbus Timeout MODBUS TIMEOUT WW 0.1 100.0 10.0 Seconds
This value defines the amount of time that must pass without communication
from the Master before announcing a Link Failure. The same timeout is used for
Serial Port 2 and Serial Port 1 if Serial Port 1 is configured as a Modbus port.
However, the alarms generated by this timeout are specific for each serial port.

Modbus Reset RESET MODBUS Both True False FALSE
This value is a momentary reset used to reset a Link Failure. The same reset is
used for Serial Port 2 and Serial Port 1 if Serial Port 1 is configured as a Modbus
port. If no link failure is present on a given serial port, the reset will have no
effect. If a link failure was present, resetting the failure will allow the slave to
communicate again.

Modbus Link 1 MBUS LINK 1 WW 1 6 1=Disabled
Error Alarm Action ERROR ALARM
Watch Window contains a monitor value to show a Modbus Link 1 error alarm
has occurred.
This value defines the action taken when the Serial Port 1 fails to communicate
within the time-out period.

Modbus Link 2 MBUS LINK 2 WW 1 6 1=Disabled
Error Alarm Action ERROR ALARM
Watch Window contains a monitor value to show a Modbus Link 2 error alarm
has occurred.
This value defines the action taken when the Serial Port 2 fails to communicate
within the time-out period.
Woodward 81

Modbus Mains MBUS MULT – WW 1 4 1=1XMultiplier
Power Multiplier MAINS POWER
Volt Multiplier MAINS VOLT
Amps Multiplier MAINS AMPS
Modbus Bus MBUS MULT – BUS WW 1 4 1=1XMultiplier
Power Multiplier POWER
Modbus Bus Volt MBUS MULT – BUS WW 1 4 1=1XMultiplier
Multiplier VOLT
Modbus Bus MBUS MULT – BUS WW 1 4 1=1XMultiplier
Amps Multiplier AMPS
The Modbus multipliers are used to change the decimal place of the values sent
over Modbus. Because only integers can be sent over Modbus precision is lost.
For example if the power through the mains is 1.75 MW the value over Modbus
would be 2. Using a 1000Xmultiplier this value would now be sent over as 1750.
Calibration Menu
The Calibration Menu is included in both the front panel display and Watch
The EGCP-3 has a battery backed real time clock that, once properly configured,
will keep the date, time, and day of week even if control power is removed. Like
most configurable items the clock/calendar can be set from the front panel or
Watch Window, but the menu item differ depending on the tool used, so they are
listed separately here.
Front Panel Clock Setup:

Use the following three menus items when setting up the control from the front
panel Calibration-Configure Menu. Clock setting from Watch Window follows this
front panel description.

Day of Week DAY OF WEEK Panel Sunday Saturday Sunday
Select the current day of the week. It is part of the date and time configuration.
The Day is not shown with the clock/calendar status on the panel display. When
set on the panel, the day-of-week will not update until Enter is press while in the
SET DATE menu.

Set Date SET DATE Panel 1-Jan-2000 31-Dec-2069 01-JAN-2001
This value is the exact day in a calendar year. The Day, Month, and Year are
independently configurable as separate fields. Use the navigation keys to select
and change each separately. When the enter key is pressed, the calendar and
Day of Week will update to the entered values.
82 Woodward

Set Time SET TIME Panel 00:00:00
This value is the exact time of day. The Hour, and Minute, are independently
configurable as separate fields. Use the navigation keys to select and change
each separately. The clock is a 24-hour clock, enter 6 pm as 18. When the Enter
key is pressed the clock will be initialized to the Hour and minute and 0.0
seconds.
Watch Window Clock Calibration

The following is the Clock/Calendar configuration using Watch Window.

Current year UPDATE YEAR TO: WW 2000 2070 2001
Numerical value of the present year.

Current month UPDATE MONTH TO: WW 1 12 1=JAN
Enumerated list of the current month, This is the conventional list of January = 1,
February = 2, etc.

Current date UPDATE DATE TO: WW 1 31 1
Numerical entry of calendar date 1-31.

Current day of UPDATE CURRENT WW 1 7 1=Sunday
Week DAY TO:
This value is an enumerated list used to select the current day of the week
(Sunday = 1, Monday = 2, etc.). It is part of the date and time configuration.

Set Calendar UPDATE CALENDAR WW FALSE TRUE FALSE
TRIGGER
The EGCP-3 calendar will initialize itself to the entered calendar when the Up
Date Calendar trigger is set TRUE, then FALSE.

Current UPDATE HOURS TO: WW 0 23 0
time(hour)
Clock hours, 24 hour clock.

Current time UPDATE MINUTES TO: WW 0 59 0
(minutes)
Clock minutes.
Woodward 83

Set Clock UPDATE CLOCK WW FALSE TRUE FALSE
TRIGGER
Adjust the clock parameters above to the current time. The EGCP-3 clock will be
set to these values when the trigger is set TRUE, the seconds will be set to 0.0.
The trigger must then be returned to FALSE.
The next lines on the sheet will display the current date and time, and day-of-
week from the EGCP-3 to verify its setting.

Bus A∅ Voltage Scale BUS A∅ VOLTAGE Both 0.5 1.5 1 Per unit
Factor SCALE
Bus B∅ Voltage Scale BUS B∅ VOLTAGE Both 0.5 1.5 1 Per unit
Factor SCALE
Bus C∅ Voltage Scale BUS C∅ VOLTAGE Both 0.5 1.5 1 Per unit
Factor SCALE
Bus A∅ Current Scale BUS A∅ CURRENT Both 0.5 1.5 1 Per unit
Factor SCALE
Bus B∅ Current Scale BUS B∅ CURRENT Both 0.5 1.5 1 Per unit
Factor SCALE
Bus C∅ Current Scale BUS C∅ CURRENT Both 0.5 1.5 1 Per unit
Factor SCALE
Mains A∅ Voltage MNS A∅ VOLT SCALE Both 0.5 1.5 1 Per Unit
Scale Factor
Mains B∅ Voltage MNS B∅ VOLT SCALE Both 0.5 1.5 1 Per Unit
Scale Factor
Mains C∅ Voltage MNS C∅ VOLT SCALE Both 0.5 1.5 1 Per Unit
Scale Factor
Mains A∅ Current MNS A∅ CURR SCALE Both 0.5 1.5 1 Per Unit
Scale Factor
Mains B∅ Current MNS B∅ CURR SCALE Both 0.5 1.5 1 Per Unit
Scale Factor
Mains C∅ Current MNS C∅ CURR SCALE Both 0.5 1.5 1 Per Unit
Scale Factor
The Scale setting is used to match the input value and the EGCP-3 displayed
value. From Watch Window the EGCP-3 measured value is also monitored and
shown here to assist with calibration. These items are discussed in the
Calibration Chapter of this manual.

Operator Password OPERATOR PASSWORD Both 0 9999 9002
This value is the password to use when logging in at the Operator Level. It can
only be changed if logged in as a Technician.

Supervisor Password SUPERVISOR PASSWORD Both 0 9999 9003
This value is the password to use when logging in at the Supervisor Level. It can
only be changed if logged in as a Technician or Factory.

Technician Password TECHNICIAN PASSWORD Both 0 9999 9004
This value is the password to use when logging in at the Technician Level. It can
only be changed if logged in as a Technician or Factory.
84 Woodward

Factory Password FACTORY PASSWORD Both 0 9999 9005
This value is the password to use when logging in at the Factory Level. It can
only be changed if logged in at the Factory Level.

Disable Passwords DISABLE PASSWORDS Both True False FALSE
If set to False, all passwords are enabled to prevent unauthorized alteration of

critical parameters from the front panel display. If set to True, a password is not
required to enter Configure Menus at the Technician level. Technician level
access is required to change this parameter. This value will automatically revert
to False when the control power is cycled off and on.
Remote Alarm Menu

The Remote Alarm Menu is included in both the front panel display and Watch

Remote REMOTE Both 1 8 1=Disabled
Alarm 1 ALARM 1
Remote REMOTE Both 0.0 30.0 0.0 Seconds
Alarm 1 Delay ALARM 1 DLY
Remote REMOTE Both False True True=Active
Alarm 1 Level ALARM 1 LVL High
Remote REMOTE WW ~~~~ REMOTE ASCII
Alarm 1 Label ALARM 1 LABEL ALARM 1
This group of 4 configurable items is used to configure Remote Alarm #1. This
group can be configured and used even if no Digital Input is configured for
Remote Alarm #1. In the case where no Digital Input is configured for Remote
Alarm #1, the Alarm can be activated and de-activated via Modbus by changing
the “input state” of Remote Alarm Input #1 with Boolean Write commands.
The Remote Alarm 1 value defines the action taken when the input is activated.
The Remote Alarm 1 Delay value is the time to wait after activation of the input
prior to announcing the alarm condition.
The Remote Alarm 1 Level is used to configure how the EGCP-3 interprets the
input state. If set to Active Low, the absence of an input at the Digital Input
terminals will be considered an active alarm. This mode is useful for normally
closed contacts. If configured to Active High, Application of voltage at the Digital
Input terminals will be considered an active alarm. If using Modbus to set the
alarm states, only Active High should be used.
The Remote Alarm 1 Label is used to provide a customized name for the actual
device connected to the input. It is limited to 20 characters all of which must be
ASCII characters {within the range of ASCII(20) ‘space’, to ASCII(7E) ‘~’}.
Woodward 85

Remote Alarm REMOTE Both 1 8 1=Disabled
2 ALARM 2
Remote Alarm REMOTE Both 0.0 30.0 0.0 Seconds
2 Delay ALARM 2 DLY
Remote Alarm REMOTE Both False True True=Active
2 Level ALARM 2 LVL High
Remote Alarm REMOTE WW ~~~~ REMOTE ASCII
2 Label ALARM 2 LABEL ALARM 2
See Remote Alarm 1 above for configuration description.

3 ALARM 3
3 Delay ALARM 3 DLY

4 ALARM 4
4 Delay ALARM 4 DLY

5 ALARM 5
5 Delay ALARM 5 DLY

6 ALARM 6
6 Delay ALARM 6 DLY
86 Woodward
Analog Outputs Menu

The Analog Outputs Menu is included in both the front panel display and Watch
Window. Items in this menu are part of a Service block. There are 4 configurable
analog outputs that can be configured to measure several variables in the MC.
The Analog Output Function defines which configurable output will be displayed
by the output. The high and low calibration values are used to map the variables
outputs to the 4-20mA value of the analog output. For example, if an external KW
meter was needed for a remote visual reading the analog output would be
configured as follows:
Analog Output 1 Function – 5

Analog Output 1 Hi Cal – 800
Analog Output 1 Lo Cal – -400
This configuration would describe a system where the Mains KW was monitored
on analog output one (1). If the mains were importing 400KW the analog output
would read 4mA. If the mains were exporting 800kW the analog output would
read 20mA.
All analog outputs will be configured by the same mechanism.

Analog output 1 ANOUT1 FUNCTION Both 1 17 1=Not Used
Function
Input Value for 20 ANOUT1 HI CAL Both -30000 30000
mA Output VALUE
Input Value for 4 ANOUT1 LO CAL Both -30000 30000
mA Output VALUE

Function
mA Output VALUE
mA Output VALUE

Function
mA Output VALUE
mA Output VALUE

Function
mA Output VALUE
mA Output VALUE
The following is the list of configurable Analog Outputs. The configurables

marked by “Phase Based” in the notes can be configured to read the phase
values when used with the digital inputs “Meter Phase Select A” and “Meter
Phase Select B”. See the digital inputs configuration section for more details on
this feature.
Woodward 87

17 System Load System Load
16 Bus Power Factor BUS Power Factor Phase based
15 Bus Frequency Meter BUS Freq Meter
14 Bus KVAR Meter BUS KVAR Meter
13 Bus KVA Meter BUS KVA Meter
12 Bus KW Meter BUS KW Meter
11 Bus Current Meter BUS Current Meter Phase based
10 Bus Voltage Meter Bus Voltage Meter Phase based
9 Mains Power Factor Mains Power Factor Phase based
8 Mains Frequency Meter Mains Freq Meter
7 Mains KVAR Meter Mains KVAR Meter
6 Mains KVA Meter Mains KVA Meter
5 Mains KW Meter Mains KW Meter
4 Mains Current Meter Mains Current Meter Phase based
3 Mains Voltage Meter Mains Voltage Meter Phase based
2 Synchroscope Synchroscope
1 Not Used Not Used
Analog Inputs Menu

The Analog Input Menu is included in both the front panel display and Watch

Voltage or ANALOG INPUT Both 1 3 1=4-20mA
Current input 1 TYPE
Selection
User Defined ANALOG IN 1 WW ~~~~ ANALOG IN ASCII
Label LABEL 1
Sensor Value ANIN1 LOW CAL Both -30000 30000 0.0 User
at Minimum VALUE
Input
Sensor Value ANIN1 HIGH CAL Both -30000 30000 150.0 User
at Maximum VALUE
Input
High Alarm ANIN1 HIGH Both 1 8 1=Disabled
Action ALARM
High Alarm ANIN14 HIGH Both -30000 30000 160.0 User
Level ALARM LEVEL
High Pre-alarm ANIN1 HIGH WW 1 8 1=Disabled
Action PRE-ALARM
High Pre-alarm ANIN1 HIGH WW -30000 30000 100.0 User
Action PRE-ALARM LVL
Low Pre-alarm ANIN1 LOW WW 1 8 1=Disabled
Action PRE-ALARM
Low Pre-alarm ANIN1 LOW WW -30000 30000 0.0 User
Level PRE-ALARM LVL
Low Alarm ANIN1 LOW Both 1 8 1=Disabled
Action ALARM
Low Alarm ANIN1 LOW Both -30000 30000 -10.0 User
Level ALARM LEVEL
Pre Alarm ANIN1 PRE- WW 0.10 1200 5.0 Sec
Delay Time ALARM DELAY
Alarm Delay ANIN1 ALARM Both 0.10 1200 10.0 Sec
Time DELAY
Analog Input 1 AI1 OUT OF WW 1 6 1=Disabled
Out of Range RANGE
Alarm
88 Woodward
The configurable function of inputs 1 through 4 is selected in the First Time
Configuration Menu. In this menu, the user defines the calibration values for all
inputs. Inputs 1 - 4 can be configured for an alarm function and the alarm action
and alarm levels are set here.
Analog Input Type can be configured for 4-20mA(1), 1-5V(2), or Not Used (3).
The Low calibration setpoint defines the internal number that the control will use
as either 4mA or 1V. The High calibration setpoint defines the internal number
that the control will use as either 20mA or 5V. All alarms are then triggered off
the internal number in the control. All alarms are configurable similar the Mains
and Bus Protection menus.
In order to protect the analog input port, Out of Limits alarms for the Analog
inputs are also available. If the analog input is higher than 22mA or 5.5V or lower
than 2mA and 0.5V the alarm will be instigated. All analog inputs can be
configured by the same methods.

Selection
Label LABEL 1
at Minimum VALUE
Input
at Maximum VALUE
Input
Action ALARM
Level ALARM LEVEL
Action PRE-ALARM
Action PRE-ALARM
Level PRE-ALARM LVL
Action ALARM
Level ALARM LEVEL
Time DELAY
Out of Range RANGE
Alarm
The configuration of Analog input 2 has the same parameters and options as
Analog Input 1 described above.
Woodward 89

Selection
Label LABEL 1
at Minimum VALUE
Input
at Maximum VALUE
Input
Action ALARM
Level ALARM LEVEL
Action PRE-ALARM
Action PRE-ALARM
Level PRE-ALARM LVL
Action ALARM
Level ALARM LEVEL
Time DELAY
Out of Range RANGE
Alarm
Analog Input 1 described above
90 Woodward

Selection
Label LABEL 1
at Minimum VALUE
Input
at Maximum VALUE
Input
Action ALARM
Level ALARM LEVEL
Action PRE-ALARM
Action PRE-ALARM
Level PRE-ALARM LVL
Action ALARM
Level ALARM LEVEL
Time DELAY
Out of Range RANGE
Alarm
Analog Input 1 described above
Force Relay Menu

The items in the Watch Window menu to test the relay/discrete outputs are
shown below. Items in this menu are part of a Service Block. These configuration
points are to be used for troubleshooting only. If any are set true, the
corresponding digital output will be turned “on” so that wiring can be tested.
The fist parameter, ENABLE RELAY FORCING, must be set to TRUE before the
relays can be manually tested. To enable the test the control Mode Switch must
be in the off position, and Supervisor or higher password entered. If these
conditions become false, the relay test will return all relays to their normal
conditions. The FORCING ENABLE should be returned to False when the test is
completed. When the Enable Forcing is turned on, the output will remain in their
present state.
Woodward 91

Enable Relay ENABLE RELAY WW False True False
Forcing Test FORCING
Force DO 1 ENERGIZE RELAY 1 WW False True FALSE=off
Remote Control Menu

The Remote Control Menu acts as a remote human interface for the MC. Most of
the Digital inputs are available in this menu. To use this interface the control
must have its AUTO digital input on, after which all of the following commands
will become active. The MC can then be controlled by ServLink and Watch
Window commands. This menu works similar to setting up Modbus for remote
operation. The following is a list of the available commands in WW. Items that
can only be monitored are shown in the list as “Monitor”.

Acknowledge Cmd Input ACKNOWLEDGE ALARMS WW False True False
Reset Command Input RESET ALARMS WW False True False
Auto Mode Switch Input AUTO COMMAND WW False True False
Test Mode Switch Input TEST COMMAND WW False True False
Run Mode Switch Input RUN COMMAND WW False True False
Process Mode Enable PROCESS ENABLE WW False True False
COMMAND
Reactive Load Enable VAR\PF ENABLE WW False True False
COMMAND
Reset Load RESET LOAD COMMAND WW False True False
Unload Command Input UNLOAD COMMAND WW False True False
Ramp Pause Input LOAD RAMP PAUSE CMD WW False True False
Speed/Load Raise Input SPEED RAISE COMMAND WW False True False
Speed/Load Lower Input SPEED LOWER WW False True False
COMMAND
Synchronizer Speed Bias SYNCHRONIZER SPEED WW Monitor
BIAS
Voltage/PF/VAR Raise In VOLTAGE RAISE WW False True False
COMMAND
Voltage/PF/VAR Lower In VOLTAGE LOWER WW False True False
COMMAND
Synchronizer Volt Bias SYNCHRONIZER VOLT WW Monitor
BIAS
Remote Baseload Ref REMOTE BASELOAD REF WW Monitor
Read Phase A at Anout METER PHASE A SELECT WW False True False
Read Phase B at Anout METER PHASE B SELECT WW False True False
Reset to MC Load Ref RESET MC DEMAND WW False True False
Reset To Total Load Ref RESET TOTAL DEMAND WW False True False
92 Woodward
Chapter 4.
Monitoring by Watch Window
Introduction
The following pages describe the Watch Window sheets that contain information
used in monitoring the MC parameters. The status menus that have names
proceeded by numbers (example: 02STATUS BUS) are menus that have
parameters grouped similar to the front panel status screens. There are also
status menus that are only accessible by ServLink/Watch Window.
Sequence States Menu

The EGCP-3 uses a state machine for determining its operating mode at any
given time. The unit will step through these states are operating conditions or
modes change. Some states the control will skip or step through too quickly to
see indication change. This menu is only used for diagnostics.
Display Name Item

ISOLATED OPERATION Mains Breaker is open and Group Breaker is Closed
or at least 1 LS has its generator breaker closed
MAINS OPERATION Mains breaker is closed and there are no LS units on
the bus or Group is open
PARALLEL OPERATION Mains breaker is closed and Group breaker is closed
or 1 LS gen breaker is closed
SYNCHRONIZE GROUP_LS If actively synchronizing group breaker or LS units
SYNCHRONIZE UTILITY If actively synchronizing bus to mains
Units Menu
The Units Menu is included only in Watch Window. The purpose of this data is to
serve as units of measurement for all ac parameters in other Service and
Configuration menus
Display Name Item Units

MAINS POWER Mains Power Units W, VA, VAR; KW, KVA, KVAR; MW, MVA,
MVAR; GW, GVA, GVAR
MAINS VOLTAGE Mains Voltage Units Volts, Kilovolts
MAINS CURRENT Mains Current Units Amps, Kilamps
BUS POWER Bus Power Units W, VA, VAR; KW, KVA, KVAR; MW, MVA,
MVAR; GW, GVA, GVAR
BUS VOLTAGE Bus Voltage Units Volts, Kilovolts
BUS CURRENT Bus Current Units Amps, Kilamps
If a value of Kilovolt is observed, the related ac quantity is scaled by 1000. For

example, if Bus Voltage Units is Kilovolt than a value of 4.160 in Bus Rated
Voltage will be interpreted as 4160 volts. On the front panel display this can be
observed as the units changing to kV.
If a value of MW, MVA, MVAR is observed, the related ac quantity is scaled by

1,000 000. For example, if Bus Power Units is MW, MVA, MVAR than a value of
30.456 in Bus Rated Watts will be interpreted as 30 456 000 watts or 30.456
megawatts. On the front panel display this can be observed as the units
changing to MW.
Woodward 93
LON Status Messaging Menu

This menu is used for troubleshooting aid of the LON information only. It will help
an operator diagnose problems with LON communication. Here all of the inputs
into and out of the LON are compiled.
LON IN = Input from this application and sent to other LON Units
LON OUT= Output from the LON (other units) and input into this application
Display Name Item

01 LON IN - NODE NUM This units assigned unit/node number
02 LON IN - PF CMD Power Factor command value for all LS nodes
03 LON IN - LOAD CMD Load Command value for all LS nodes
04 LON IN - MON TBKR Enables transmission of segment tie breakers to other units
05 LON IN - TIE W W Tie Breaker Aux contact input
06 LON IN - TIE X X Tie Breaker Aux contact input
07 LON IN - TIE Y Y Tie Breaker Aux contact input
08 LON IN - TIE Z Z Tie Breaker Aux contact input
09 LON IN - BKR CLOSED Gen Breaker Closed
10 LON IN - MSTR CNTL This control is requesting to the Master Process Controller
11 LON IN - DEADBUS This unit sees the bus a being dead
12 LON IN - DB REQUEST This unit would like to close onto the deadbus
13 LON IN - VOLT RAISE Message for all other units to raise their voltage
14 LON IN - VOLT LOWER Message for all other units to lower their voltage
15 LON IN - SEND SYNC Enable send of the sync bias message
16 LON IN - SYNC BIAS Value of unit synchronizer bias signal
17 LON IN - MAINS DMD This units Demand value sent to other MC controls
18 LON IN - DMD UNITS Indicates the units (K, M, etc) of the Mains Demand value
19 LON IN - BUS SEG A Bus Segment A is Active
20 LON IN - BUS SEG B Bus Segment B is Active
21 LON IN - BUS SEG C Bus Segment C is Active
22 LON IN - BUS SEG D Bus Segment D is Active
23 LON IN – START RQST Request to start another genset
24 LON IN - STOP RQST Request to stop another genset
25 LON IN – START ALL All units on this bus segment are commanded to start and
close their breakers. Start arbitration of LS units is disabled
26 LON IN - STOP ALL All units on this bus segment are commanded to open their
breakers and stop. Stop arbitration of LS units is disabled
27 LON IN – START TEST indicates this node is requesting LS nodes to start and
close their breakers onto the active bus
28 LON IN - STOP TEST indicates this node is requesting LS nodes to open their
breakers on the active bus and stop units
29 LON OUT - TIE BRKR W W Tie Breaker is closed, two bus segments are connected
30 LON OUT - TIE BRKR X X Tie Breaker is closed, two bus segments are connected
31 LON OUT - TIE BRKR Y Y Tie Breaker is closed, two bus segments are connected
32 LON OUT - TIE BRKR Z Z Tie Breaker is closed, two bus segments are connected
33 LON OUT - DB GRANT This unit has received ok to close onto the deadbus
34 LON OUT - NET NODES Number of LON devices on the network
35 LON OUT - SEG NODES Number of nodes active on this bus segment
36 LON OUT - LS NODES Indicates the number of LS units sharing load on this bus
segment
37 LON OUT – BREAKER Indicates the number of LS units with their breaker closed
NODES on the active bus segment
38 LON OUT - STRT NODES Number of Gensets ready to participate in start arbitration
on the active bus
39 LON OUT - STOP NODES Number of Gensets ready to participate in stop arbitration
on the active bus
40 LON OUT - STRT READY Number of Gensets ready to participate in a start all on the
active bus
41 LON OUT - STOP READY Number of Gensets ready to participate in a stop all on the
active bus
42 LON OUT - M IN CTL Indicates this node is the process master
43 LON OUT - SYS PF indicates the system power factor
94 Woodward
Display Name Item
44 LON OUT - SYS LOAD System Load %
45 LON OUT - SM_IN_CTL This node is the master synchronizer controller
46 LON OUT - ONLINE DMD Total power being generated by all the generator sets on
the same active bus segment who have their breakers
closed
47 LON OUT - OL_D_UNITS Indicates the units (K, M, etc) of the active units
ONLINE_DMD
48 LON OUT - ONLINE CAP Maximum total power output capable of being generated by
all the generator sets on the same active bus segment who
have their breakers closed
49 LON OUT - OL_C_UNITS Indicates the units (K, M, etc) of the active units
ONLINE_CAP
50 LON OUT - TOT DEMAND This output field indicates the sum of all ’MAIN_DMD’ input
field values on the active bus segment
51 LON OUT - T_D_UNITS Indicates the units (K, M, etc) of the Total Demand value
52 LON OUT - START DONE Start arbitration has been completed, no (more) units need
to be started
53 LON OUT - STOP DONE Stop arbitration has been completed, no (more) units need
to stop
54 LON OUT - NEXT START Displays which unit/node number will get the next start cmd
55 LON OUT - NEXT STOP Displays which unit/node number will get the next stop cmd
56 LON OUT - SYS NUM ID This number, when decoded, give the node numbers that
are active
57 LON OUT - ERR FLAG Indicates an error has occurred with the LON
communication
58 LON OUT - ERR NUM This is an error code indicating what error has occurred
59 LON OUT - M CTL This field indicates whether there is a process master node
on the active bus segment
The following menus will display the control’s status information in groups that
are similar to the front panel status screens.
01 Status System Menu

An overview of the system operation.

01 ALARMS: Displays the number of active alarms on the unit
02 UNIT NUMBER Unit number of MC
03 MAINS Stable (++), Stable timing (+-), Out of Spec(--)
04 BUS Stable (++), Stable timing (+-), Out of Spec(--)
05 MODE: Indicates the position of the Control Mode Switch
06 STATE: Shows the state of the MC as a whole, how/why the
unit started
07 HZ The frequency of the mains Hz
08 KW The total kW load on the mains W
09 PF: The average three phase power factor of the mains NA
10 Mains PF Direction Describes type of PF (LAG, LEAD)
11 DATE / TIME Current Date and Time of the EGCP-3 Clock Y/M/D
H:M:S
12 BATTERY Supply voltage into this control Volts
13 CONFIGURATION STATUS Indicate that configuration checks are in proper range T/F
14 CONTACT IN CONFIGURATION Indicates which discrete input are configured wrong. Ch #
ERR
Woodward 95
02 Status Bus Menu

An overview of inputs from or outputs to the bus.

01 BUS VOLT LINE-LINE Average Volts L-L. V*
02 BUS VOLT LINE-NEUTRAL Average Volts L-N V*
03 BUS AMPS Average Amps A*
04 BUS VOLT-AMP Total KVA reading. VA*
05 BUS WATT Total kW readings W*
06 BUS VAR Total kVAR reading. VAR*
07 BUS PWR-FACTOR Average Power Factor
08 BUS PF DIRECTION Describes type of PF (LAG, LEAD)
09 BUS VA, PHS A Phase A KVA reading VA*
10 BUS VA, PHS B Phase B KVA reading VA*
11 BUS VA, PHS C Phase C KVA reading VA*
12 BUS WATT, PHS A Phase A kW readings W*
13 BUS WATT, PHS B Phase B kW readings W*
14 BUS WATT, PHS C Phase C kW readings W*
15 BUS VAR, PHS A Phase A kVAR reading VAR*
16 BUS VAR, PHS B Phase B kVAR reading VAR*
17 BUS VAR, PHS C Phase C kVAR reading VAR*
18 BUS VOLT, PHS A Phase A Volts reading Volt*
19 BUS VOLT, PHS B Phase B Volts reading Volt*
20 BUS VOLT, PHS C Phase C Volts reading Volt*
21 BUS AMP, PHS A Phase A Amps reading Amp*
22 BUS AMP, PHS B Phase B Amps reading Amp*
23 BUS AMP, PHS C Phase C Amps reading Amp*
24 BUS PF PHS A Phase A Power Factor reading -
25 BUS PF PHS A DIRECTION Describes type of PF (LAG, LEAD)
26 BUS PF PHS B Phase B Power Factor reading -
27 BUS PF PHS B DIRECTION Describes type of PF (LAG, LEAD)
28 BUS PF PHS C Phase C Power Factor reading -
29 BUS PF PHS C DIRECTION Describes type of PF (LAG, LEAD)
30 BUS CURR, THD Total Harmonic Distortion of the Current %
31 BUS CURR, 3RD HARM Third Current Harmonic %
32 BUS CURR, 4TH HARM Fourth Current Harmonic %
33 BUS CURR, 5TH HARM Fifth Current Harmonic %
34 BUS CURR, 6TH HARM Sixth Current Harmonic %
35 BUS CURR, 7TH HARM Seventh Current Harmonic %
36 BUS CURR, 9TH HARM Ninth Current Harmonic %
37 BUS CURR, 11TH HARM Eleventh Current Harmonic %
38 BUS CURR, 13TH HARM Thirteenth Current Harmonic %
39 BUS VOLT, THD Total Harmonic Distortion of the Voltage %
40 BUS VOLT, 3RD HARM Third Voltage Harmonic %
41 BUS VOLT, 4TH HARM Fourth Voltage Harmonic %
42 BUS VOLT, 5TH HARM Fifth Voltage Harmonic %
43 BUS VOLT, 6TH HARM Sixth Voltage Harmonic %
44 BUS VOLT, 7TH HARM Seventh Voltage Harmonic %
45 BUS VOLT, 9TH HARM Ninth Voltage Harmonic %
46 BUS VOLT, 11TH HARM Eleventh Voltage Harmonic %
47 BUS VOLT, 13TH HARM Thirteenth Voltage Harmonic %
48 BUS NEG-PHS-SEQ VOLT Negative Phase Sequence Voltage Amp*
49 BUS NEG-PHS-SEQ AMP Negative Phase Sequence Current Amp*
96 Woodward
03 Status Mains Menu

An overview of the generator outputs.

01 MAINS VOLT LINE-LINE Average Volts L-L. V*
02 MAINS VOLT LINE-NEUTRAL Average Volts L-N V*
03 MAINS AMPS Average Amps A*
04 MAINS VOLT-AMP Total KVA reading. VA*
05 MAINS WATT Total kW readings W*
06 MAINS VAR Total kVAR reading. VAR*
07 MAINS PWR-FACTOR Average Power Factor; with +/- Lag or Lead -
08 MAINS PF DIRECTION Describes type of PF (LAG, LEAD)
09 MAINS VA, PHS A Phase A KVA reading VA*
10 MAINS VA, PHS B Phase B KVA reading VA*
11 MAINS VA, PHS C Phase C KVA reading VA*
12 MAINS WATT, PHS A Phase A kW readings W*
13 MAINS WATT, PHS B Phase B kW readings W*
14 MAINS WATT, PHS C Phase C kW readings W*
15 MAINS VAR, PHS A Phase A kVAR reading VAR*
16 MAINS VAR, PHS B Phase B kVAR reading VAR*
17 MAINS VAR, PHS C Phase C kVAR reading VAR*
18 MAINS VOLT, PHS A Phase A Volts reading Volt*
19 MAINS VOLT, PHS B Phase B Volts reading Volt*
20 MAINS VOLT, PHS C Phase C Volts reading Volt*
21 MAINS AMP, PHS A Phase A Amps reading Amp*
22 MAINS AMP, PHS B Phase B Amps reading Amp*
23 MAINS AMP, PHS C Phase C Amps reading Amp*
24 MAINS PF PHS A Phase A Power Factor reading -
25 MAINS PF PHS A DIRECTION Describes type of PF (LAG, LEAD)
26 MAINS PF PHS B Phase B Power Factor reading -
27 MAINS PF PHS B DIRECTION Describes type of PF (LAG, LEAD)
28 MAINS PF PHS C Phase C Power Factor reading -
29 MAINS PF PHS C DIRECTION Describes type of PF (LAG, LEAD)
30 MAINS CURR, THD Total Harmonic Distortion of the Current %
31 MAINS CURR, 3RD HARM Third Current Harmonic %
32 MAINS CURR, 4TH HARM Fourth Current Harmonic %
33 MAINS CURR, 5TH HARM Fifth Current Harmonic %
34 MAINS CURR, 6TH HARM Sixth Current Harmonic %
35 MAINS CURR, 7TH HARM Seventh Current Harmonic %
36 MAINS CURR, 9TH HARM Ninth Current Harmonic %
37 MAINS CURR, 11TH HARM Eleventh Current Harmonic %
38 MAINS CURR, 13TH HARM Thirteenth Current Harmonic %
39 MAINS VOLT, THD Total Harmonic Distortion of the Voltage %
40 MAINS VOLT, 3RD HARM Third Voltage Harmonic %
41 MAINS VOLT, 4TH HARM Fourth Voltage Harmonic %
42 MAINS VOLT, 5TH HARM Fifth Voltage Harmonic %
43 MAINS VOLT, 6TH HARM Sixth Voltage Harmonic %
44 MAINS VOLT, 7TH HARM Seventh Voltage Harmonic %
45 MAINS VOLT, 9TH HARM Ninth Voltage Harmonic %
46 MAINS VOLT, 11TH HARM Eleventh Voltage Harmonic %
47 MAINS VOLT, 13TH HARM Thirteenth Voltage Harmonic %
48 MAINS NEG-PHS-SEQ VOLT Negative Phase Sequence Voltage Amp*
49 MAINS NEG-PHS-SEQ AMP Negative Phase Sequence Current Amp*
Woodward 97
04 Status I/O Menu

The monitor menu for all inputs to the EGCP-3 and its outputs to the system.
01 DI - IN 1 STATE Input 1 Open or Closed na
17 RELAY OUT 1 STATE Output 1 is On or Off na
29 VOLT BIAS OUT %: Voltage bias output of Synchronizer (no hardware out) %
30 SPEED BIAS OUT %: Speed bias output of Synchronizer (no hardware out). %
31 LOAD REF: load reference used in the Real Load Controller W
32 LOAD MODE: Load Control Mode of the Real Load controller na
33 ANALOG OUT 1 MA: Current being output at analog output 1 mA
37 ANALOG IN 1 (V/MA) Electrical units Input of Analog Input 1 V/mA
38 ANALOG IN 1 (EU): Scaled units of Analog Input 1 EU
39 ANALOG IN 2(V/MA): Electrical units Input of Analog Input 2 V/mA
41 ANALOG IN 3 (V/MA): Electrical units Input of Analog Input 3 V/mA
43 ANALOG IN 4 (V/MA): Electrical units Input of Analog Input 4 V/mA
45 COM 1 STATUS Current status of communications port 1
48 LON STATUS Current status of LON communications
49 GROUP BREAKER STATUS If configured shows the status of the group breaker
50 MAINS BREAKER STATUS Breaker status (Closed, Open)
51 TIE W CLOSED Tie W Status (True=closed, False=open)
52 TIE X CLOSED Tie X Status (True=closed, False=open)
53 TIE Y CLOSED Tie Y Status (True=closed, False=open)
54 TIE Z CLOSED Tie Z Status (True=closed, False=open)
55 BUS A ACTIVE Bus A Status (True=Active, False=Not active)
56 BUS B ACTIVE Bus B Status (True=Active, False=Not active)
57 BUS C ACTIVE Bus C Status (True=Active, False=Not active)
58 BUS D ACTIVE Bus D Status (True=Active, False=Not active)
98 Woodward
05 Status Synchronizer Menu

Monitoring menu of the synchronizing function and states.

01 SLIP FREQ: The slip frequency of the generator in relation to the HZ
bus.
02 SLIP WINDOW: Matched (++), Controlling (+-), Out of window (--) na
03 PHASE ERROR: The phase angle difference between the generator and deg
the bus
04 PHASE WINDOW: Matched (++), Controlling (+-), Out of window (--) na
05 VOLTAGE ERROR: The voltage differential between the generator and the %
bus
06 VOLTAGE WINDOW: Matched (++), Controlling (+-), Out of window (--)
07MAINS DEAD? Indicates if the mains PT input is less than minimum T/F
08 SYNCHRONIZER MODE Displays the synchronizer's configured mode
09 VOLT BIAS %: Voltage Bias Output of the Synchronizer %
10 SPEED BIAS % Speed Bias Output of the Synchronizer %
11 BUS AVG VOLTS Average Voltage of the bus V*
12 MAINS AVG VOLTS Average Voltage of the mains. V*
13 SYNC STATE The operating state of the synchronizer na
14 NUMBER OF ATTEMPTS Number of synchronization attempts (will always be < na
Close Attempts set point)
15 SEC BEFORE TIMEOUT Time left on the Timeout timer. If disabled, the field will sec
display ‘– – –‘.
06 Status KW Load Menu

An overview of the Real Load control.

01 MAINS LOAD: Mains real power output (1Ø or 3Ø sum) W
02 LOAD REFERENCE ON: True if using load reference and not in process
03 LOAD REFERENCE: The load reference for the MC W
04 MAINS (MC) DEMAND: Demand level for this MC VA
05 MAX (MC) DEMAND Maximum demand level on this MC VA
06 MAX (MC) DEMAND UNITS Units of maximum demand level on this MC _,K,M,G
07 TIME MAX DMD OCCURRED: Time of maximum demand on this MC
08 TOTAL MAINS DEMAND Total demand for all MC on active bus segment VA
09 TOTAL MAINS MAX DEMAND Maximum demand level read by this MC for all MC’s VA
on the active bus segment
10 TOTAL MNS MAX DMD UNITS Units of maximum total demand read by this MC _,K,M,G
11 TIME TOT MNS MAX Time of maximum total demand read by this MC
12 PROCESS ACTUAL IN %: The actual process level as seen by the EGCP-3 %
13 PROCESS REFERENCE %: The process reference for the process control %
14 LOAD MODE: The current load control mode in operation na
15 LOAD STATE: The state of the load controller na
16 KVA SWITCH: Status of the KVA level switch T/F
17 DEMAND TIMER ENABLE True if Demand timer has started counting
18 DEMAND TIMER (SEC): Seconds left before a demand start occurs Sec
19 NEXT PROGRAMMED START Day of next start
DAY
20 NEXT PROGRAMMED START Hour of next start
HR
21 NEXT PROGRAMMED START Minute of next start
MIN
22 LOAD REFERENCE Load command sent over LON W
23 LOAD REFERENCE UNITS Unit of load reference above _,k,M,G
24 LOAD REFERENCE (%) Load command sent over LON %
25 SYSTEM LOAD System load on LON W
26 SYSTEM LOAD UNITS Units of system load above _,k,M,G
Woodward 99

27 SYSTEM LOAD (%) System load sent over LON
28 LOAD SHED 1 ENABLED True if a digital input is configured for load shed 1
29 LOAD SHED 1 True if load shed DO has been instigated
34 GEN LOAD: Actual load being supplied by LS gensets W
35 GEN LOAD UNITS Units of above _,k,M,G
36 BUS LOAD: Actual load sensed on the bus W
37 BUS LOAD UNITS Units of above _,k,M,G
38 MAINS (MC) LOAD: Actual load sensed on the mains W
39 MAINS (MC) LOAD UNITS Units of above _,k,M,G
40 TOTAL MAINS LOAD: Actual load sensed on all mains on active bus VA
segment
41 TOTAL MAINS LOAD UNITS Units of above _,k,M,G
42 ONLINE CAPACITY Capacity of all LS units with their breaker closed W
43 ONLINE CAPACITY UNITS Units of above _,k,M,G
44 ONLINE GEN UNITS LS units with their breakers closed
45 OFFLINE GEN UNITS LS units with their breakers opened
07 Status PF/KVAR Menu

An overview of the reactive Power control.

01 MODE: The actual control mode na
02 VOLT CNTRL STATE: The state of the VAR/PF controller na
03 PF REF: The PF control reference value. Shows --- if PF control na
is not used
04 PF REF DIRECTION: Direction of PF (LAG, LEAD)
05 VAR REF: The VAR control reference value. Shows --- if VAR VAR*
control is not used
06 BUS PF: The average three phase PF of the bus -
07 BUS PF DIRECTION: Direction of PF (LAG, LEAD) -
08 MAINS PF: The average three phase PF of the mains -
09 MAINS PF DIRECTION: Direction of PF (LAG, LEAD) -
10 BUS VAR: The total VAR reading for the bus. VAR*
11 MAINS VAR: The total VAR reading for the mains VAR*
12 PF COMMAND: Power factor command sent to LON
100 Woodward
08 Status Sequencing Menu

Below is the monitoring menu of the functions and operation of the MC sequencer.
Display Name Item

01 UNIT NUMBER Network Address of this unit
02 SEQUENCE STATE Indicates the availability of the genset: Ready, LON
Alarm, Off
03 MAINS BREAKER STATUS The status of the mains breaker as determined by the
mains CB aux discrete input.
04 GROUP BREAKER STATUS The status of the group breaker as determined by the
group CB aux discrete input.
05 BUS "A" ACTIVE True if Bus A is part of the active bus
06 BUS "B" ACTIVE True if Bus B is part of the active bus
07 BUS "C" ACTIVE True if Bus C is part of the active bus
08 BUS "D" ACTIVE True if Bus D is part of the active bus
09 NEXT ON ALL True if the MC is sending an ALL START to the LON
10 NEXT ON Unit Number of next unit to be sequenced onto the
network
11 NEXT OFF ALL True if the MC is sending an ALL STOP to the LON
12 NEXT OFF Unit Number of next unit to be sequenced off the
network
13 UNITS ON LOAD Total number of units with their breakers closed
14 SEGMENT UNITS Number of units on the active bus segment
15 READY TO START UNITS Number of units on the active bus ready to start
16 READY TO STOP UNITS Number of units on the active bus ready to stop
17 LOADSHARE UNITS Number of load share units on the active bus.
18 NET UNITS Number of units communicating on the LON network
09 Status ATS Menu

Below is the monitoring menu of the functions and operation of the MC ATS.
Display Name Item

01 MAINS Visual description of mains stability
02 BUS Visual description of bus stability
03 MAINS BREAKER: Status of mains breaker
04 GROUP BREAKER Status of group breaker
05 SYNCHRONIZER: Mode of synchronizer
06 MAINS DEAD: True if mains is currently a deadbus
07 TOTAL DELAY: Total delay before and system is to be supplied by
mains or isolated bus
08 ATS MODE: Mode of ATS
09 ATS STATE: State of ATS
10 GROUP TIMER: Time after bus is stable that group will be closed
11 MAINS TIMER: Time after mains is stable that mains will be closed
12 LOM TIMER: Time after LOM is sensed that action will occur
13 FAST TIMER: Time in the transition state of the ATS
14 TRANSFER CAPACITY Amount of capacity needed on the bus before a
transition will occur
15 ONLINE CAPACITY Capacity of units on the active bus segment with their
breaker closed
Woodward 101
10 Status Alarms Menu

A monitor of the alarm condition of the MC Control.

01 CURRENT DATE / TIME Current Date & Time of internal clock Y/M/D
H:M:S
02 NUMBER OF ALARMS ACTIVE Number of Active or un-cleared alarms -
03 AUDIBLE ALARM ACTIVE Active or un-cleared Audible alarm(s) exist -
04 STOP ALL ENGINES ACTIVE True if there is an active Stop All Engines alarm -
05 TRIP MAINS BREAKER ACTIVE True if there is an active Trip Mains Breaker alarm -
06 ALARM EVENT _#1 Description of the alarm that occurred first -
07 TIME OF EVENT #1 Date and Time of the first alarm Y/M/D
H:M:S
08 ALARM EVENT _#2 Description of the alarm that occurred second -
09 TIME OF EVENT #2 Date and Time of the second alarm Y/M/D
H:M:S
10 ALARM EVENT _#3 Description of the alarm that occurred third -
11 TIME OF EVENT #3 Date and Time of the third alarm Y/M/D
H:M:S
12 ALARM EVENT _#4 Description of the alarm that occurred fourth -
13 TIME OF EVENT #4 Date and Time of the fourth alarm Y/M/D
H:M:S
14 ALARM EVENT _#5 Description of the alarm that occurred fifth -
15 TIME OF EVENT #5 Date and Time of the fifth alarm Y/M/D
H:M:S
11 Status Metering Menu

A monitor of the Mains Power Meter outputs.

01 MAINS IMPORT W-HRS Total Watt-Hours Meter of Mains Import
02 MAINS IMPORT W_UNITS Units (KW, MW, GW) of the total W-Hr number above
03 MAINS IMPORT W_H 000 000 000 000.00 Hundred portion of the W-Hr
04 MAINS IMPORT W_K 000 000 000 000.00 Thousands portion of the W-Hr
05 MAINS IMPORT W_M 000 000,000,000.00 Mega portion of the W-Hr
06 MAINS IMPORT W_G 000,000,000,000.00 Giga portion of the W-hr
07 MAINS EXPORT W_HRS Total Watt-Hours Meter of Mains Export
08 MAINS EXPORT W_UNITS Units (KW, MW, GW) of the total W-Hr number above
09 MAINS EXPORT W_H 000 000 000 000.00 Hundred portion of the W-Hr
10 MAINS EXPORT W_K 000 000 000 000.00 Thousands portion of the W-Hr
11 MAINS EXPORT W_M 000 000,000,000.00 Mega portion of the W-Hr
12 MAINS EXPORT W_G 000,000,000,000.00 Giga portion of the W-hr
13 MAINS IMPORT VA_HRS Total VA Hours Meter of Mains Import
14 MAINS IMPORT VA_UNITS Units (KVA, MVA, GVA) of the total VA-Hr number
above
15 MAINS IMPORT VA_H 000 000 000 000.00 Hundred portion of the VA-Hr
16 MAINS IMPORT VA_K 000 000 000 000.00 Thousands portion of the VA-Hr
17 MAINS IMPORT VA_M 000 000,000,000.00 Mega portion of the VA-Hr
18 MAINS IMPORT VA_G 000,000,000,000.00 Giga portion of the VA-hr
19 MAINS EXPORT VA_HRS Total VA Hours Meter of Mains Export
20 MAINS EXPORT VA_UNITS Units (KVA, MVA, GVA) of the total VA-Hr number
above
21 MAINS EXPORT VA_H 000 000 000 000.00 Hundred portion of the VA-Hr
22 MAINS EXPORT VA_K 000 000 000 000.00 Thousands portion of the VA-Hr
23 MAINS EXPORT VA_M 000 000,000,000.00 Mega portion of the VA hr
24 MAINS EXPORT VA_G 000,000,000,000.00 Giga portion of the VA-hr
25 MAINS IMPORT VAR_HRS Total VAR Hours Meter of Mains Import
102 Woodward
26 MAINS IMPORT VAR_UNITS Units (KVAR, MVAR, GVAR) of the total VAR-Hr number
above
27 MAINS IMPORT VAR_H 000 000 000 000.00 Hundred portion of the VAR-Hr
28 MAINS IMPORT VAR_K 000 000 000 000.00 Thousands portion of the VAR-Hr
29 MAINS IMPORT VAR_M 000 000,000,000.00 Mega portion of the VAR-Hr
30 MAINS IMPORT VAR_G 000,000,000,000.00 Giga portion of the VAR-hr
31 MAINS EXPORT VAR_HRS Total VAR Hours Meter of Mains Export
32 MAINS EXPORT VAR_UNITS Units (KVAR, MVAR, GVAR) of the total VAR-Hr number
above
33 MAINS EXPORT VAR_H 000 000 000 000.00 Hundred portion of the VAR-Hr
34 MAINS EXPORT VAR_K 000 000 000 000.00 Thousands portion of the VAR-Hr
35 MAINS EXPORT VAR_M 000 000,000,000.00 Mega portion of the VAR-Hr
36 MAINS EXPORT VAR_G 000,000,000,000.00 Giga portion of the VAR-hr
Woodward 103
Chapter 5.
Startup Checkout Procedures
Before Starting
Before initiating MC control of one or several LS units, configuration of the
control for values that best match the operating and performance characteristics
is required. Double-check these values prior to starting the unit and verify
mechanical connections to the MC. The list below details several inputs that
should be verified before operation:
Refer to the Installation Manual #26122 for wire terminal location and terminal
numbers.
1. Check for correct wiring. Take note of polarity, signal type, terminal
connection, grounding, and shielding as shown in the Installation Manual.
1. Power Supply Input
2. Mains PT Inputs
3. Mains CT Inputs
4. Bus PT Inputs
5. Bus CT Inputs
6. Control Switch Inputs (Run, Test, Auto)
2. Check for broken terminals and loose terminal screws.
3. Check for shield faults by measuring the resistance from control terminals to
chassis. If a resistance less than infinite is obtained, remove the connections
from each terminal one at a time until the resistance is infinite. Check the line
that was last removed to locate the fault.
Once these items have been checked, check the power supply voltage for proper
amplitude. When this is confirmed, apply the power supply to the EGCP-3.
When the EGCP-3 is given power, it will go through RAM test and self-test. After
a self-check period, the System Status Menu will be displayed. If the EGCP-3
fails to power up properly, remove the power supply input and double check the
polarity and amplitude of the voltage feeding the EGCP-3.
WARNING
When operating the discrete inputs certain outputs may be activated. Make
sure that the various breakers are locked out and that the LON
communication disconnected to prevent an inadvertent start or breaker
close.
Verify that the transducer and other analog input signal levels are at the proper
levels with respect to a measured or known input. The I/O Status screen #2
displays the analog inputs in volt or mA and in the configured parameter units.
WARNING
The start procedures and tests listed here are only a general guide. ALL site
safety procedures take president over the steps given here.
104 Woodward
Configuration Menu
Enter the First Time Configuration menu as described in Chapter 3. Enter the
following set points to their appropriate value for the Bus and the Mains.
1. Potential Transformer Ratio
2. Current Transformer Ratio
3. Sensing Type
4. Hardware Range
5. Rated Voltage
6. PT Configuration
7. Breaker Type (If there is no group breaker, leave at default)
Additionally input the following system parameters:

1. System Frequency
2. System Phase Rotation
3. Network Address
4. Bus Segment
Enter the Digital Inputs and Digital Outputs menus and configure the MC to your
preferences of digital inputs/outputs for your system configuration.
Once the set points are entered, the MC must be reset.

To reset via Watch Window go to the CONTROL menu and select RESET.
To reset via the front panel exit the configuration menu by pressing status. The
right LCD screen will now read:
CAUTION! CHANGES ARE

APPLIED UPON REQUEST
<ENTER> = RESET
<ESC> = CONTINUE
Press ENTER and the control will reset and enter the configurables into memory.
Refer to “I/O Status Screens” section of Chapter 2. With the EGCP-3 powered,
go to the I/O Status screen #1 in the Status menus. This display shows the state
of the discrete inputs and outputs of the control. Monitor this screen and close
each discrete input to the EGCP-3 that is being used in this particular application.
Verify that the EGCP-3 recognizes these inputs in the I/O Status screen.
Once the First Time Configuration menu has been set up, the values saved to
memory the remaining configuration menus can be set up.
LON Status
Verify all DIGITAL INPUTS are NOT asserted and connect the LON
communication into terminals 45,46 and 47 on the PowerSense board. Enter the
I/O status screen by the front panel and go to screen 3 or simply go to the I/O
service menu in WW. Verify that the LON Status is NORMAL.
If the display gives an ALARM at least one problem exists. Possibilities are (1)
Two units have the same UNIT NUMBER; (2) Two LS units have different
Start/Stop Arbitration Algorithms (Run Time Manager). The problems can be
diagnosed by using WW.
Woodward 105
WARNING
The LON Status alarm will only diagnose problems with other EGCP-3’s. If
the MC and another unit have the same unit number, the MC will not be able
to interpret an alarm condition. This is solved by looking at several units to
verify that no units have the LON status alarm.
To diagnose a LON Status Alarm use the following procedure:
1. Open a Watch Window

2. Enter the SERVICE menus and open U LON MESSAGING
3. Bring the following variables to the current Inspector
• 56 LON OUT – ERR FLAG
• 57 LON OUT – ERR NUM
The ERR FLAG shows that there is an alarm on the LON network. The ERR
NUM diagnoses the problem seen by this MC.
If the ERR NUM equals 1-16 then there are two units on the network with that
unit number on the LON network. Find the two units and change one of the unit
numbers
If the ERR NUM equals 261 then two LS’s have different Run Time Manager
configurations. All of these algorithms must match.
Once the LON STATUS shows NORMAL on all EGCP-3’s, move on to the next
section.
Mains Parallel Setup

Follow these steps to configure the MC for Mains Parallel operation.
1. With all Digital Inputs OFF verify the mains voltage. If calibration is needed
use the method diagramed in Chapter 6-AC Voltage Inputs.
2. Manually close Mains breaker.
3. If you have a group breaker manually close it as well
4. Verify bus readings for voltage. If needed use calibration as in step one
5. Verify phase rotation by removing B and C phase fuses and check to see
that the mains and bus PT’s are reading the same voltage on phase A.
Repeat procedure with B and C PT’s.
6. Open mains breaker
7. Enter the Synchronizer configuration menu
8. Set Synchronizer Mode to Check.
9. On the Sync screen, verify the Mains Input shows a ++ reading indicating the
voltage and frequency are within specification.
WARNING
Before proceeding to the next step, verify proper isolated operation with a
single or multiple LS units. All LS units should be configured before
configuring the MC.
10. Start an LS unit by asserting both AUTO and RUN w/LOAD digital inputs.
• Unit will start and synchronize to the bus.
• If you have a group breaker and it is not already closed close it now
manually.
106 Woodward
11. Put the MC into run with load by asserting the AUTO and RUN w/LOAD
digital inputs. The MC should not attempt to synchronize the mains breaker
but will not close it.
12. Adjust Synchronizer proportional Gain and Integral Gain for best control
(monitor sync status menu and synchroscope to see phase and slip errors).
13. Use voltmeter to check voltage across mains breaker to assure proper
voltage matching.
14. Use phase rotation meter on mains and bus inputs to verify correct wiring.
15. Set Load/Unload Ramp Times to at least 60 seconds in the Real Load
Control menu.
16. Set BaseLoad Reference to 30% in the Real Load Control menu.
17. Set Synchronizer Mode to Run.
18. Monitor synchroscope status menu. Verify action of synchronizer.
19. After main breaker closes to the bus, monitor KW LOAD Status menu 3 and
4:
• Monitor Load Reference and System Load.
a. System load should be attempting to match load reference
• Monitor Gen Load, Bus Load and Mains Load
a. Note: If Bus or Mains is not configured for 3-phase sensing then
the above values will not match
b. If no plant load is available all of the above loads will match
20. Adjust the load on the LS unit by using the Load Raise and Load Lower
inputs. Set Load Raise/Lower rates if needed.
NOTE
If using a Process input, Set Process Reference to logical level. If using
Import/Export control set Import/Export KW, PF and VAR to logical levels.
21. Once satisfied with load control operation, switch to process control (if
applicable) by closing the Process Enable input.
22. Confirm ramp to process reference level. Adjust Process Gain, Integral,
Derivative, and Deadband for best response.
23. Return to BaseLoad control, by opening the Process input.
24. Set VAR/PF mode to VAR or PF control.
25. Set VAR or PF reference to a logical value that will not overload the LS unit
(i.e. 10kVAR, 0.95LAG).
26. Switch to VAR/PF control by asserting the digital input or using the automatic
feature.
27. Monitor the VAR/PF screen adjust VAR/PF Gain and Integral for stable
reactive load control.
28. Remove RUN w/LOAD input to LS unit.
29. Remove RUN w/LOAD input to MC unit
• Verify unload ramping.
• Verify LS’s breaker opens.
• Verify MC opens group breaker (if applicable)
30. Set BaseLoad Reference, Process Reference, Load Ramp Times, and Load
Control Mode as required for proper operation.
31. Configure next MC unit (if applicable).
32. Move to Application Overview for system operation
Woodward 107
Chapter 6.
Calibration Procedures
Factory Calibrations
All analog I/O is factory calibrated to accuracy levels described in the EGCP-3
Installation Manual. This calibration is not accessible to a user and should never
need to be changed.
AC Voltage Inputs
AC Voltage inputs are calibrated based on the selected hardware PT input level
(70, 120, 240). Therefore, for accurate readings, it is important to select the
correct hardware input level.
When a potential transformer is used between the EGCP-3 and the generator or
mains bus, the transformer will certainly be less accurate than the EGCP-3. The
most common inaccuracy in a properly sized transformer is a turns ratio error.
When multiple transformers are used, such as one per phase, the turns ratio
error is often not the same for each transformer even when purchased from the
same company.
The EGCP-3 allows the user to correct for this error on each phase
independently. The correction factors may be found in the CALIBRATION menu
as VOLTAGE SCALE Factors. If a phase is reading low, increase the correction
to compensate for a low voltage reading. If a phase is reading high, decrease the
correction. Using Watch Window and an accurate probe the phase voltages can
be tuned so that precise values are seen. It is important that the equipment used
to compare readings with the EGCP-3 be at least as accurate as the EGCP-3
itself. A Fluke 87 type meter is generally NOT as accurate and hence does not
make for a very good comparison.
AC Current Inputs
AC Current inputs are calibrated at 5 A. Therefore, for accurate readings, CTs
should be sized to provide nearly 5 A at full load. 1A CTs are not recommended
for use with the EGCP-3.
The current transformers will certainly be less accurate than the EGCP-3 across
the full range. The most common inaccuracy in a properly sized transformer is a
turns ratio error. The EGCP-3 allows the user to correct for this error on each
phase independently. The correction factors may be found in the CALIBRATION
menu as CURRENT SCALE Factors. If the EGCP-3 is reading a low current
value, increase the correction to compensate for a low current reading. If the
EGCP-3 is reading a high current value, decrease the correction. Using Watch
Window and an accurate probe the phase currents can be tuned so that precise
values are seen. It is important that the equipment used to compare readings
with the EGCP-3 be at least as accurate as the EGCP-3 itself. A Fluke 87 type
meter with a clamp on current probe is generally NOT as accurate and hence
does not make for a very good comparison.
108 Woodward
Analog Inputs
The four analog inputs are factory calibrated in both the 4–20 mA current mode
and the 1–5 Vdc voltage mode. For this reason, it is very important to select the
appropriate mode when configuring the inputs.
Although the inputs are accurate, they must be scaled to the device being
connected to the input. This scaling is referred to as calibration in this manual.
The configuration settings are found in the ANALOG INPUT Menu and are called
a Low Calibration Value and a High Calibration Value.
The Low Calibration value should be configured to a number represented by 4

mA or 1Vdc depending on the type of input used. As an example, for a
temperature sensor input, if the output of the transducer is 4 mA when the
temperature measured is 0°C, then the Low Calibration value should be
configured for 0.
The High Calibration value should be configured to a number represented by 20

mA or 5 Vdc depending on the type of input used. As an example, for a
temperature sensor input, if the output of the transducer is 20 mA when the
temperature measured is 200°C, then the High Calibration value should be
configured for 200.
The EGCP-3 will interpolate the analog input using a linear interpolation between
and beyond the two calibration points.
Analog Outputs
The four analog outputs are factory calibrated at 4 mA and 20 mA. Although the
outputs are accurate, they must be scaled to the device being connected to the
output. This scaling is referred to as calibration in this manual. The configuration
settings are found in the ANALOG OUTPUT Menu and are called a Low
Calibration Value and a High Calibration Value.
The Low Calibration value should be configured to a number represented by 4

mA. As an example, consider the case of a kW panel meter connected to Analog
Output #1. If the meter expects 4 mA when the kW should indicate 0 kW, then
the Low Calibration value should be configured for 0.
The High Calibration value should be configured to a number represented by 20
mA. Continuing with the example above, If the meter expects 20 mA when the
kW should indicate 1500 kW, then the High Calibration value should be
configured for 1500.
The EGCP-3 will interpolate the mA level to provide using a linear interpolation
between and beyond the two calibration points.
Woodward 109
Chapter 7.
Mode Control Switch
Introduction
The mode control switch is defined as the three (3) switch inputs labeled, Test,
Run w/ Load, and Auto. The Process Enable and VAR/PF enable switch input
also affect the final mode but does not affect starting conditions. As long as the
physical Auto switch is closed (asserted), the mode switch “inputs” can also be
received via a communication link such as MODBUS or ServLink/WW. In the
case of communication link usage, all three switch “Enable” and switch “Disable”
positions should be sent together as a precaution.
In the tables below, the following key applies:

1—denotes connection made, On (+V applied to input)
0—denotes input point floating, Off
Test Run Auto Control

0 0 0 Off, no control action will be performed
1 0 1 Test ATS condition. See Chapter 16 for detailed information
0 1 1 All units will be started and MC will perform BaseLoad or Process. See Chapter
11 for baseload operation and Chapter 13 for process operation
0 0 1 Auto- LOM and all alarms will be active
1 1 0 Off - Not Valid
1 1 1 Initiate ATS condition. See Chapter 17 for detailed information
Auto Mode
If the Auto Input is asserted, then a different mode will be selected depending on
the state of the Test Input, Run Input, Process Enable Input, or bus/mains
condition. In all cases, the Auto Input must be asserted for automatic breaker
operation to be engaged. If neither the Test or Run inputs are asserted, the
control will assume any mode command provided from MODBUS or ServLink
communication links.
Process Mode
If the Process Enable digital input is asserted with the Auto and Run w/ Load
input the MC will control all LS’s on the active bus segment that are in parallel
with the mains at its process setpoints. For detailed information about the
process mode, see Chapter 13.
VAR/PF Mode
If the VAR/PF Enable digital input is asserted or the VAR/PF automatic enable is
on (See Reactive Load control menu) together with the Auto and Run w/ Load
input the MC will control all LS’s on the active bus segment that are in parallel
with the mains at its VAR/PF setpoints. For detailed information about the
VAR/PF mode, see Chapter 12.
110 Woodward
Chapter 8.
Application Overview
In this chapter, block diagrams of the control functions are shown to give the
basic signal flow and control methods.
Alarm Logic
The alarm and event logic within the EGCP-3 can be simplified to the below
flowchart. The flowchart also indicates how events can be reset and cleared.
Alarm History Log
Any Alarm/Fault
Remote
Alarm 1
Silence Horn
DO
Remote Disable
Alarm 6
Alarm/Trip Warning Visual
Mains Faults ... Timing Logic DO
Bus Faults ...
Breaker Faults ...

Stop All Engines
Diagnostics ... Config for
Each Fault Trip Mains Breaker
Reset LOM
LOM w/
Alarm ALARMS
Clear OR
Serial
Port
Reset
Figure 8-1. Alarm Logic Block Diagram
Woodward 111
Synchronizer
The synchronizer controls the Send Sync, Voltage Raise/Lower and the Speed
Bias to the LON network. It is only active when attempting to synchronize a
breaker.
Contactor Open/Close Command DO Breaker

Close
Breaker Closure Command DO Enable Logic
Sync Mode Run

Sync OR
Perm
Sync Mode Mode
Logic Check
C.B. Aux Enable
LON IN -
OR Send Sync
Speed/Load Lower
+
Lower +
+ To LON -
+
Sync Bias
-
+
Phase Matching
Raise + Slip Freq Stpt Configured
+ LON IN -
Send Sync
Speed/Load Raise Phase Matching Stpt
PID
Freq Diff
Mains AØ PT Phase Diff
Mains BØ PT
Mains CØ PT
AC Waveform
Mains Avg. Volt
Processing
Bus AØ PT Voltage
Bus BØ PT Matching
Bus CØ PT Bus Avg. Volt
LON IN -
Send Sync
To LON - Volt
Raise/Lower
Figure 8-2. Synchronizer Block Diagram
112 Woodward
Real Load Controller

The load controller controls the Load Command sent to all LS units over the LON
network. No synchronizing functionality is performed by the Load Command, that
function is left to the Sync Bias into the LON. The controller is only actively
controlling the load if the MC is the Master in Control of the active bus segment.
If the MC is not currently in control then this ramp will track the load on the LS
units, which creates smooth transitions from isolated to parallel operation.
MC Breaker Open Track System Load

OR
Master in
NOT
Control
LON System Load
DI Speed Lower Speed/Load Lower

OR
Modbus/Servlink Lower Ramp
&
DI Speed Raise Speed/Load Raise Logic
OR
Modbus/Servlink Raise
ATS - CT ZPT Load

ATS Reference
Reference
Priorities
BaseLoad Setpont
LON IN - Load CMD
AI Conf ?
Remote Baseload Modbus Baseload Mode

Enabled?
Modbus Baseload Enable

Process ?
Process Controller Enable Process Control
Rate = 0 Ramp Pause

Ramp
Enable Process Control Rate
Rate = inf Priorities
Load Rate Speed/Load Raise
Unload Rate
Speed/Load Lower
ATS - CT ZPT
ATS Rate
Baseload Setpoint
Load Time
Lower than Ref
÷ Baseload Mode
Higher than Ref OR

Unload Time
Track System Load
Rate = inf
Figure 8-3. Load Control Block Diagram
Woodward 113
Reactive Load Controller

The reactive load controller controls the voltage bias output and therefore, it
controls reactive load only. The synchronizer works through the reactive load
controller in order to get to the voltage bias output so that they do not fight over
control of the output.
PF
Mains PTs Deadband
Power
Circuits IMP/EXP PF IMP/EXP VAR
Mains CTs PF or VAR?
VAR
PF or VAR?
Deadband
Control
Not VAR/PF Enabled Track System Load

AND
Not IMP/EXP
RAMP
Sys PF
DI Volt Lower Volt Lower

OR
Modbus/Servlink Lower
DI Volt Raise Volt Raise

OR
Modbus/Servlink Raise
IMP/EXP LON IN
PF Reference VAR/PF PID Enabled? PF_CMD
Reference
AI Conf ?
Remote PF Modbus
Enabled?
Modbus PF PF or VAR?
VAR Reference
AI Conf ?
Ramp
&
Remote VAR Modbus
Enabled?
Logic
Modbus PF
Track System Load Ramp
Rate = inf
Rate
Ramp Pause
Rate = 0 Priority
Full Voltage Range ÷
Voltage Ramp Time
Figure 8-4. VAR / Power Factor Control Block Diagram
114 Woodward
Process Controller
The process controller controls the real and reactive loads using the Real and
Reactive Load Controllers. The output of the process controller is an input to the
load controllers.
Process
Filter Direct/Inverse Action
Process Input Signal
&
MC Breaker Open Deadband
Not Process Mode OR
Unload Command Track System Load
Zero Watt Across Mains
LON System Load

-
P or
Speed/Load Lower
DI Speed Lower PID
OR
Modbus/Servlink Lower +- +
Process
DI Speed Raise Speed/Load Raise
Reference
OR
Modbus/Servlink Raise Priority
Droop Setpoint
Process Reference
AI Conf ?
High/Low Load
Remote Process Ref Modbus
Enabled? Limit Clamp
Modbus Process Ref
Rate = inf Tracking System Load

Process Setpoint
Ramp Pause (To Real Load Control)
Rate = 0
Lower than Ref Ramp
Load Rate
Rate
Higher than Ref Priority
Unload Rate
Figure 8-5. Process Control Block Diagram
Woodward 115
Chapter 9.
Alarms, Protective Relay,
and Diagnostic Summary
Introduction
All Alarms can be configured to perform a specific action when detected. The
complete lists of actions that can be taken are described below. Some alarms
cannot be configured for all Alarm Actions on the list. An action is available only
when the listed actions are appropriate.
Disabled
The EGCP-3 will not look for the alarm condition. No alarm will be logged, sent
over a communication link, or shown on the display.
Warning
When the EGCP-3 detects the event/alarm condition, the alarm will be added to
the current event list and the alarm history log. If a discrete output is configured
to indicate a warning alarm condition, the output will be asserted. The
communication links will indicate a warning alarm condition exists. The generator
set will remain active without changing its operation. The alarm item will remain
in the active alarm list until the condition is removed and an alarm reset is
received.
Visual Alarm
the current event list and the alarm history log. The communication links will
indicate a visual alarm condition exists. If a discrete output is configured to
indicate a visual alarm condition, the output will be asserted. This type of alarm
configuration can be used as an additional warning alarm condition. The visual
alarm output will remain active until all visual alarms have been reset The
generator set will remain active without changing its operation. The alarm item
will remain in the active alarm list until the condition is removed and an alarm
reset is received.
Audible Alarm
as an alarm horn, the output will be asserted. The communication links will
indicate an audible alarm condition exists. Pressing the Alarm Clear Key once
will turn off the Alarm Horn output. Alternatively, momentarily asserting the Reset
Alarm/Fault discrete input (if configured) will also turn off the Alarm Horn output.
The horn alarm output will remain off until any other audible alarm condition
becomes active. The horn output will turn off without resetting the alarm. The
alarm item(s) will remain in the active alarm list until the condition is removed and
an alarm reset is received. The generator set will remain active without changing
its operation.
116 Woodward
Stop All Engines
to indicate a Stop All Engines alarm condition, the output will be asserted. The
communication links will indicate a Stop All Engines alarm condition exists. All LS
unit(s) that are stop ready will be told to unload, open the generator breaker, cool
down (if conditions met) and stop. They will remain stopped and not restart
unless all configured shutdown alarms are cleared.
Trip Mains Breaker

to indicate a Trip Mains Breaker alarm condition, the output will be asserted. The
communication links will indicate a Trip Mains Breaker alarm condition exists.
The Mains Shunt Trip will immediately open the Mains Breaker and isolated
operation will be asserted to the LS units. Units will start or change Load control
mode depending on the Mode Switch status, and unit configuration. If genset
starting occurs, the operation mode would be isolated operation. It will remain in
this mode and not allow mains paralleling until all configured trip mains breaker
alarms are cleared.
Loss of Mains (LOM)

When the EGCP-3 detects the event/alarm condition a discrete output is
configured to indicate a LOM condition, the output will be asserted. The Modbus
and LON communication links will indicate a loss of mains condition exists. The
EGCP-3 will immediately open the mains breaker (if not already open), a start
command for the genset(s) will be issued, and depending on the configured
conditions and priorities the engine will start and assume the load. When the
mains condition is determined to be stable the MC control will perform the
selected ATS function and the LS controls and gensets will assume their
configured operation, parallel operation mode, or shutdown. This alarm action
would be selected in application where a loss of mains is not an alarm condition
and does not need to be added to the alarm log, or reset to clear an alarm
indication.
Loss of Mains w/ Alarm

to indicate a LOM condition, the output will be asserted. The Modbus and LON
communication links will indicate a loss of mains condition exists. The EGCP-3
will immediately open the mains breaker (if not already open), a start command
for the genset(s) will be issued, and depending on the configured conditions and
priorities the engine will start and assume the load. When the mains condition is
determined to be stable the MC control will perform the selected ATS function
and the LS controls and gensets will assume their configured operation, parallel
operation mode, or shutdown.
Alarm List
The following table is a list of all alarms generated by the EGCP-3 MC. The
Modbus ID is the Boolean Read address where the status of the named alarm
can be determined via Modbus. Missing alarm numbers are not available in this
control.
Woodward 117
Alm # Event Name Display Name Modbus ID

1 Battery Volt High Alarm BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH 10048
2 Battery Volt Low Alarm BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW 10047
9 EPS Supplying Load EPS SUPPLYING LOAD 10079
13 Group Breaker Feedback Error GRP BKR FEEDBACK ERR 10157

14 Group Breaker Shunt Trip Error GRP BKR SHUNT TRIP ERR 10155
15 Bus Neg. Phase Sequence Over Current Alarm BUS NEG PHS OVR CURR 10095
Bus Neg. Phase Sequence Over Current Pre- PRE BUS NPHS OVR CUR 10096
16
Alarm
17 Bus Neg. Phase Sequence Over Voltage Alarm BUS NEG PHS OVR VOLT 10097
Bus Neg. Phase Sequence Over Voltage Pre- PRE BUS NPHS OVR VLT 10098
18
Alarm
19 Bus Over Freq Alarm BUS OVER FREQUENCY 10051
20 Bus Over Freq Pre-Alarm PRE BUS OVER FREQ 10084
21 Bus Under Freq Alarm BUS UNDER FREQUENCY 10052
22 Bus Under Freq Pre-Alarm PRE BUS UNDER FREQ 10085
23 Bus Over Volt Alarm BUS OVER VOLTAGE 10050
24 Bus Over Volt Pre-Alarm PRE BUS OVER VOLTAGE 10083
25 Bus Under Volt Alarm BUS UNDER VOLTAGE 10049
26 Bus Under Volt Pre-Alarm PRE BUS UNDER VOLT 10082
27 Bus Over Power Alarm BUS OVER POWER 10087
28 Bus Over Power Pre-Alarm PRE BUS OVER POWER 10088
29 Bus Reverse Power Alarm BUS REVERSE POWER 10040
30 Bus Reverse Power Pre-Alarm PRE BUS REVERSE POWR 10086
31 Bus Over VAR Alarm BUS OVER VARs 10090
32 Bus Over VAR Pre-Alarm PRE BUS OVER VARs 10091
33 Bus Reverse VAR Alarm BUS REVERSE VARs 10041
34 Bus Reverse VAR Pre-Alarm PRE BUS REVERSE VARs 10089
35 Bus Phase Current Differential Alarm BUS PHASE DIFF CURR 10093
36 Bus Phase Current Differential Pre-Alarm PRE BUS PHS DIFF CUR 10094
37 Bus Phase Over Current Alarm BUS PHASE OVER CURR 10039
38 Bus Phase Over Current Pre-Alarm PRE BUS PHS DIF CURR 10092
40 KVA Switch KVA SWITCH 10163

41 Load High Limit LOAD HIGH LIMIT 10053
42 Load Low Limit LOAD LOW LIMIT 10054
43 Load Surge Alarm LOAD SURGE 10063
44 Loss of Mains Alarm LOSS OF MAINS 10005
47 Mains Breaker Feedback Alarm MAINS BKR FDBCK ERR 10158

48 Mains Breaker Open Failure Alarm MAINS BKR SHUNT ERR 10156
49 Mains Export Power Alarm MAINS EXPORT POWER 10105
50 Mains Export Power Pre-Alarm PRE MAINS EXPORT PWR 10106
51 Mains Import Power Alarm MAINS IMPORT POWER 10103
52 Mains Import Power Pre-Alarm PRE MAINS IMPORT PWR 10104
53 Mains Export VAR Alarm MAINS EXPORT VARs 10109
54 Mains Export VAR Pre-Alarm PRE MAINS EXPORT VAR 10110
55 Mains Import VAR Alarm MAINS IMPORT VARs 10107
56 Mains Import VAR Pre-Alarm PRE MAINS IMPORT VAR 10108
57 Mains Neg. Phase Sequence Over Current Alarm MAINS N-PHS-OVER CURR 10115
Mains Neg. Phase Sequence Over Current Pre- PRE MAINS N-PHS OVR 10116
58
Alarm CUR
59 Mains Neg. Phase Sequence Over Voltage Alarm MAINS N-PHS-OVER VOLT 10117
Mains Neg. Phase Sequence Over Voltage Pre- PRE MAINS N-PHS OVR 10118
60
Alarm VLT
61 Mains Over Freq Alarm MAINS OVER FREQ 10066
62 Mains Over Freq Pre-Alarm PRE MAINS OVER FREQ 10101
63 Mains Under Freq Alarm MAINS UNDER FREQ 10067
118 Woodward
Alm # Event Name Display Name Modbus ID
64 Mains Under Freq Pre-Alarm PRE MAINS UNDER FREQ 10102
65 Mains Over Volt Alarm MAINS OVER VOLTAGE 10065
66 Mains Over Volt Pre-Alarm PRE MAINS OVER VOLT 10100
67 Mains Under Volt Alarm MAINS UNDER VOLTAGE 10064
68 Mains Under Volt Pre-Alarm PRE MAINS UNDER VOLT 10099
69 Mains Phase Current Differential Alarm MAINS PHASE DIFF CUR 10113
70 Mains Phase Current Differential Pre-Alarm PRE MAINS PHS DIF CUR 10114
71 Mains Phase Over Current Alarm MAINS PHASE OVER CUR 10111
72 Mains Phase Over Current Pre-Alarm PRE MAINS PHS OVER CUR 10112
73 Mains Volt Restrained Phase Over Current Alarm MAINS VLT R-PH OVR CUR 10119
Mains Volt Restrained Phase Over Current Pre- P-MAINS V R-PH OVR CUR 10120
74
Alarm
76 Phase Rotation Mismatch PHASE ROTATN MISMTCH 10161

77 Process High Limit PROCESS HIGH LIMIT 10055
78 Process Low Limit PROCESS LOW LIMIT 10056
84 Remote Fault1 REMOTE FAULT 1 10057

90 Program Configuration Check Error PROG CONFIG ERROR 10162
91 Analog Input 1, High Alarm ANALOG IN 1 HIGH 10122
92 Analog Input 1, High Pre-Alarm PRE ANALOG IN 1 HIGH 10121
93 Analog Input 1, Low Alarm ANALOG IN 1 LOW 10124
94 Analog Input 1, Low Pre-Alarm PRE ANALOG IN 1 LOW 10123
95 Analog Input 2, High Alarm ANALOG IN 2 HIGH 10126
96 Analog Input 2, High Pre-Alarm PRE ANALOG IN 2 HIGH 10125
97 Analog Input 2, Low Alarm ANALOG IN 2 LOW 10128
98 Analog Input 2, Low Pre-Alarm PRE ANALOG IN 2 LOW 10127
99 Analog Input 3 High Alarm ANALOG IN 3 HIGH 10130
100 Analog Input 3 High Pre-Alarm PRE ANALOG IN 3 HIGH 10129
101 Analog Input 3 Low Alarm ANALOG IN 3 LOW 10132
102 Analog Input 3 Low Pre-Alarm PRE ANALOG IN 3 LOW 10131
103 Analog Input 4 High Alarm ANALOG IN 4 HIGH 10134
104 Analog Input 4 High Pre-Alarm PRE ANALOG IN 4 HIGH 10133
105 Analog Input 4 Low Alarm ANALOG IN 4 LOW 10136
106 Analog Input 4 Low Pre-Alarm PRE ANALOG IN 4 LOW 10135
107 Group Breaker Sync Timeout GRP BKR SYNC TIMEOUT 10034
108 Mains Breaker Sync Timeout MAINS BKR SYNC TMOUT 10199
109 Group Breaker Sync Reclose Alarm GROUP SYNC RECLOSE 10035
110 Mains Breaker Sync Reclose Alarm MAINS SYNC RECLOSE 10200
117 Modbus Port 1 Failed MODBUS PORT 1 FAILED 10167

118 Modbus Port 2 Failed MODBUS PORT 2 FAILED 10168
119 Analog In 1 Failed Analog Input 1 Failed 10171
123 Atlas PowerSense Module Fault Power Module Fault 10175
124 Genset failed to start after LON start command LON Auto Start Seq Fault 10195
125 Genset failed to stop after LON stop command LON Auto Stop Seq Fault 10196
127 Bus Volt Restrained Phase Over Current Alarm BUS VLT R-PH OVR CUR 10201
Bus Volt Restrained Phase Over Current Pre- P-BUS V R-PH OVR CUR 10202
128
Alarm
Woodward 119
Protective Relaying—Definite Time

The table below gives some summary information about each type of definite
time protective relay function available in the MC. Details for each follow the
table. Note that the Alarm and Pre-Alarm Time Delays are used for both high and
low conditions. (ANSI numbers are in parenthesis)
Name Functionality Type

Mains Under/Over Voltage (27,59) Alarm and Pre-Alarm capability Definite Time
Bus Under/Over Voltage (27,59) Alarm and Pre-Alarm capability Definite Time
Mains Over/Under Frequency (81O, 81U) Alarm and Pre-Alarm capability Definite Time
Bus Over/Under Frequency (81O, 81U) Alarm and Pre-Alarm capability Definite Time
Mains Negative Phase Sequence Over Current Alarm and Pre-Alarm capability Definite Time
(46)
Bus Negative Phase Sequence Over Current Alarm and Pre-Alarm capability Definite Time
(46)
Mains Negative Phase Sequence Over Voltage Alarm and Pre-Alarm capability Definite Time
(47)
Bus Negative Phase Sequence Over Voltage Alarm and Pre-Alarm capability Definite Time
(47)
Mains Directional VAR Relay Alarm and Pre-Alarm capability Definite Time
Bus Directional VAR relay Alarm and Pre-Alarm capability Definite Time
Sync Check (25) True / False (no alarm) Definite Time
Battery Voltage Alarm only Definite Time
Load Surge Alarm Alarm only Definite Time
Remote Alarm 1 Alarm only Definite Time
Analog Alarm 1 Alarm and Pre-Alarm Definite Time
Over and Under Voltage

The Over and Under Voltage protective relay is definite time delay relay. It
operates by comparing the actual voltage to the level set points for this relay.
The highest voltage of the 3 phase inputs is always used for the Over Voltage
protective relay. Likewise, the lowest voltage of the 3 phase inputs is always
used for the Under Voltage protective relay. Once an alarm is issued, it is latched
until the EGCP-3 is reset. The Bus Under Voltage relay is automatically disabled
anytime the group breaker is configured and open or if there is no group breaker
and there are no LS units on the bus. The Mains Under Voltage relay, Mains and
Bus Over Voltage relays are not inhibited by breaker position.
The action to be taken for an Over Voltage Pre-Alarm, Over Voltage Alarm,
Under Voltage Pre-Alarm, and Under Voltage Alarm are all independently
configurable. There are separate Delay times for Pre-Alarm and Alarm. The
delay times for Over Voltage and Under Voltage are identical but Mains and Bus
are independently configured.
The Alarm and Pre-Alarm trigger levels for an Over Voltage Pre-Alarm, Over
Voltage Alarm, Under Voltage Pre-Alarm, and Under Voltage Alarm are all
independently configurable. The worst case phase voltage must exceed the
configured level continuously for the delay time before the Alarm or Pre-Alarm
action is taken.
120 Woodward
The diagram below shows how the Pre-Alarm and final Alarm events are
envisioned to operate. Note that the delay times are identical between Over and
Under Voltage event examples but the trigger levels are all separately
configurable.
OV Alarm
Issued
V
OV Pre-Alarm
Issued
OV Alarm LVL
OV Pre-Alarm
LVL
Rated Voltage
UV Pre-Alarm
Actual Issued
Volts
UV Pre-Alarm LVL UV Alarm
Issued
UV Alarm LVL
Pre-Alarm Alarm Pre-Alarm Alarm

Delay Delay Delay Delay
Figure 9-1. Over Voltage/Under Voltage Alarm
Over and Under Frequency

The Over and Under Frequency protective relay is definite time delay relay. It
operates by comparing the actual frequency to the level set points for this relay.
Once an alarm is issued, it is latched until the EGCP-3 is reset. The Bus Under
Frequency relay is automatically disabled anytime the group breaker is
configured and open or if there is no group breaker and there are no LS units on
the bus. The Bus Over Frequency relay, Mains Over and Under Frequency
relays are not inhibited by breaker position.
The action to be taken for an Over Frequency Pre-Alarm, Over Frequency Alarm,
Under Frequency Pre-Alarm, and Under Frequency Alarm are all independently
delay times for Over Frequency and Under Frequency are identical but Mains
and Bus are independently configured.
The Alarm and Pre-Alarm trigger levels for an Over Frequency Pre-Alarm, Over
Frequency Alarm, Under Frequency Pre-Alarm, and Under Frequency Alarm are
all independently configurable. The frequency must exceed the level
continuously for the delay time before the Alarm or Pre-Alarm action is taken.
The diagram in Over and Under Voltage above shows how the Pre-Alarm and
final Alarm events are envisioned to operate. The Over and Under Frequency
protective relay function operates in the same manner as the Over and Under
Voltage protective relay function.
Woodward 121
Negative Phase Sequence Over Current

This Negative Phase Sequence Over Current protective relay is a definite time
delay relay. As the name implies, it trips when levels are ABOVE a configured
setting. It operates by comparing the actual Negative Phase Sequence Current
with the level set point for this relay. Once an alarm is issued, it is latched until
the EGCP-3 is reset. The Negative Phase Sequence Over Current relays are
continuously enabled.
The actions to be taken for a Negative Phase Sequence Over Current Pre-Alarm
or a Negative Phase Sequence Over Current Alarm are both independently
configurable. The Negative Phase Sequence Over Current trigger levels are also
independently configurable for the Pre-Alarm and Alarm. There are separate
Delay times for Pre-Alarm and Alarm. The Negative Phase Sequence Current
must exceed the trigger level continuously for the delay time before the Alarm or
Pre-Alarm action is taken.
Alarm events are envisioned to operate. Only the Over Voltage portion of the
diagram is used. The Negative Phase Sequence Over Current protective relay
function operates in the same manner as the Over Voltage protective relay
function.
Negative Phase Sequence Over Voltage

This Negative Phase Sequence Over Voltage protective relay is a definite time
delay relay. As the name implies, it trips when levels are ABOVE a configured
setting. It operates by comparing the actual Negative Phase Sequence Voltage
with the level set point for this relay. Once an alarm is issued, it is latched until
the EGCP-3 is reset. The Negative Phase Sequence Over Voltage relays are
continuously enabled.
The actions to be taken for a Negative Phase Sequence Over Voltage Pre-Alarm
or a Negative Phase Sequence Over Voltage Alarm are both independently
configurable. The Negative Phase Sequence Over Voltage trigger levels are also
independently configurable for the Pre-Alarm and Alarm. There are separate
Delay times for Pre-Alarm and Alarm. The Negative Phase Sequence Voltage
must exceed the trigger level continuously for the delay time before the Alarm or
Pre-Alarm action is taken.
The diagram in Over and Under Voltage above shows how the Pre-Alarm and final
Alarm events are envisioned to operate. Only the Over Voltage portion of the
diagram is used. The Negative Phase Sequence Over Voltage protective relay
function operates in the same manner as the Over Voltage protective relay function.
Directional VAR
The Over and Reverse VAR (Export and Import VAR) protective relay is definite
time delay relay. It operates by comparing the actual reactive power to the level
set points for this relay. Only reactive power is of interest for this protection.
For purpose of this alarm, Over VAR for the Bus is defined as a positive value on
the display or Watch Window, and is representative of lagging power factor. CT
orientation will determine if the reading is positive or negative. Physical location
of the PTs and CTs in the system bus layout determines if the power is ‘into’ or
‘out-of’ the bus. Reverse VAR for the Bus is read as negative VAR values, and is
representative of leading power factor.
122 Woodward
Over VAR for the mains is defined as reactive power flowing out of the plant into
the mains. This will be referred to as Export VAR, and is displayed as a positive
value. It is representative of lagging power factor. Reverse VAR for the mains will
be referred to as Import VAR, represented as a negative value and leading
power factor.
Once an alarm is issued, it is latched until the EGCP-3 is reset. The Directional
VAR relays are continuously enabled.
The actions to be taken for all Directional VAR Alarms are all independently
delay times for Over and Reverse VAR (Export and Import VAR) are identical but
mains and Bus are independently configured.
The Alarm and Pre-Alarm trigger levels for all Directional VAR Alarms are all
independently configurable. The reactive power level must exceed the trigger
level continuously for the delay time before the Alarm or Pre-Alarm action is
taken.
Alarm events are envisioned to operate. The Directional VAR protective relay
function operates in the same manner as the Over and Under Voltage protective
relay function.
Sync Check
The EGCP-3 synchronizer provides the Sync Check protective relay function. It
is listed here due to its nature as a protective relay. It is enabled during
synchronizing only. The synchronizer always performs a Sync Check function
regardless of the configured mode since it will never assert the breaker close
output unless the two A-phase inputs are in sync with each other. The
synchronizer may also be placed in the Permissive Mode which mimics a typical
ANSI 25 device by closing the output when the two sources are in sync.
Battery Voltage
The Battery Voltage protection watches an internal measurement of 24vdc input
supply voltage. One configurable high and one configurable low level trigger are
provided. Since an MC control is not powered from the same supply that would
normally be used to power a starter motor, this alarm is continuously enabled. It
is a definite time protection with a fixed timeout period of 10 seconds. This
timeout is used to ensure that voltage transients due to equipment power up
does not cause erroneous alarms. How the alarms react is independently
configurable.
Load Surge Alarm
The load surge alarm compares the real power (watts) on the mains to the same
value sampled at a fixed time in the past. If this value is larger than the alarm
level and there is at least one LS parallel with the mains the alarm is triggered.
The load surge alarm will only sense a load surge flowing out to the mains, which
usually occurs if the mains suddenly becomes unstable. For this reason the
alarm is configured for a LOM condition, but can be configured for any alarm
event.
Woodward 123
Remote Alarms
There are six (6) configurable alarms based on discrete inputs. Each alarm is a
definite time function with an independent configurable delay time. The action
taken by each alarm is configurable for Disabled, Warning, Audible, Visual, Stop
All Engines, Trip Mains Breaker, LOM, and LOM with alarm. Each input may be
configured to consider the active condition as one with +24 Vdc applied to the
input (active high) or with the input floating (active low). The input must meet the
active condition continuously for the delay time before the Alarm action is taken.
Analog Alarms
There are four (4) configurable alarms based on the analog inputs. Each has
High Alarm and High Pre-Alarm level set points and Low Alarm and Low Pre-
Alarm level set points. The Analog Alarms are all definite time alarms with
independent configurable timeouts. The action taken by the Alarms and Pre-
Alarms are all configurable for Disabled, Warning, Audible, Visual, Stop All
Engines, Trip Mains Breaker, LOM, and LOM with alarm.
Protective Relaying—Inverse Time

Name Functionality Type
Mains Directional Power Relay (32) Alarm and Pre-Alarm capability Inverse Time
Bus Directional Power Relay (32) Alarm and Pre-Alarm capability Inverse Time
Mains Phase Over Current (51) Alarm and Pre-Alarm capability Inverse Time
Bus Phase Over Current (51) Alarm and Pre-Alarm capability Inverse Time
Mains Voltage Restrained Phase Over Current Alarm and Pre-Alarm capability Inverse Time
(51V)
Bus Voltage Restrained Phase Over Current Alarm and Pre-Alarm capability Inverse Time
(51V)
Mains Phase Current Imbalance relay (46) Alarm and Pre-Alarm capability Inverse Time
Bus Phase Current Imbalance relay (46) Alarm and Pre-Alarm capability Inverse Time
Directional Power
The Bus Over and Reverse Power protective relays, and Mains Import and
Export Power protective relays are inverse time delay relays. They operate by
comparing the actual real power to the level set point for this relay. Only real
power is of interest for this protection.
Import power for the Mains is power flowing in from the Mains (produced by the
Utility). The Mains KW reading on the front panel or Watch Window will be a
negative value when importing power, and read positive value when exporting.
Likewise, power readings for the bus will read positive or negative. For purpose
of this alarm, CT orientation will determine if the power reading is positive or
negative. Physical location of the PTs and CTs in the system bus layout
determines if the power is ‘into’ or ‘out-of’ the bus. Reverse Power for the Bus is
denoted as negative Power values.
124 Woodward
A configurable time delay setting is provided to shift the inverse time curve along
the time axis. This movement allows adjustment of the trip time at the configured
level. The same shifted curve is used for Pre-Alarms and Alarms so a time shift
done for one will affect the other as well. The same shift is also applied to both
the Over Power and the Reverse Power protective relays. There are also
configurable rated mains import, mains export, bus over and bus reverse power
levels that need to be adjusted. Using these rated values the inverse time curve
can be adjusted to protect the system at all values.
The power level must exceed the level continuously for the calculated delay time
before the Alarm or Pre-Alarm action is taken. The delay time is always being
recalculated for the present power input value. Once an alarm is issued, it is
latched until the EGCP-3 is reset. The Directional Power relays are continuously
enabled.
The below graph shows how the Pre-Alarm and final Alarm settings relate to
actual and rated power levels. Notice the delay time for the over power pre-alarm
is longer than the delay time for the over power alarm. This time difference
results from the difference in the actual power compared to the pre-alarm and
alarm set points. A long time delay is seen when the actual power is only slightly
higher than the pre-alarm level. When the actual power goes above the alarm
level it goes noticeably higher so the time delay is shorter. In order to determine
the calculated delay and to see how the curve shift is used, refer to the second
graph below.
P OP Alarm
OP Pre-Alarm Issued
Issued
Over Pwr
Alarm LVL
Over Pwr
Pre-Alarm LVL
Rated Power
Actual
Power
0 t
Rev Pwr
Pre-Alarm LVL Calculated Calculated
RP Pre-Alarm
Delay Delay Issued
Rev Pwr
Alarm LVL RP Alarm
Issued
Calculated Calculated
Delay Delay
Figure 9-2. Over Power/Reverse Power
Woodward 125
The graph below shows how the inverse time curve is applied to the directional
power protective relay. Note the same curve shift applies to both Bus Over and
Bus Reverse Power. Likewise, for the Mains, the same curve shift would apply to
both Import and Export Power.
P Curve Shift
(same as below)
Calculated OP
Over Pwr Alarm Delay
Alarm LVL
Calculated OP
Over Pwr Pre-Alarm Delay
Pre-Alarm LVL
Rated Power
0 t
Rev Pwr
Pre-Alarm LVL Calculated RP
Pre-Alarm Delay
Rev Pwr
Alarm LVL Calculated RP
Alarm Delay
Curve Shift
(same as above)
Figure 9-3. Over Power/Reverse Power Time Delay
Phase Over Current

The Phase Over Current protective relay is an inverse time delay relay. It
operates by comparing the actual phase current to the level set point for this
relay. The highest current of the 3 phase inputs is always used for the Phase
Over Current protective relay. Total current is not evaluated. This protective relay
is NOT meant to replace a breaker.
the time axis. This movement allows adjustment of the minimum trip time at the
configured level. The same shifted curve is used for Pre-Alarms and Alarms so a
time shift done for one will affect the other as well.
The worst case current level must exceed the configured level continuously for
the calculated delay time before the Alarm or Pre-Alarm action is taken. The
delay time is always being recalculated for the present current input. Once an
alarm is issued, it is latched until the EGCP-3 is reset. The Phase Over Current
protective relay is continuously enabled.
The diagram in Directional Power above shows how the Pre-Alarm and final
Alarm events are envisioned to operate as well as the interaction with the inverse
time curve. Only the Over Power portion of the diagram is used. The Phase Over
Current protective relay function operates in the same manner as the Over
Power protective relay function.
126 Woodward
Voltage Restrained Phase Over Current

The Voltage Restrained Phase Over Current protective relay is an inverse time
delay. It operates by comparing the highest current of the 3 phase inputs to the
level set point for this relay. Total current is not evaluated. The average voltage
is used to determine the amount of restraint or bias to the over current trip level.
The protective relay uses the average of the phase voltages to modify the Pre-
Alarm and Alarm trigger levels. The phase current event trigger level is adjusted
proportional to the voltage. The relationship is a 1:1 scaling. For example, if the
bus voltage is at 100% of rated, the trigger level is unmodified. However, if the
voltage is at 25% of rated, the phase current trigger level will also be scaled to
25% of the configured trigger level. A simple proportional multiplier is used for
this purpose multiplying both the Pre-Alarm level and the Alarm level by the
voltage-derived scalar. The figure below shows the relationship between the
current alarm level multiplier and the voltage level.
The scaled worst case current level must exceed the level continuously for the
calculated delay time before the Alarm or Pre-Alarm action is taken. The delay
time is always being recalculated for the present current input. Once an alarm is
issued, it is latched until the EGCP-3 is reset. The Voltage Restrained Phase
Over Current protective relay is continuously enabled.
Voltage Restrained Overcurrent

% Rated Voltage
100
80
60
40
20
0
0 20 40 60 80 100
% Overcurrent Trip
Figure 9-4. Voltage Restrained Over Current
The diagram in Directional Power above shows how the Pre-Alarm and Alarm
events are envisioned to operate as well as the interaction with the inverse time
curve. Only the Over Power portion of the diagram is used. The Voltage
Restrained Phase Over Current protective relay function operates in the same
manner as the Phase Over Current protective relay function except that the
trigger level is automatically scaled proportional to the bus voltage.
Phase Current Imbalance

The Phase-balance Current protective relay is an inverse time delay relay. It
operates by comparing the actual current between each phase to the level set
point for this relay. The highest differential current of the 3 comparisons is always
used for the Phase Current Imbalance protective relay.
Woodward 127
The worst-case current differential must exceed the trigger level continuously for
the calculated delay time before the Alarm or Pre-Alarm action is taken. The
delay time is always being recalculated for the present current imbalance level
input. Once an alarm is issued, it is latched until the EGCP-3 is reset. The Phase
Current Differential protective relay is continuously enabled.
The below graph shows how the Pre-Alarm and Alarm settings relate to actual
current imbalance levels. The current imbalance levels are internally normalized
against the rated current. This provides the inverse time function with a valid
comparison because the IEEE definition is only valid above 1 per unit.
Nevertheless, the configuration values for the Alarm and Pre-Alarm Level are to
be entered as the actual allowed difference. The EGCP-3 will automatically add
Rated Current to the configured value.
A
Alarm
Issued
Alarm LVL
Pre-Alarm
Actual Current Imbalance
Issued
Pre-Alarm LVL
0 t
Calculated Calculated
Delay Delay
Figure 9-5. Phase Current Imbalance
128 Woodward
In order to determine the calculated delay and to see how the curve shift is used,
refer to the graph below. The Phase Current Imbalance protective relay function
operates in nearly the same manner as the Over Power protective relay function
except that rated current is automatically added into the percentage calculation
for the IEEE inverse time curve input. The information is provided in case an
exact trip time must be calculated.
A Curve Shift
Calculated
Alarm LVL + Alarm Delay
Rated Current
Calculated
Pre-Alarm Delay
Pre-Alarm LVL+
Rated Current
Rated Current
Figure 9-6. Phase-Balance Current, Inverse Time Delay
Inverse Time Curve

All protective relays that utilize inverse time trips will use the same curve shape
as defined below. Each relay will be allowed to independently adjust the curve
along the time axis. This adjustment does not alter the curve shape. The reason
for the adjustment is to allow fine-tuning of the alarm levels and timing.
The EGCP-3 takes the ratio of the input being used (phase current, power, etc.)
to the rated value of that unit. The inverse time curve always uses a ratio of rated
for its data element.
The inverse time curve plotted below is defined in IEEE C37.112 as the Very
Inverse formula
⎛ A ⎞
Time = ⎜ p + B⎟ ∗ D
⎝ x −1 ⎠
where:
The amount of time to wait before an alarm is issued for the given value of x. As x
Time
increases, the time will decrease.
X A ratio of the measured parameter in protection to rated value.
A IEEE defined constant that affects the curve shape. It is fixed at 19.61.
B IEEE defined constant that affects the curve position. It is fixed at 0.491
P IEEE defined constant that defines the curve type. It is fixed at 2.
Adjustable time delay. This allows the curve to be shifted along the time axis by a
D
variable amount., 0.01 to 10.0, default =1.0
For high alarms: If the input is less than the Alarm level and Pre-Alarm level, no
action will be taken. When the input is above the Pre-Alarm level, the configured
action will be taken for the pre-alarm after the timeout defined by the formula.
When the input is above the Alarm level, the appropriate (and typically more
severe) action will be taken after the (shorter) timeout defined by the formula.
Woodward 129
For low alarms: If the input is greater than the Alarm level and Pre-Alarm level,
no action will be taken. When the input is less than the Pre-Alarm level, the
configured action will be taken for the pre-alarm after the timeout defined by the
formula. When the input is less than the Alarm level, the appropriate (and
typically more severe) action will be taken after the (shorter) timeout defined by
the formula.
The IEEE curve implemented is the Very Inverse curve defined in IEEE C37.112
and matches the IEC curve defined in IEC 255-03 except for the additional time
shift (B) that is not defined in IEC. The formula will not function at rated or below
rated for the parameter in protection. Therefore, if a trip value is set at or below
rated, the timeout for these conditions will be fixed at 10 seconds. This causes a
discontinuity in the curve at 100% rated. The values for A and B in the IEEE
formula change at the discontinuity point. The constant A becomes 0 and the
constant B becomes 10. Due to the location of the B constant and the D variable,
the 10-second timeout will also adjust with the curve shift.
The figure below is a set of curves showing the IEEE Very Inverse formula
plotted three times. The center plot is the default curve with no level shift, Shift
value = 1.0. The upper plot is the same curve with a level shift of five. The lower
plot is the same curve with a level shift of 0.1. Note the curve shape does not
change. Also note the fixed timing at or below rated as shown by the straight
horizontal line; and note how the fixed timing is varied with the curve shift. The
EGCP-3 curve does extend to the right beyond the time shown.
Also shown below is a figure with the Inverse Time Curve converted to linear axis
scale. The values used in the EGCP-3 extend above 25 second delay between
1.0 and 1.35, and also extend to the right beyond the ratio of 5.0.
NOTE
The below figures have reversed axes from previous figures in this chapter
in order to simplify the above descriptions. All figures show the same
method of applying the inverse time curve.
130 Woodward
Inverse Time Log Plot
1000.0
Curve Level shifted by 5.0
100.0
Delay Time (s)
Default Curve
10.0
Curve Level shifted by 0.1
1.0
0.1
10.00
0.10 1.00
Input Value / Rated Value
D=1 D=0.1 D=5
Figure 9-7. Inverse Curve Time Delay, Level Shift
Inverse Time Curve (Linear)
30
25
20
Delay (sec)
15
10
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Ratio (Input/Rated)
Figure 9-8. Inverse Curve Time Delay, Linear Graph
Woodward 131
Example: If an alarm set point is 150% of the rated (1.5 ratio), and the input is at
this 150% value, and the shift = 1.0, the delay will be 16 seconds. When shift = 5,
delay will be 80 seconds. When shift = 0.1, delay will be 1.6 seconds. As the
input value exceeds the setpoint, the delay will become shorter.
Example: For an Over Current Trip Relay function: If Rated Phase Current is
500 Amps, and a trip delay of 5.0 second is desired at 700 Amp.
Ratio = (700/500) = 1.4
⎛ 19.61 ⎞
⎜ 2 + 0.491⎟ ∗ 1.0 = 20.9
⎝ 1.4 − 1 ⎠
Normalized Delay = 20.9 sec.
Then: 5.0 sec / 20.9 sec = 0.24
The curve shift value of 0.24 is required to meet the desired level and delay
requirement.
Diagnostics
The following table is a concise list of all diagnostic alarms generated by the
EGCP-3. The Modbus ID is the Boolean Read address where the status of the
named diagnostic can be determined via Modbus. Some diagnostic actions are
not configurable but force a specific action to be taken.
Event Display Name MODBUS ID

Analog IN 1 Out of Range AI 1 OUT OF RANGE (Analog Input 1 Failed) 10171
Group Breaker Sync Timeout GRP BKR SYNC TIMEOUT 10034
Mains Breaker Sync Timeout MAINS BKR SYNC TMOUT 10199
Group Breaker Sync Reclose Alarm GROUP SYNC RECLOSE 10035
Mains Breaker Sync Reclose Alarm MAINS SYNC RECLOSE 10200
Group Breaker Feedback Error GRP BKR FEEDBACK ERR 10157
Group Breaker Shunt Trip Error GRP BKR SHNT TRP ERR 10155
Mains Breaker Feedback Error MAINS BKR FDBCK ERR 10158
Mains Breaker Shunt Trip Error MAINS BKR SHUNT ERR 10156
Modbus Link 1 Error MODBUS LINK 1 ERR 10167
Modbus Link 2 Error MODBUS LINK 2 ERR 10168
Phase Rotation Mismatch PHASE ROTATN MISMTCH 10161
PowerSense Board Fault POWER MODULE FAULT 10175
Analog Input Out of Range

The Out of Range Diagnostic function applies to all four analog inputs. A
separate alarm is issued for each input. The default alarm action for Out of
Range alarms is Disabled, The Alarm Action can be configured from the Watch
Window Service Analog Input menu for: Disabled, Warning, Visual Alarm,
Audible Alarm, Stop All Engines, and Trip Mains Breaker.
132 Woodward
If an analog input measures a value less than 2 mA or greater than 22 mA, this
diagnostic becomes true. When the input is configured as a voltage input, the
equivalent range is 0.5 V at the low end and 5.5 volts at the high end. This
diagnostic is always enabled.
Breaker Sync Timeout Alarm

The breaker sync timeout Diagnostic will occur if the EGCP-3 was not able to
bring the mains and bus into synchronization long enough to close the breaker
prior to the Synchronizer Timeout expiring. If the EGCP-3 attempts to close the
breaker but cannot due to other reasons, this diagnostic would be disabled. The
Alarm Action can be Configured from the Synchronizer menu. The Alarm Action
is defaulted for Warning, it can be configured for: Disabled, Warning, Visual
Alarm, Audible Alarm, Stop All Engines. When this diagnostic occurs, the
configured action is taken.
Breaker Sync Reclose Alarm

This diagnostic results when a breaker close output is operated more than the
configured reclose attempts without the breaker auxiliary contact reporting that
the breaker has closed. When this diagnostic occurs, by the default action, it is
logged in the event list as a warning and the warning output is engaged. From
the Front panel or Watch Window it can be configured for: Disabled, Warning,
Visual Alarm, Audible Alarm, Stop All Engines or Trip Mains Breaker.
Breaker Feedback Error

The Breaker Feedback Error Diagnostic results when the breaker auxiliary
contact reports that the breaker is open but current is observed flowing through
the breaker. This indicates that the breaker auxiliary contact circuit is open or
failed. When this condition occurs, the EGCP-3 automatically begins performing
the actions associated with the relevant breaker closure as if the auxiliary contact
indicated the breaker was closed.
The default action is Warning, so when this diagnostic occurs, by, it is logged in
the event list as a warning and the warning output is engaged. From the Front
panel or Watch Window it can be configured for: Disabled, Warning, Visual
Alarm, Audible Alarm, Stop All Engines or Trip Mains Breaker.
Breaker Shunt Trip Error

The Breaker Shunt Trip Error Diagnostic results when a breaker shunt trip output
is operated without the breaker auxiliary contact reporting that the breaker has
opened. It may be that the auxiliary contact is failed closed but typically will
indicate that the shunt trip wiring is open or the shunt trip coil in the breaker is
failed. From Watch Window Engine Protection menu, it can be configured for:
Disabled, Warning, Visual Alarm, Audible Alarm, Stop All Engines or Trip Mains
Breaker. The default action is to initiate a Stop All Engines.
Woodward 133
Modbus Link Error

There is a Link Error for each of the 2 possible Modbus connections. The Link
Error is flagged when a Modbus Timeout is detected. The timeout period is
configurable in the Communications Menu. The default action is Warning, so
when this diagnostic occurs, by, it is logged in the event list as a warning and the
warning output is engaged
Phase Rotation Mismatch

The Phase Rotation Mismatch Diagnostic indicates that the configuration for
phase rotation on the bus or mains does not match the observed phase rotation.
This diagnostic relies on Negative Phase Sequence Voltage to determine the
mismatch. If either bus is configured to use single phase sensing, the phase
rotation mismatch check will not operate. When this diagnostic occurs, it is
logged in the event list as and an audible alarm output is engaged. It will also
prevent breaker closure.
Power Module Board Fault

The Power Module Board Fault Diagnostic occurs when an error is detected with
the PowerSense board in EGCP-3. The PowerSense board is the board that
monitors ac inputs and calculates the control values based on the inputs. This
board is located in the middle of the stack. If this diagnostic occurs, the EGCP-3
will automatically perform an I/O Lock which will disable all digital outputs and
LON communication.
There is a LED on the top of the board closest to the display, labeled CPU.
Check the LED to see if it is blinking, solid on, or off. If it is blinking, make a note
of how many times it blinks before it starts the sequence over. There will be a
long pause when the sequence is starting over. The LED may blink up to 24
times in a sequence. Making a note of the LED status will help Woodward
applications staff determine the nature of the problem.
Before calling Woodward, cycle power to the EGCP-3. The board fault may clear
by itself and allow normal operation again. If, after cycling power to the EGCP-3,
the board fault remains, call Woodward for assistance in troubleshooting.
From Watch Window Shutdown and Alarms menu, it can be configured for:
Disabled, Warning, Visual Alarm, Audible Alarm, Stop All Engines or Trip Mains
Breaker. The default action is to initiate a Stop All Engines.
Configuration Check
The EGCP-3 performs some configuration checks to determine if the control is
configured in a manner that is inconsistent, dangerous, or non-functional. An
error message is issued if the EGCP-3 finds a configuration error.
This check covers:
• The same feature should not be assigned to more than one discrete input.
• The same feature should not be assigned to more than one analog input.
• Value entered for Rated Watts must be between 70% to 100% of entered
Rated VA.
• Entered Rated VAR should be between 0.0 and 70% of Rated VA.
134 Woodward
Status Indicators
Both the SmartCore board and the PowerSense board have red status LEDs
which indicate internal CPU detected errors. These indicators are useful for
troubleshooting problems. The status LEDs on the PowerSense board are
located on the bottom edge(when panel mounted) of the board between
terminals 36 and 45 (terminals 37-45 are not used). The status LED on the
SmartCore board is next to terminal 82.
Check the LED to see if it is blinking, solid on, or off. It is normal for both board’s
status LEDs to be on for approximately 60 sec during power-up tests, then turn
off. If an LED is blinking, make a note of how many times it blinks before it starts
the sequence over. There will be a long pause when the sequence is starting
over. The PowerSense board LED may blink up to 24 times in a sequence. The
SmartCore board LED may blink up to 14 times in a sequence.
Interpretation of the LED flash codes is not provided here since it will not help the
user to correct the problem. However, the flash codes will help Woodward
personnel in troubleshooting the problem.
The PowerSense board also has LEDs for the LON status, these are located
next to the CPU status LED. The center LON Status LED will flash green to
indicate the LON communication is operational. The rate of flashing indicates the
amount of “traffic” on the LON network. The LON Service LED will be off during
normal operation. The Service LED may turn on during power-up tests, but will
turn off when the application is running. If this LED is flashing, the rate of flashes
will indicate the possible LON network problem.
Woodward 135
Chapter 10.
Synchronizer Description
Introduction
Synchronization is the matching of the output voltage waveform of one
synchronous alternating current electrical generator with the voltage waveform of
another alternating current electrical system. For the two systems to be
synchronized and connected in parallel, five conditions must be considered:
• Number of phases in each system
• Direction of rotation of the phases
• Voltage amplitudes of the two systems
• Frequencies of the two systems
• Phase angle of the voltage of the two systems
The first two conditions are determined when the equipment is specified,
installed, and wired. The synchronizer matches the remaining conditions
(voltage, frequency, and phase) before the paralleling breaker is closed.
Functional Description
The Synchronizer is the functional section in software and hardware of the
EGCP-3 that synchronizes the mains to the bus and closes breakers. To
accomplish this the synchronizer has four outputs, a speed bias output, a voltage
raise/lower output, and a breaker/contactor command. Working with the outputs
are the four “modes” of operation. These modes may be configured from the
front panel or any of the communications links (ServLink Watch Window,
Modbus). The last command given from any of these sources dictates the
synchronizer mode.
The synchronizer may be configured for either Phase Matching or Slip

Frequency Synchronizing. If the system does not require synchronizing
functions, the sync type may be configured to Off. Phase Matching provides
rapid synchronizing for critical standby power applications. Slip Frequency
Synchronizing is used for larger generators and guarantees minimum transients
at breaker closing and that initial power flow is out of the machine. In the slip
mode a synchroscope will continuously rotate slowly clockwise, in the phase
mode a synchroscope will hold at the 12:00 position.
Additional synchronizer features include voltage matching, time delayed

automatic multi-shot re-closing, breaker / contactor control configuration, phase
rotation mismatch alarm, breaker sync timeout alarm, and breaker sync reclose
alarm. Each of these features may be enabled or disabled according to the
needs of the application.
The EGCP-3 MC can synchronize and open/close up to two breakers in a

system. It is important to note that if multiple MC’s are available in the system
only one “Group Breaker” can be configured. A group breaker is used to be an
intermediary between the load bus and generator bus in order to synchronize all
generators to a single bus before plant load is introduced to them. Group
breakers are used extensively for ATS situations where multiple gensets are
needed take load from the utility without overloading a single unit. For more
information about system configuration and group breakers see Chapter 17
further on in the application section.
136 Woodward
Operating Modes
Mode Speed Bias Voltage Raise/Lower Breaker

Output CMDs control
Off Disabled Disabled Disable
d
Check Active Active ◊ Disable
d
Permissive Disabled Disabled Active
Run Active Active ◊ Active
◊ If the synchronizer is configured without voltage matching, this output is always
disabled.
The operation of the synchronizer is determined by the mode configuration.

When in the Off Mode, the synchronizer is out of operation. This mode is
entered when the Mode Switch is not in the Auto position, the Synchronizer
mode is configured as “Off”, or the breaker closes successfully. In the Off mode
the user has the ability to manually bias the speed of the LS units via the sync
speed bias input into the LON with the Raise/Lower Speed panel switches. The
user also has the ability to manually bias the voltage of the LS units via the
voltage raise/lower inputs into the LON with the Raise/Lower Voltage panel
switches.
Run mode allows normal automatic synchronizer operation and breaker closure
signals. It will only occur if the Mode Switch input is in Auto. The Raise/Lower
Speed and Voltage panel switches are ignored. The sync speed bias signal
(explained below) is maintained throughout the breaker closure signal. The
voltage raise/lower signal is also maintained throughout the breaker closure
signal if voltage matching is enabled. When the specified closure signal time has
elapsed or the CB (circuit breaker) aux contact closure signal is received, the
synchronizer is automatically turned off.
The Check mode allows normal synchronizing and voltage matching, but does
not issue a breaker closure signal. It will only occur if the Auto Mode Switch input
is asserted. The Raise/Lower Speed and Voltage panel switches are ignored. It
is used during commissioning or if the user wishes only to close a breaker
manually. The mode applies to closure of both the group and mains breakers.
Permissive mode enables the synch-check function for proper synchronization,

but synchronizer operation does not affect the LS units speed or voltage. If
phase, frequency, and voltage are within proper limits, the synchronizer issues
the breaker closure command. It will only occur if the Auto switch input is
asserted. The user also has the ability to manually bias the voltage raise/lower
via LON communication with the Raise/Lower Voltage panel switches and the
sync speed bias via LON communication with the Raise/Lower Speed panel
switches. This mode is typically used with breaker closure wiring in series with a
manual closure command such that the EGCP-3 is not actually closing the
breaker but allowing it to close.
Woodward 137
Dead Bus
The dead bus closing function may be enabled or disabled during configuration.
The dead bus detection level depends on the three hardware range selections
for the PT inputs. A dead bus will be indicated when the voltage is less than
27,40, or 80 Vac L-N respectively. On a deadbus, realization the MC will send a
deadbus acknowledgement over the LON. In order for the MC to gain permission
to close the breaker, all units must acknowledge the deadbus and deliver a
deadbus token to the MC. The synchronizer will allow breaker closure only if the
bus breaker aux contact indicates the breaker is open AND the configuration for
dead bus is enabled AND the bus or mains voltage is below the threshold AND
the deadbus token is received from the rest of the units communicating on the
LON.
Dynamic Control Adjustments – PI Control

The Synchronizer has a PI controller to determine the dynamic response during
synchronizing. The proportional gain determines how fast the synchronizer
responds to an error in speed or phase. Adjust this gain to provide stable control
during synchronizing. Lower the value to slow the response.
Integral gain determines how quickly the synchronizer responds to a large error
in phase or frequency. It prevents low frequency hunting and damping (overshoot
or undershoot) when the synchronizer is first enabled or when a speed transient
occurs during synchronizing. Lower the value to slow the response.
Slip Frequency
In larger systems, it is often desirable for the oncoming generator(s) speed to be
slightly higher than the mains when the group breaker is closed. This assures
that power immediately flows out of the generator(s) and into the system. The
slip frequency synchronizing function is enabled when the Sync Type
configuration setting indicates Slip Frequency. A Slip Window and a Slip
Frequency may be configured. The Slip Frequency is the exact frequency
difference desired between the mains and bus. The Slip Window is the amount of
error around the slip frequency that is allowed. The phase error must be within
the Phase Match Window before a breaker close command output will be issued.
The synchronizer automatically controls the sync speed bias at the specified slip
frequency. Gain and Stability adjustments to the slip frequency PI controller are
provided to allow stable operation of the automatic synchronizer function over a
wide range of system dynamics.
During Phase Matching synchronizing, the Slip Frequency represents the

maximum speed difference allowed before the breaker close command is active.
This is proportional to the time the phase match must be within the phase
window.
138 Woodward
Phase Match
The phase matching synchronizing mode corrects the frequency and phase of
the LS unit(s) to lock it to the mains frequency and phase. Phase matching
synchronizing is exclusive of the slip frequency method. The EGCP-3 uses signal
processing techniques to derive the difference in phase of the mains A and bus A
phase voltage signals. When there is a difference, the synchronizer sends a
correction signal to the sync speed bias. The correction signal from the sync
speed bias output to LS units tells the LS’s to increase or decrease engine speed
depending on whether the slip is faster or slower than the mains. Corrections will
occur when the phase is not within the configured phase match window. Slip
Window is not used in Phase Match mode.
A PI (proportional, integral) controller provides the correction signal. Proportional

Gain and Integral Gain adjustments to the PI controller are provided to allow
stable operation of the automatic synchronizer function over a wide range of
system dynamics.
Voltage Match
The voltage of a bus containing several parallel generators must be matched to
the mains within a small percentage to minimize the reactive power flow upon
breaker closure and to maximize breaker contact life. If a synchronous generator
is paralleled to a larger system such as a utility, a difference in voltages before
paralleling will not change the voltage of the mains. If the generator voltage is
lower than the mains voltage, reactive power will be drawn from the mains and
used to excite the generator to the higher mains voltage. In the case where the
generator voltage is low enough, the reactive power flow could motorize the
generator with potential damage to the generator windings.
The voltage matching function of the EGCP-3 uses bus A phase and mains A
phase signals. True RMS measurements are compared and matched. The
processor issues appropriate raise or lower commands to the LON
communications to bring the voltage of the generators controlled by LS units
within the specified window of the mains voltage. Once the difference between
bus and mains is within the configured voltage match window, the voltage
raise/lower commands will not be moved. If the voltage match falls out of the
window, the voltage raise/lower will again affect a change to bring the bus
voltage back into compliance.
The automatic voltage matching function may be enabled or disabled in the

Synchronizer menu. When enabled, voltage matching will occur in both the
Check and Run modes and is verified only by the sync-check function in
Permissive mode.
Synch-check
The synch-check function is enabled when the Permissive mode is selected as
described earlier. The synch-check function determines when all conditions for
proper synchronization are satisfied and energizes the breaker closure relay.
The mains and bus voltage comparison is made if the voltage matching function
is enabled. The bus voltage must be within the specified voltage window before
the breaker closure command may be given.
Woodward 139
To minimize transients, the breaker must be closed when the phase difference
between the mains and bus is near zero. Due to delays in any interposing relays
and to the delay in closing the circuit breaker, the synchronizer may initiate the
breaker closing ahead of the zero phase point. The control uses slip frequency
and the specified breaker delay to predict breaker closure. The phase window
and slip frequency (and slip window) provide maximum and minimum conditions
on the prediction. When all conditions of voltage and phase are met, then the
breaker closure command is given.
Multiple Shot Reclosing

The multiple shot reclosing function allows multiple closing attempts. The EGCP-
3 provides a configuration for the number of close attempts and the reclose delay
timing. Failure to get closure after the specified number of attempts locks out the
synchronizer by setting it to the auto-off mode and; if the reclose alarm is
enabled, issuing an alarm. The synchronizer must then be reset by cycling the
auto mode switch to off and back to auto and/or by clearing the reclose alarm.
Setting the number of close attempts to one disables the multiple shot closing
function.
When the Permissive or Check modes are selected, the number of close
attempts is considered infinite.
Synchronizer Time Out

When in the Run mode, the synchronizer will attempt to synchronize and close
the breaker in the minimum time, as soon as all conditions are met. If the
synchronization process has not successfully closed the breaker within a time
equal to the Synchronizer Timeout value, the synchronizer will be latched into the
auto-off mode and; if the timeout alarm is enabled, issuing an alarm. The
synchronizer must then be reset by cycling the auto mode switch to off and back
to auto and/or by clearing the timeout alarm.
If the Synchronizer Timeout value is configured as zero, this timeout is disabled

and the synchronizer will continue to attempt synchronization indefinitely until
turned off. When the Permissive or Check modes are selected, the synchronizer
timeout is considered infinite. If a Synchronizer Time Out occurs, the EGCP-3 will
initiate a Synchronizer Time Out Alarm based on the Synchronizer Time Out
Alarm Action.
Phase Rotation Check

The EGCP-3 will automatically check for proper phase rotation between the
mains and bus inputs. If the phase rotation does not match, synchronization will
be halted and set to Auto-Off. A manual double-check of phase rotation may be
performed by observing the Negative Phase Sequence Voltage reported by the
EGCP-3. If the Negative Phase Sequence Voltage for the Mains and Bus are
both below 50% of rated voltage, the phase rotation check is considered passing.
Note that if either sensed bus is set to use single phase sensing, the phase
rotation check is not available.
140 Woodward
Synchronizer Time Line

The time line diagrams below illustrate a couple of timing sequences the
synchronizer function uses when operating. First is a successful closure on the
first attempt. Second is an unsuccessful closure where timeouts where
configured such that the second attempt would not complete before total
synchronizer timeout occurs.
Phase (Slip) & CB Hold Time

Voltage matched
Aux Feedback True,
Sync done
Phase and Voltage Matching
Synchronizer Timeout Period
Output Asserted
Breaker Close
De-Energized
Breaker Close Output
Start Synchronizing
CB Hold Time
Phase (Slip) &
Voltage matched Aux Feedback Stop
False Synchronizing
Sync Off
Phase and Voltage Matching Reclose Delay Period Phase and Voltage Matching
Synchronizer Timeout Period
De-Energized
Breaker Close Output
Output Asserted
Breaker Close
Start 2nd attempt
Sync Timeout Alarm

Start Synchronizing
Figure 10-1. Synchronizer Action Time-Line
Breaker/Contactor Control
The mains and group breaker outputs are configured independently of each
other. Either one or both may be configured as breakers or contactors. Open and
Close logic for each type is indicated below.
Woodward 141
In Breaker operation the EGCP-3 control has a pulsed output to the breaker
closing circuit, and a separate pulsed output to give an open command the
breaker shunt trip circuit. For Contactor type operation, a constant level close
command holds the contactor closed, this command is removed to open the
contactor.
Shunt Trip
When Breaker type logic is selected, two digital outputs will be used for breaker
operation. The shunt trip output is used to open the breaker. Mains shunt trip is
digital output 4 and can be configured for normally closed or normally open
operation. Group breaker shunt trip can be configured as any configurable digital
output, and set for normally closed or normally open operation.
When the EGCP-3 wishes to open a breaker (shunt trip), it will de-energize or
energize the output to the breaker shunt trip discrete output depending on
Normally Open or Normally Closed configuration.
Breaker/Contactor Closure
If the breaker closure conditions are met, the synchronizer will give a breaker
closure command for a time equal to the Breaker Hold Time configuration
setting. If breaker closure feedback (breaker auxiliary contact) is not received
within the Breaker Hold Time configuration setting, a failed close attempt
condition exists. The synchronizer will not attempt to close the breaker again for
a time equal to the Reclose Delay configuration. If the breaker closure feedback
signal is received, and then lost before the Reclose Delay time, this is also a
failed close attempt. If the number of failed close attempts is equal to the Close
Attempts configuration, the synchronizer is latched into the Auto-Off mode. A
Reclose Attempts Alarm will be issued according to the Reclose Attempts Alarm
Configuration. Also, if the total time to synchronize, including reclose attempts
and delays, exceeds the Synchronizer Time-Out Alarm configuration prior to the
reclose attempts expiring, the synchronizer will be latched into the Auto-Off
mode.
The user also has the ability to configure breaker or contactor logic for breaker
closure. This configuration may be set for each breaker (mains and group)
independently. When configured as a breaker the output is held on until an
auxiliary contact feedback is received or for the Breaker Hold Time
configuration—whichever is shorter. When configured as a contactor, the output
will be held on, as long as the auxiliary contact feedback is first sensed within the
Breaker Hold Time configuration. The output will also follow the auxiliary contact
input if the input indicates the contactor has opened.
142 Woodward
Chapter 11.
Real Load Control Description
Introduction
The Real Load Controller is the section of the MC that controls the real power
management of the system whenever any LS loadshare unit is parallel with the
mains. The MC controls the LS units by sending a load command (Lon In -
LOAD_CMD) to the LS units through the LON. The load command is a value
between 0 and 100 and is interpreted by the LS units as the percentage of their
rated load that they are to operate.
For example, if an MC sends a load command of 25 to two units on its active bus
segment that are rated at 100 kW (Unit 1) and 400kW (Unit 2) respectively. The
load command of 25 will be interpreted by unit 1 as a command to generate
25kW. Unit 2 will interpret the command as 100 kW.
The load command will be adjusted depending on the current operating

conditions and configurations, and because it has no interaction with
synchronizing functionality, will not be affected by any synchronizing efforts.
The MC’s load controller is a load command broadcaster and therefore does not
have any direct PID functionality. In order to control changes in the load
command the unit transitions to different set points by setting a target and then
using a configured ramp rate to increase or decrease to the that value. This
method insures bumpless transitions between load control modes.
The EGCP-3 MC has five modes of controlling the real power:

Internal BaseLoad
Manual
Remote Operation (Baseload, Process)
Process
Import/Export
Manual, BaseLoad and Remote Baseload operation will be discussed in this

chapter.
NOTE
All process methods will be discussed in Chapter 13. It should be noted that
when the load controller is in Process mode the ramping characteristics of
the load control are dictated by the process PID or the import/export
deadband controller and not by the load control ramp rates. Separate
process ramp rates are available for these modes of operation.
Woodward 143
Load and Unload Rates

The rates used by the load controller described in the next sections are different
depending on which method of control is being employed. In the Real Load
Control menu, there are four configuration set points used to develop the rates:
Load Time
Unload Time
Load Rate
Unload Rate
When the digital inputs Load Raise/Lower are asserted, the LOAD_CMD is
changed at a rate dictated by the load and unload rates. These rates are
configured as percent per second (%/sec) and will raise or lower the
LOAD_CMD towards 100 or 0, respectively, at these rates.
For all other changes to the LOAD_CMD the load and unload times are used.
The rate at which the LOAD_CMD is changed is dictated by the following
equations in %/sec:
InternalBaseLoad _ SetPo int

LoadRate =
LoadTime
InternalBaseLoad _ SetPo int
UnloadRate =
UnloadTime
Internal BaseLoad
BaseLoad operation is performed any time at least one LS unit is operating in
parallel with the mains and the Enable Process digital input is not asserted.
BaseLoad for the MC is a fixed load command (LOAD_CMD) sent over the LON
to all of the LS units. When Internal BaseLoad is active, the MC load control will
ramp the LOAD_CMD to the BaseLoad configuration setting using the Load or
Unload Time, whichever applies. In addition, the user also has the ability to stop
the ramp with the activation of the Load Raise/Lower switches or the Ramp
Pause switch. If the Load Raise/Lower switches are activated during a ramp, the
LOAD_CMD assumes the current load. If the Ramp Pause is removed, the ramp
will continue to the BaseLoad set point.
Once the load has reached the BaseLoad configuration setting, the user has the
ability to change the load reference using the Load Raise/Lower switches. When
these switches are activated, the load is ramped at the Load or Unload Rate,
whichever applies. When switching from any other mode to BaseLoad, the
BaseLoad configuration setting becomes the current load reference in order to
provide for a bumpless mode transfer.
Configuration Example
(WW Commands)
An operator wants the baseload set point in the plant to be 60.
Configure Internal BaseLoad Reference

(F Real Load Control – 01 Baseload Reference = 60)
144 Woodward
During operation the Load Raise/Lower switches have been used and the
operator wants to return to the internal baseload reference.
Assert the Reset Load digital input (or via MODBUS)

LOAD_CMD should return to 60
Manual
Manual operation can always be assumed by using the Load Raise/Lower
switches. When these switches are activated, the LOAD_CMD is ramped at the
Load or Unload Rate, whichever applies.
Remote BaseLoad
A Remote BaseLoad mode is a mode where the LOAD_CMD is determined by
an analog input. If an analog input is configured for BaseLoad Reference (First
Time Configuration menu), the analog input reference will automatically be used
in place of the internal BaseLoad setting. When switching from any other mode
to Remote BaseLoad Control mode, or if changes are made in Remote
BaseLoad Control, the LOAD_CMD is ramped to match the Remote BaseLoad
Reference (the analog input) using the Load or Unload Time, whichever applies.
In the Remote BaseLoad mode, the Speed/Load Raise/Lower panel switches will
also be available to raise or lower the reference. When these switches are
activated, the LOAD_CMD is ramped at the Load or Unload Rate, whichever
applies. In addition, the user also has the ability to stop the ramp with the
activation of the Ramp Pause switch.
NOTE
Remote Baseload is limited to high and low analog input calibration values of 0 and
100. The operator can configure the analog input for larger or smaller values but
the MC will limit the range. If the operator configures the analog input for larger
values the resolution will not be as accurate.
(WW Commands)
Using a 4-20mA analog input an operator wants to configure the MC to regulate

the BaseLoad set point between 50 and 80 depending on plant conditions. In
order to prevent damage to the generators controlled by the LS units a loading
ramp rate of 0.5%/second and an unloading ramp rate of 1.0%/second is
desired.
Set up analog input:

Configure Analog Input 1 for BaseLoad Reference (A# First Time Config
## - 41 Analog Input 1 Function = 1)
Configure Analog Input 1 for 4-20mA (Q Analog Inputs - 01 AI1 Type =
1)
Configure Low Calibration Value (Q Analog Inputs - 04 AI1 Low Cal
Value = 50)
Configure High Calibration Value (Q Analog Inputs - 05 AI1 High Cal
Value = 80)
Optional:
o Configure Label, High and Low Alarms and Pre Alarms
Woodward 145
Set up ramp rates based on Internal reference and load times

Configure Internal BaseLoad Reference (F Real Load Control – 01
Baseload Reference = 50)
Configure Load Time (F Real Load Control – 04 Load Time = 100)
Configure Unload Time (F Real Load Control – 05 Unload Time = 50)
Optional Load Functions

The functions described below are available when a discrete input is configured
for the function or a MODBUS command is given to affect the function. These
functions are operated in common with the reactive load functions by the same
name. The discrete inputs operate both simultaneously.
Reset Load
The Reset Load mode switch is used to reset the BaseLoad set point. When the
Reset Load mode switch is activated by DI, Modbus or ServLink/WW, and then
deactivated and the load control is in Internal BaseLoad control mode, the load
control will ramp the LOAD_CMD to the current internal reference (configuration
setting) using the Load or Unload Time. In addition, the user also has the ability
to stop the ramp with the activation of the Load Raise/Lower switches. If the
Load Raise/Lower switches are activated during a ramp the current load
becomes the load reference.
Ramp Pause
When the Ramp Pause mode switch is activated, by DI, Modbus or
ServLink/WW, the LOAD_CMD ramp will pause and hold the current load. When
the switch is opened again, the load ramp will continue to the present set point.
The Ramp Pause mode switch will not stop the LOAD_CMD from ramping if a
shutdown (Stop All Engines) is present.
Unload
If the Unload mode switch is activated, by DI, Modbus or ServLink/WW, while the
MC is in control of the LOAD_CMD, the LOAD_CMD will ramp to the Unload
Level configuration setting and remain there until the Unload mode switch is
deactivated.
146 Woodward
Chapter 12.
Reactive Load Control Description
Introduction
The VAR/PF (Volt Amp Reactive or Power Factor) controller adjusts the reactive
power component of the generators controlled by LS units in systems that are in
parallel with the mains. The controller compares either the reactive power on the
mains with a reactive power setpoint, or the PF on the mains with a PF set point,
and makes corrections to the PF command (PF_CMD) sent to the LON until the
desired reactive power is obtained. The VAR/PF mode is activated by closing a
digital input configured for Enable VAR/PF Control or by using the VAR/PF
AUTO ENABLE found in the Reactive Load Control configuration menu.
The VAR/PF controller is determined by the VAR/PF Mode selection in the
Reactive Load menu. Two methods of control are employed depending on the
mode of operation of the MC. All modes that do not involve Import/Export control
apply PI control action to the control of reactive power (derivative action is not
available in reactive power control). Import/Export control applies a deadband
controller because of the possibility of zero real power transfer across the mains,
which causes oscillatory PI control action because of the rapid change in actual
VAR/PF across the mains.
The EGCP-3 MC has six modes of controlling the reactive power:

• Manual
• VAR Control
• PF Control
• Remote Control (VAR, PF)
• Import/Export(VAR,PF)
• MODBUS(VAR,PF)
VAR/PF control by the master is always in Manual control unless the mode is
activated by closing a digital input configured for Enable VAR/PF Control or by
using the VAR/PF AUTO ENABLE. Another control stipulation is that the LS units
that the MC is controlling must have the VAR/PF enabled as well. When the PI or
deadband controllers generate a control action, this MC sends a PF_CMD over
the LON to the LS units. The LS units then take the value and adjust the voltage
bias sent to their individual voltage regulators.
NOTE
The LS units will only listen to the MC commands if their VAR/PF is enabled,
otherwise they will take no action.
WARNING
If the MC has VAR/PF control enabled and the LS units that it is controlling
are not VAR/PF enabled the PID may wind-up. If the LS units are then
VAR/PF control enabled the voltage may become oscillatory.
Woodward 147
Manual
To adjust the VAR/PF on the system in Manual mode the Voltage Raise/Lower
switches are used to change the PF_CMD sent over the LON. This mode will
work if the VAR/PF is enabled or disabled but will only adjust the PF reference
and not the VAR reference as shown on the PF/VAR status screen.
VAR Control
The VAR control adjusts the PF_CMD to maintain a set reactive power (VAR)
load on the mains throughout the kW operating range. A configuration setting is
provided to set the desired VARs. The VAR control function only will work when
VAR/PF control is enabled.
The VAR/PF control is in VAR Control when the load control mode is in
BaseLoad or Process (but not Import/Export), and the VAR control mode is
selected and enabled. When switching to this mode, the VAR control will ramp
the VAR reference to match the VAR configuration setting at a rate determined
by the Voltage Ramp Rate. The user has the ability to stop the ramp with the
activation of the Voltage Raise/Lower switches or the Ramp Pause switch. Once
the VAR load has reached the VAR configuration setting, the user has the ability
to change the VAR load reference using the Voltage Raise/Lower switches.
When these switches are activated, the VAR load reference is ramped at a rate
determined by the Voltage Ramp Rate.
The reference value is sent to the PI controller where it is compared to the actual
VAR load on the mains. Two configurables are available to control the response,
proportional gain and integral gain and can be adjusted to tune the performance
of the control. The PI controller will then send a PF_CMD between ±0.5 over the
LON to the LS units.
(WW Commands)
An operator wants to control his plant in baseload. The plant has a high motor
load so reactive power consumption is usually a problem. In order to avoid utility
penalties for reactive power consumption the operator would like to export 10
kVAR to the utility.
• Configure the MC for VAR Control (G Reactive Load Control – 01 VAR/PF

Mode = 1)
• Configure Internal VAR Reference (G Reactive Load Control – 08 KVAR
Reference = 10)
• Enable the VAR/PF Control
o Configure a Digital input for VAR/PF Enable and assert the DI
o OR Configure auto enable (G Reactive Load Control – 03
VAR/PF Auto Enable = TRUE)
• Additional adjustments that can improve performance
o VAR/PF Gain
o VAR/PF Integral Gain
o Voltage Ramp Time
148 Woodward
PF Control
The power factor (PF) control adjusts the PF_CMD to maintain a set PF on the
mains throughout the kW operating range. A configuration setting is provided to
set the desired PF. The PF control function only will work when VAR/PF control
is enabled.
The VAR/PF control is in PF Control when the load control mode is in BaseLoad
or Process (Import/Export PF and VAR control is found in a later section), and
the PF control mode is selected and enabled. When switching to this mode, the
PF control will ramp the PF reference to the Power Factor configuration setting at
a rate determined by the Voltage Ramp Time. The user has the ability to stop the
ramp with the activation of the Voltage Raise/Lower switches or the Ramp Pause
switch. Once the Power Factor has reached the Power Factor configuration
setting, the user has the ability to change the Power Factor reference using the
Voltage Raise/Lower switches. When these switches are activated, the PF load
reference is ramped at a rate determined by the Voltage Ramp Rate. The
reference value is sent to the PI controller where it is compared to the actual PF
on the mains. The actual PF has a deadband to prevent excessive control. The
three configurables that are available to control the response; proportional gain,
integral gain and deadband can be adjusted to tune the performance of the
control. The PI controller will then send a PF_CMD between ±0.5 over the LON
to the LS units.
(WW Commands)
An operator wants to control his plant in process. The plant has a high motor
load so reactive power consumption is usually a problem. In order to avoid utility
penalties for reactive power consumption the operator would like to keep the PF
on the mains at 0.95 leading which means that the utility is still supplying reactive
power to the plant but the operator is in control of the consumption from the
utility.
• Configure the MC for PF Control (G Reactive Load Control – 01 VAR/PF

Mode = 3)
• Configure Internal PF Reference to 0.95 LEAD (G Reactive Load Control –
10 PF Reference = -0.05)
• Configure PF Deadband (G Reactive Load Control – 13 PF Deadband =
0.02)
o VAR/PF Gain
o VAR/PF Integral Gain
o Voltage Ramp Time
Remote Control
When the remote control mode is selected, the PF or VAR reference level is
determined by an analog input. Remote Control with analog inputs works the
same way as the above control methods. The analog input becomes the
reference value; the Voltage Ramp Rate is used for all raise and lower
adjustments; and the reference value and actual value are used by the PI control
to develop a PF_CMD that is sent to the LON.
Woodward 149
To use a Remote VAR/PF reference an Analog Input must be set to either VAR
reference or PF reference. The VAR/PF mode must also be set to Remote
control. The analog input high and low calibration values must also be set up but
will have different values depending on which configuration is used.
For PF control the MC limits the input into the reference to ± 50. This value would
correspond to a reference of 0.5 LEAD to 0.5 LAG. For example, if the operator
would like to set up the analog input to control PF on the mains between
0.9LEAD (4mA) to 0.9LAG (20mA) the high and low calibration would become ±
10.
For VAR control the MC limits the input to ± Rated Mains VAR. The input should
be calibrated to the VAR values that are desired. The MC will then use this
number to create a percentage of rated VAR that is then sent to the PI control.
For example, if the operator would like to set up the analog input to control VAR
on the mains between –100 and 500kVAR, where the rated mains VAR level was
1000kVAR, the high and low calibration would become –100 and 500.
(WW Commands)
Set up an analog input that will regulate the VARs at the mains to between –
2000 to 1000kVAR. The rated mains VAR is 2500kVAR.
• Configure the MC for Remote Control (G Reactive Load Control – 01

VAR/PF Mode = 4)
• Configure Rated Mains VAR (A# First Time Config ## - 22 Rated Mains
VAR = 2500)
• Configure Analog Input 1 to VAR Reference (A# First Time Config ## - 41
Analog Input 1 Function = 6)
• Configure Analog Input 1 for 4-20mA (Q Analog Inputs - 01 AI1 Type = 1)
• Configure Low Calibration Value (Q Analog Inputs - 04 AI1 Low Cal Value =
-2000)
• Configure High Calibration Value (Q Analog Inputs - 05 AI1 High Cal Value
= 1000)
• Optional:
Set up an analog input that will regulate the PF at the mains to between
0.95LEAD to 0.80LAG.
• Configure the MC for Remote Control (G Reactive Load Control – 01

VAR/PF Mode = 4)
• Configure Analog Input 1 to PF Reference (A# First Time Config ## - 41
Analog Input 1 Function = 5)
- 5)
= 20)
150 Woodward
• Optional:
Import/Export VAR/PF Control

Import/Export VAR/PF control acts differently then all of the above modes
because of the probability of having zero real power transfer across the mains
breaker causing the sensed PF to swing leading and lagging in very short
periods of time. In order to prevent these oscillatory effects a deadband controller
is in place that controls the PF_CMD accurately. The deadband controller
compares the reference and the actual VAR/PF. If the actual value is higher than
the reference plus the deadband the control will lower the PF_CMD. If the actual
value is lower than the reference plus the deadband the control will raise the
PF_CMD. By instituting the deadband inadvertent, unnecessary control is
eliminated. Import/Export Control is configured in the Process control section of
the MC but is added here because it also can adjust the VAR/PF of the system
(WW Commands)
An operator wants to control his plant in Import/Export. He only wants to
purchase power from the utility in an emergency but wants to remain in parallel in
case one of the generators fails. The operator also wants to export VAR to
stabilize the voltage on the distribution line but wants to keep this in the range of
0.95LAG.
• Configure the MC for Import\Export (H Process Control – 01 Process Mode

= FALSE)
• Enable Process Control
• Configure Import/Export KW Reference to 0.0 (H Process Control – 16
IMPEXP KW LVL = 0.0)
• Configure Import/Export PF Reference to 0.95 LAG (H Process Control – 17
IMPEXP PF LVL = 0.05)
o Voltage Ramp Time
Modbus (VAR, PF)

VAR/PF control can also be accomplished via MODBUS. The configuration of
the MODBUS is similar to the Remote Control setup except for a few slight
configuration changes. Instead of using Remote Control Mode the normal
VAR/PF mode is needed. Via MODBUS the PF reference can have a value
between –500 and 500, which corresponds to –0.5LEAD to 0.5LAG. The VAR
reference however works by the same method described in the Remote Control
section. One difference between MODBUS and Remote Control is the need for
MODBUS-BW – 15 to be True. This BW works similarly to the Enable VAR/PF
digital input bus is for MODBUS. See the following example for a configuration
setup.
Woodward 151
(WW Commands)
Set up MODBUS to regulate the PF at the mains to between 0.95LEAD to
0.80LAG.
• Configure the MC for PF Control (G Reactive Load Control – 01 VAR/PF

Mode = 3)
• Enable the VAR/PF Control of MODBUS
o MODBUS BW – 15 = TRUE (1)
• Set up MODBUS AW to values between –50 and 200.
Optional Reactive Load Functions

The functions described below are available when a discrete input is configured
for the function or a MODBUS command is given to affect the function. These
functions are operated in common with the real load functions by the same
name. The discrete inputs operate both simultaneously.
Ramp Pause
When the Ramp Pause mode switch is activated, by DI, Modbus or
ServLink/WW, the LOAD_CMD ramp will pause and hold the current load. When
the switch is opened again, the load ramp will continue to the present set point.
The Ramp Pause mode switch will not stop the LOAD_CMD from ramping if a
shutdown (Stop All Engines) is present.
Reset VAR/PF Reference

The Reset VAR/PF reference is only available in MODBUS – BW 15. This
variable will enable or reset(if cycled) the configured VAR/PF set point to the
MODBUS value. In order to reset by the front panel or by Watch Window, the
Enable VAR/PF DI or the AUTO ENABLE configurable must be cycled. The MC
will then resume control and ramp to the new internal setpoint value. This will
hold true for Import/Export and all other PI controlled VAR/PF set points.
152 Woodward
Chapter 13.
Process Control Description
Introduction
Process control is a method by which the EGCP-3 MC will vary the LOAD_CMD
and/or PF_CMD sent to the LS units in order to increase or decrease a
measured parameter (temperature, pressure, kW, etc) that is being analyzed by
the MC. The two methods of performing this operation are by Process or
Import/Export. Process control is typically a method of controlling temperature or
pressure in a thermodynamic process, but is not limited to these two variables.
Import/Export control is a method of controlling the real and reactive power being
consumed by a plant through the mains breaker.
Process control is enabled when the Enable Process Control digital input is
asserted. The mode of control is configured in the Process control menu as
Temperature/Pressure or Import/Export. When the process control is enabled,
the error signal between the process reference and process signal is input to a
PID controller. The output of the process controller is a load reference to the
Real Load Controller, which then generates a LOAD_CMD to the LS units.
The Temperature/Pressure process control function is flexible enough to control

any process where the controlled parameter can be monitored as an analog
input signal. It can be configured as direct or indirect acting, depending on the
process input increasing value with a power increase (direct), or increasing value
with a power decrease (indirect); the process reference may be either an internal
reference or the analog remote process reference input.
For the Import/Export process control function the controlled parameter is the
Mains Watt, PF or VAR levels. The MC applies configured or remote reference
values and the actual power on the mains to the PID controller, which then
generates a reference for the Real Load Controller.
When the process control is enabled, the process controller will ramp the
process reference until the Process Input matches Process Reference at the
Load or Unload Rate, whichever applies. When the process reference is the
internal configured value, the user has the ability to change the set point using
the Load Raise/Lower switches. When these switches are activated, the process
reference is ramped at the Load or Unload Rate, whichever applies. If a remote
reference or Modbus reference is used, the Raise/Lower load switches will also
be available. When switching from any other load control mode to Process
Control, the current load becomes the new process reference, and the reference
begins ramping from that point. This provides for a bumpless mode transfer.
Woodward 153
Temperature/Pressure
Temperature/Pressure process control derives its feedback signal (process
input) from an analog input. The analog input limits for this operation can be
configured for any values because the MC will normalize these values before
using the input in the PID. The reference value for the PID can be derived from
two locations; the internal configurable or an analog input reference. Before
these values are sent to the PID, they are scaled by the high and low limits of the
feedback signal (process input). Care must be taken to select a reference value
that will be within the calibrated limits of the process input or the PID will ramp to
its limits and not control correctly.
The process action (First Time Config menu) can also be selected for Direct or
Indirect control. If the control is configured for Direct control a positive error
between the reference and the input will increase the PID output and therefore
increase the LOAD_CMD sent to the LS units. If configured for indirect action a
positive error will decrease the PID output and the LOAD_CMD sent to the LS
units. Another method of visualizing the control action is illustrated in the
following figure:
Indirect Control Direct Control

20 mA
20 mA
Process Input
Process Input
4 mA 4 mA
0 100 0 100
Load Command Load Command
Figure 13-1. Indirect and direct process control action
For indirect action, an increase in load command will decrease the process input.
For direct action, an increase in load command will increase the process input. A
configuration example for each type of control action is shown below.
Configuration Example – Configure the MC for Direct Action

(WW Commands)
A plant has a thermodynamic process where temperature control is very
important. If the temperature drops below the rated temperature the generated
power in the plant needs to be increased. The temperature can range from 180
and 200 °C and needs to be controlled at 190. The MC receives a 4-20mA input
from a temperature sensor. Configure the MC for this action.
154 Woodward
• Configure the MC for Direct Action (A# First Time Config ## - 39 Process
Action = True)
• Enable Process Control – Assert the process control digital input
• Configure Analog Input 1 for Process Control Input (A# First Time Config ##
- 41 Analog Input 1 Function = 3)
• Configure the MC for Process (Temperature/Pressure) (H Process Control –
01 Process Mode = True)
180)
= 200)
• Configure Process Reference (H Process Control – 09 Process Reference =
190)
• Optional:
o Configure Label, High and Low Alarms and Pre Alarms for
Analog Input 1
o Configure Process High and Low Level Alarms
o Configure Droop, Filter and Deadband for Process Control
Configuration Example – Configure the MC for Indirect Action

(WW Commands)
A plant has a thermodynamic process where pressure control is very important. If
the pressure is too high, the generated power in the plant needs to be
decreased. The pressure can range from 100 to 200 psi, and needs to be
controlled at different pressures depending on an external reference ranging
from 120 to 170 psi. The MC receives a 1-5V input from a pressure sensor and a
4-20mA input from the reference sensor. Configure the MC for this action.
• Configure the MC for Indirect Action (A# First Time Config ## - 39 Process
Action = False)
• Configure Analog Input 1 for Process Control Input (A# First Time Config ##
- 41 Analog Input 1 Function = 3)
• Configure Analog Input 2 for Process Reference (A# First Time Config ## -
43 Analog Input 2 Function = 4)
• Configure the MC for Process (Temperature/Pressure) (H Process Control –
01 Process Mode = True)
• Configure Analog Input 1 for 1-5 V (Q Analog Inputs - 01 AI1 Type = 2)
• Configure Analog Input 1 Low Calibration Value (Q Analog Inputs - 04 AI1
Low Cal Value = 100)
• Configure Analog Input 1 High Calibration Value (Q Analog Inputs - 05 AI1
High Cal Value = 200)
• Configure Analog Input 2 for 4-20 mA (Q Analog Inputs - 20 AI2 Type = 1)
• Configure Analog Input 1 Low Calibration Value (Q Analog Inputs - 23 AI2
Low Cal Value = 120)
• Configure Analog Input 1 High Calibration Value (Q Analog Inputs - 24 AI2
High Cal Value = 170)
• Optional:
Analog Input 1
Analog Input 2
o Configure Process High and Low Level Alarms
o Configure Droop, Filter and Deadband for Process Control
Woodward 155
Import/Export
Import/Export is a special case of process control. Instead of using analog inputs
for the process control input, the MC uses the power sensed through the mains
breaker. The objective of Import/Export is to control the real and reactive load
being consumed by a plant from the utility. This section will describe the
operation of Import/Export control for real power. Reactive Import/
Export control descriptions are detailed in the Reactive Load Control Description,
Chapter 12.
For Import/Export control the MC uses a configured or remote kW reference and

the actual real power at the mains as inputs into the process control PID. If the
plant load increases the internal generation is increased in order to maintain a
constant power import or export from/to the utility. The following example will
detail configuration setup.
(WW Commands)
A plant wants to minimize utility bills but still wants to remain parallel with
the mains for reliability reasons. A contract with the utility is made which
stays that the plant can parallel with the utility as long as the plant
maintains 500kW consumption. The daily plant load is usually 2MW and the
remaining 1.5MW can be serviced by the three 600kW generators in the
plant. Set the MC up for Import/Export control.
• Configure the MC for Direct Action (A# First Time Config ## - 39 Process
Action = True)
• Configure the MC for Import/Export (H Process Control – 01 Process Mode
= False)
• Configure Import/Export Reference (H Process Control – 16 IMPEXP KW
Level = 1.5)
NOTE
Import/Export control should not be set up as an indirect process, direct
action is the standard method of configuring this type of control.
Modbus
Process control can also be accomplished via Modbus. Over Modbus the
Process or Import/Export references can be configured. The operation is
the same as the above two configurations only the Modbus reference will
be used.
Optional Process Functions

The functions described below are available when the process mode is active.
They are optional because a discrete input must be configured for the function or
a MODBUS or ServLink/WW command must be given to affect the function.
156 Woodward
Reset Load
When the Reset Load mode switch is closed and then opened, the process
control will ramp the process reference to the original internal reference
(configuration setting) at the Load or Unload Rate. This function will not work with
a Remote reference. In addition, the user also has the ability to stop the ramp
with the activation of the Load Raise/Lower switches. If the Load Raise/Lower
switches are activated during a ramp, the current level becomes the process
reference.
Ramp Pause
The Ramp Pause Load mode switch is used to pause an internal process control
ramp. When the Ramp Pause mode switch is closed the process reference ramp
will pause and hold the current process level until the switch is opened again.
When the switch is opened again, the process ramp will continue where it left off.
The Ramp Pause mode switch will not stop the process reference from ramping
if a shutdown is present.
In addition, the user also has the ability to stop the ramp with the activation of the
Load Raise/Lower switches. If the Load Raise/Lower switches are activated
during a ramp the current load becomes the load reference, and the reference
will ramp in up or down respectively. This is used to manually assume a new
reference, where the pause would be used to hold a load to allow system
stabilization, then move to the configured reference.
Unload
If the Unload mode switch is activated, by DI, Modbus or ServLink/WW, while the
MC is in control of the LOAD_CMD, the LOAD_CMD will ramp to the Unload
Level configuration setting and remain there until the Unload mode switch is
deactivated.
The Unload configuration setting can be automatically overridden. The Unload

configuration setting is considered the larger of the Process Low Limit and the
Unload Trip configuration settings when evaluated from the perspective of the
load controller.
Droop Control
Process Droop can be added to any process mode. The droop amount is
configurable in percent of the process range up to 50%. The process reference
will be decreased proportional to the generator load. This is typically only used in
temperature/pressure control but there are no restrictions on its use. It is added
to the otherwise isochronous control already in place. The Droop will add an
element of stability to the process control loop by limiting large load variations for
small process variations.
Woodward 157
Filter
The process being controlled will react to load changes quickly or slowly. The
process controller includes an adjustable filter to adjust the process control rate
of response. The filter is a low pass filter where the frequency is adjustable.
Higher frequency settings result in faster control response, but also more
response to process noise. In systems experiencing rapid fluctuations in the
process input signal (such as digester gas fuel pressure maintenance), reducing
the Process Control Filter setpoint and increasing the Process Deadband will
reduce control sensitivity to the fluctuations. This allows for slower, but more
stable, performance. When the input reacts very slowly to load change a lower
frequency setpoint is needed so as not to over-compensate.
Deadband
The process controller includes an adjustable deadband above and below the
input signal. The deadband is useful in both noisy applications as well as for very
slow processes. When the process input is within a deadband amount of the
previous measurement (one rate group ago), no active adjustment will be made.
For example, if Temperature/Pressure process is enabled with a deadband of
10°C, the process sensor input is 200°C, and the temperature sensed moves to
207°C, no adjustment will be made because the level sensed is within the
deadband, the controller will continue to base its output on 200° input. If the next
sample measures 212° the process will react and use 212° as a comparison to
the reference.
Process Action
The process control function is configurable for direct and inverse action. Direct
process control is where the sensed input signal increases as the load increases
(such as where the sensed input is exhaust pressure or export power). An
inverse action control is where the sensed input signal decreases as the load
increases (such as when controlling import power where the import power will
decrease as the generating system picks up more of the local load).
158 Woodward
Chapter 14.
Sequencing
Introduction
MC sequencing is very different then that found in the LS. There are no
sequencing configurables available. The MC has two methods of
starting/stopping LS units; Start/Stop All or Start/Stop Request.
Start/Stop All is a command sent to the LON to all LS units that are
START/STOP READY, which means that the LS units have their LON IN –
Start/Stop Ready bit TRUE. When this command is issued, all units will be told to
start and synchronize to the bus.
Start/Stop Request is a command sent to the LON to all SL units that are
START/STOP NODES, which means that the LS units have their LON IN –
Start/Stop Ready bit TRUE and their Run Time Manager (LON IN –
SS_ARB_ALG) is not disabled (greater than zero). When this command is
issued, the LS units on the bus will arbitrate between themselves and start/stop
only the next unit to be started/stopped.
Start/Stop All commands are issued for every MC start except for a Load
Demand Start/Stop. For a Load demand Start/Stop the Start/Stop Request will be
used, which only starts a single unit at a time. The following list will explain the
terms used in sequencing:
Start Nodes: LS nodes that have their Start Ready bit TRUE and their
SS_ARB_ALG is greater than zero.
Start Ready: LS nodes that have their Start Ready bit TRUE.
Stop Nodes: LS nodes that have their Stop Ready bit TRUE and their
Stop Ready: LS nodes that have their Stop Ready bit TRUE.
Start All: Command issued by the MC to start all LS units that are
START READY. This command will start all LS units
even if Lon Sequencing is disabled or the Run Time
Manager is disabled.
Stop All: Command issued by the MC to stop all LS units that are
STOP READY. This command will stop all LS units even
if Lon Sequencing is disabled or the Run Time Manager
is disabled.
Start Request: Command issued by the MC to start one of the LS units
that is a START NODE. This command will not start an
LS unit if Lon Sequencing is disabled or if the Run Time
Stop Request: Command issued by the MC to stop one of the LS units
that is a STOP NODE. This command will not stop an
LS unit if Lon Sequencing is disabled or if the Run Time
Woodward 159
Chapter 15.
LON (Local Network) Description
Introduction
This section describes the messaging between LS and MC units over the
Echelon Network (LON). The LON will allow multiple units to share load, control
processes and sequence the starting and stopping of units.
The EGCP-3 LON is capable of working with multiple bus segments all
connected on the same LON link. In the EGCP-3 implementation, the LON
segments are always joined and the messaging indicates which genset is in
which segment and which tie breakers are closed. Up to four separate buses are
supported. The four buses may be isolated buses, mains feeds, or a combination
of the two. Although many networks can be created, the below diagram is a
single representation used to facilitate explanation. A network may contain up to
16 nodes (MC and LS together) and up to 4 bus segments. In the below diagram,
the bus segments are identified with a capital letter A-D. The gensets (LS units)
are identified with a number 1-8 which would also represent the node number on
LON for this example. The bus segment tiebreakers are identified with a letter w-
z simply to set them apart from the gensets.
The LON block has inputs from the application that inform it as to which segment
it resides on and which other segments are currently tied to the same segment
by closed tie-breakers. The tie-breaker status information is indicated by a
discrete input on any LS or MC configured to indicate a specific tie-breaker
position.
The application determines the active bus segment by observing which tie-
breakers are closed, considering if it is an LS at generator or an MC at the
mains, and considering its own configured bus segment location. The application
asserts each of the four discrete inputs to the LON block related to the active
bus. For example, if the active bus is segments A, B, and D, those three inputs to
the LON block will be asserted but the C input will not be asserted.
A B C D
w x y
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
LS LS LS LS LS LS LS LS
GS GS GS GS GS GS GS GS
Figure 15-1. LON Bus Configuration
160 Woodward
If the system also has mains connections, it may be modified as below. The
diagram shows only 2 mains connections but it is technically feasible to have one
on each segment for a total of 4. The initial release of the EGCP-3 MC will only
be able to support two mains connections. The MC units on the LON still have a
node number within the range of 1-16.
MC MC
16 15
A B C D
w x y
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
LS LS LS LS LS LS LS LS
GS GS GS GS GS GS GS GS
Figure 15-2. LON Bus Configuration, with Mains Tie(s)
Dead Bus Closing

Using the bus segment information and tie-breaker status to define the active
bus segment, the LON block will perform dead bus arbitration with all other
nodes that identify themselves on LON as participating in that active bus
segment.
The algorithm uses a special LON message where each node that sees a
deadbus and wishes to close to that bus requests permission to close. All units
designated as on a common segment must declare the segment to be a deadbus
before any unit will be allowed to close it’s breaker onto the deadbus. The units
on the active bus segment will then decide which unit will be granted permission
to close onto the deadbus. Once a single node has been granted permission to
close, it will attempt to close by signaling its application that it is OK to close. If
the unit is not able to close the breaker/contactor because of a timeout or reclose
alarm, the unit will release its request to close to the deadbus. All units that are
still requesting to close to the deadbus will then arbitrate the permissions again.
This function is performed between units on the active bus segment only. The
active segment will depend on which tiebreakers are closed. The active bus is at
least the single segment on which a unit resides, but may be more than one
segment if tiebreakers are closed to other segments.
Woodward 161
Real Load Sharing

This function is performed between LS controls on the same active bus segment
only. The block uses the same four discrete inputs described in the above
section to determine which segments to share load with. The LON block will
determine which nodes are part of the active bus segment and perform all
calculations necessary to provide the application with the average load value.
The application is responsible for using the average load information and its
actual load to bias the speed output thus changing the power output.
The LON block will be informed, via the application, if it is to participate in the
load sharing. There are times when an LS unit will desire not to participate in
load sharing. In this instance, the LS unit will remove its Loadshare bit and will
run at its internal setting, an example of this is if the unit has its BaseLoad digital
input asserted. There are also times when a master may indicate that it is in
control of the slave node. In this case, the LON block is to inform the application
that it is now under the control of a master. LON will pass the master’s requested
load to the application for use in biasing the LS units speed output.
A Speed Trim feature is activated with the Load Sharing mode. The error
between generator frequency and system frequency will be added to the speed
bias. The application is responsible for performing the speed trim and does not
need the assistance of the LON block.
Power Factor sharing

This function is performed between slaves on the same active bus segment only.
The block uses the same four discrete inputs described in the above section to
determine which segments to PF share. The LON block will determine which
nodes are part of the active bus segment and perform all calculations necessary
to provide the application with the average PF value. The application is
responsible for using the average PF information and its actual PF to bias the
voltage output thus changing the power factor.
The LON block will be informed, via the application, if it is to participate in the PF
sharing. There are times when the application will wish the LON block not to
participate in PF sharing so that it may use another method (like BaseLoad mode
or when the mains are connected). There are also times when a master may
indicate that it is in control of the slave node. In this case, the LON block is to
inform the application that it is now under the control of a master. It will pass the
master’s requested PF to the application for use in biasing the voltage output.
Master Load / Process / PF Control

This function is performed between a master and its slaves on the same active
bus segment only. The block uses the same four discrete inputs described in the
above section to determine which master is in control. The master tells the LON
block what load level and PF level it is requesting and asserts the Master in
Control bit to indicate that it wishes to control the slaves. The slave LON block
will simply report the percent load and PF values requested to the LS units. The
LS units will then use the values to adjust their speed and voltage bias.
Run Time Manager

This function is only available in the LS units and is detailed in the LS manual.
162 Woodward
Networked Start/Stop
The EGCP-3 MC can determine when there is a need to start and stop LS units
on a bus and communicates this over the LON network. The decision to
start/stop units will be due to mains demand, time of day, mains failure,
automatic or manual request. This feature is detailed in Chapter 14, Sequencing.
Woodward 163
Chapter 16.
Demand Control Description
Introduction
Many plants do not have a constant load profile. The load in the plant varies
depending on time of day, time of year and even type of process or equipment
being used. Sometimes it is cheaper for a plant to generate internal power during
times of high demand. To do this an operator would need to initiate a start of the
units in the plant based on time of day or local demand. In order to automate this
operation the MC has a peaking and demand feature. The demand operation can
operate based on demand level of the plant through the mains or at specific
configurable times of day.
Peaking and Demand control is configured in the Peaking Menu of the MC.
The demand feature of the MC has four modes of operation based on time of day
or imported demand level:
1. Off
2. Time of Day
3. Load Demand Level
4. Time and Load Demand
The type of start/stop that the MC will initiate will depend on the type of control
configured. Time of Day starts issue a Start All command; Load Demand starts
issue a Start Request (Start One) command.
The current demand level is derived using the mains demand (in VA) of all MC’s
on the active bus segment. The total demand is then filtered with the Demand
Coefficient. Filtering is used to remove inadvertent load spikes that could cause
unwanted starts. The low pass filter is shown below:
1
Demand = * Total _ Mains _ Load (VA)
1 + s(τ )
A better visual tool is to look at a bode diagram of the filter and its cutoff
frequency. Figure 16-1 shows the bode diagram of the filter with varying time
coefficients. By varying the time coefficient the response of the demand will
become slower. Figure 16-2 illustrates the effect of the filter on the demand. If
the demand coefficient is small then the demand almost matches the actual load
profile. By increasing the filter time coefficient more frequencies are filtered and
the slower the response to a change in load.
The demand feature also remembers the maximum demand value of the mains
for the MC and for all mains on the active bus segment. The MC demand
monitored is the demand value for the mains connection to this MC. The Total
Demand is the demand monitored by all of the MC’s on the active bus segment
added together. Only the highest demand level is remembered. The Time and
Date at which the maximum event occurred will also be retained. This feature is
always active as long as the Peak Shaving Mode is configured for a mode other
than OFF.
164 Woodward
Both the MC and the Total Demand Maximum value can be reset (to zero) by
using the front panel display and selecting the Reset Demand options. The reset
can also be performed through Watch Window. When resetting from the front
panel display, a technician level password is required.
Figure 16-1. Bode Diagram of Three Filters
Figure 16-2. Demand Filter with Different Time Coefficients
Off
MC will not perform any peaking or time of day operation.
Woodward 165
Time of Day
Time of Day mode starts and loads the LS unit(s) using the Time of Day
controller. There is no delay on starting or stopping the genset – the programmed
times are used as is. The method of control is dictated by how the unit is
configured for ATS. If ATS is Off the LS units will be paralleled to the mains and
the load will be controlled by either Process or BaseLoad control depending on
the mode that is configured. If ATS is configured for Open Transition, the MC will
initiate an Initiate ATS OT start. If ATS is configured for Closed Transition, the
MC will initiate an Initiate ATS CT start. These modes of operation are detailed in
Chapter 17.
The Time of Day controller contains four separate programs with two start and
duration times for each program. Only one program can be configured per day of
the week. A simple program is shown below:
(WW Commands)
A rolling mill has a high demand on Tuesday and Thursday when additional
motors are used to satisfy the rolling process. During this time, it is cheaper for
the plant to supply some of the additional load with its available gensets at the
plant. The operator wants to automate these starts and uses the MC to do so. On
Tuesday, the demand begins at 09:30 and runs for 3.5 hours. On Thursday, the
demand has two different peaks, one at 08:00 for 1.25 hours and another at
14:15 and both run for 4 hours. The operator would like to run all units at 90%
load during these times. Configure the MC to perform this function.
• Configure the MC for Time of Day Operation

(J Peaking – 01 Peak Shaving Mode = 2 = Time of Day)
• Configure the MC for ATS Off
(I Transfer Switch – 01 ATS Mode = 1 = Off)
• Configure the BaseLoad Setpoint
(F Real Load Control – 01 BaseLoad Reference = 90)
• Set Program 1 for Tuesday
(J Peaking – 14 Tuesday Program = 1)
• Set Program 2 for Thursday
(J Peaking – 16 Thursday Program = 2)
• Configure the two programs
Configurable Set Value

Program 1 Start 1 Hour 9
Program 1 Start 1 Minute 30
Program 1 Stop 1 Hour 13
Program 1 Stop 1 Minute 0
Program 1 Start 2 Hour 12 *Default Value
Program 1 Start 2 Minute 0 *Default Value
Program 1 Stop 2 Hour 12 *Default Value (Will Not Start Units)
Program 1 Stop 2 Minute 0 *Default Value (Will Not Start Units)

166 Woodward
Load Demand
In the Load Demand Only mode, the Demand Dispatcher will start and load the
genset according to the demand level settings. The dispatcher watches the
mains demand level of all MC’s on the active bus segment and compares it
against the Time Delayed Demand Start Level and Immediate Demand Level set
points. If the demand level exceeds the Time Delayed Demand Start Level but
not the Instantaneous Demand Level set point, the dispatcher will wait the Load
Demand Time Delay set point prior to starting, synchronizing, and loading the
next LS unit. If the Demand Level drops below the Time Delayed Demand Start
Level before the Load Demand Time Delay, the timer will be reset. However, if
the demand level exceeds the Instantaneous Demand Level set point, the
dispatcher will immediately start, synchronize, and load the next LS unit. The
instantaneous demand condition is considered latched until the LS unit is on-line.
The LS units will be controlled in BaseLoad (recommended use) or Process
(**see below note **), whichever mode is configured.
When the demand level drops below the Time Delayed Demand Stop Level set
point, the dispatcher will wait the Load Demand Time Delay set point and then
unload and stop the next LS unit.
An example of how the load demand feature works is illustrated in Figure 16-2.
NOTE
It is not recommended to use the Process load control mode with the Load
Demand mode. In process control a fixed load is maintained through the
mains breaker, so the process is fixing the demand level in place. If this load
level is above the Demand Stop level, the unit will run continuously. If set
below the Demand Stop level the Demand Stop will become active and the
unit may be cycled on and off the bus without any change in the plant load.
Time Delayed
Stop Level
Imported KVA
Mains Demand
(Imported VA)
Time Delayed
Start Level
Immediate Demand
Start Level
Time
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5
Figure 16-3. Demand Profile with Start and Stop Levels
Woodward 167
Figure 16-3 illustrates an example of a demand curve with configured Start and
Stop levels. At time T1 the demand has crossed the time delayed start level but
no control is currently taking place. At T2 the demand becomes larger than the
time delayed start level and the Load Demand Time Delay begins to count down.
When the time delay expires the next available LS units is started. The demand
continues to increase even after the LS is online so the time delay begins again.
Before the delay expires, the demand reaches the Immediate demand level (T3).
The next LS unit is started immediately. When the second unit comes online, the
demand timer starts again, but before it expires, the level falls below the time
delayed start level. At this time, the timer shuts off. At T4 the demand increases
above the time delayed start level and the timer is started. The delay expires and
a third LS is told to start and come online. Now that three units are online the
demand level begins to decline. Plant load also decreases at this time so that the
demand falls below the time delayed stop time and the time delay is initiated
(T5). The next available LS unit is stopped when the timer expires. Eventually all
LS units are stopped because of insufficient demand. A typical configuration
example is shown below.
(WW Commands)
An industrial manufacturer has a cyclic demand depending on the type of
process operating at certain times of day. The plant operator wishes to use the
MC to perform peaking operation when the plant is at certain demand levels. The
plant load can vary tremendously and in order to save maintenance costs on the
gensets only a large prolonged demand should call for a demand start. To
accomplish this a decision is made to place the demand coefficient for the filter at
120. The stop level will be set at 1.5MW and the start and immediate start levels
are to be placed at 5MW and 6MW respectfully. The start and stop time delay is
3 minutes. Configure the MC to perform this function.
• Configure the MC for Load Demand Operation (J Peaking – 01 Peak

Shaving Mode = 3 = Load Demand Only)
• Configure the Load Demand Time Delay (J Peaking – 06 Load Dmd Time
Delay = 180)
• Configure the Demand Coefficient (J Peaking – 11 Demand Coefficient =
120)
• Configure the Time Delayed Stop Level (J Peaking – 05 Time Delayed Dmd
Stop = 1.5)
• Configure the Time Delayed Start Level (J Peaking – 04 Time Delayed Dmd
Start = 5.0)
• Configure the Immediate Start Level (J Peaking – 03 Immediate Dmd Start
= 6.0)
Load Demand and Time

In the Load Demand and Time mode, the Demand Dispatcher will start and load
the LS units according to the Time/Day of Week control with a Demand override.
All functions of the Demand Mode (described above) still apply simultaneous with
all functions of the Time Mode. Either one may start the LS units. In order to stop
the LS units, however, both must agree. In other words, the time schedule must
indicate the LS’s should be off AND the demand level must be below the Time
Delayed Demand Stop Level set point in order to stop a LS unit.
168 Woodward
Chapter 17.
Automatic Transfer Switch Description
Introduction
The Automatic Transfer Switch functions in the EGCP-3 MC are intended to
operate similarly to a traditional ATS but also have several different modes of
operation. Some applications use a mechanically locked ATS rather than
breakers; the EGCP-3 will also be capable of controlling this typical transfer
switch rather than a pair of breakers. The physical signals from the EGCP-3 are
identical in either case.
The MC can be configured to automatically detect when Mains voltage becomes

unstable or disappears and an Open transition ATS will be initiated. When
returning from a LOM the configured ATS return mode will occur.
Timers will be provided to allow the EGCP-3 to ignore momentary disturbances.

A delay timer is provided for open transition mode to control the open time. All
features of the synchronizer will be utilized for closed transition applications. The
protective relay alarms for the mains input are the normal means of declaring a
loss of mains but discrete inputs may also be used.
The ATS controller may be configured for Off, Open or Closed transition. When
open transition is selected, the ATS controller will never close the mains breaker
and generator simultaneously. However, it should be noted that this configuration
setting only affects the ATS controller and will not inhibit a mains parallel action
by other means. It is up to the user to configure the entire EGCP-3 MC properly if
mains parallel is not desired at any time.
Loss of Mains Definition

A Loss of Mains may be declared for a number of reasons as listed below.
• A user defined spare fault input that is configured for Loss of Mains action is
asserted.
• Mains Under Frequency condition (this requires a Mains Under Frequency
alarm and/or pre-alarm to be configured for LOM action).
• Mains Under Voltage condition (this requires a Mains Under Voltage alarm
and/or pre-alarm to be configured for LOM action).
• Mains Negative Phase Sequence Over Voltage condition (this requires a
Mains Negative Phase Sequence Over Voltage alarm and/or pre-alarm to be
configured for LOM action).
• Mains Negative Phase Sequence Over Current condition (this requires a
Mains Negative Phase Sequence Over Current alarm and/or pre-alarm to be
configured for LOM action).
• Load Surge condition (this requires a Load Surge alarm and/or pre-alarm to
be configured for LOM action).
Any function that can be configured for loss of mains action can be configured for
either LOM or LOM with Alarms. When selecting LOM w/ Alarms, an audible
alarm will be instigated and the alarm is posted in the alarm logs.
Woodward 169
Once the LOM condition is detected and declared by the protective relay
function, discrete input, or load surge condition, a LOM action delay timer is
started. Once this timer has expired, if the condition still exists, the configured
LOM action will be performed. LOM has two methods of initiation, Open Mains
First or Start Genset First. This option is configurable in the Transfer Switch
menu in Watch Window.
If the control is configured for Open Mains First, or no group breaker is

configured, the mains breaker will be opened upon the expiration of the LOM
action delay timer. Once the mains has been opened the MC will send a signal to
the LS units to start and close onto the dead bus. The action is exactly as the OT
Test ATS described below.
If the control is configured for Start Genset First and there is a group breaker
configured the LS units will be started first upon the expiration of the LOM action delay
timer. The LOM will then transition through an OT ATS Start as described below.
The return from a loss of mains will follow whichever transition is configured. If
ATS is configured for OFF or CT the transition will parallel the gensets to the
mains and then unload and shutdown the units. If the ATS is configured for OT,
an OT return will be followed.
ATS Initialization
The ATS function in the EGCP-3 MC can be initiated by several methods.
Besides the open transition and closed transition, a number of other
configurables and variables can affect the operation of the transfer. The modes
of operation of the ATS in the EGCP-3 MC are detailed below.
There are three methods of entering an ATS mode in the MC.
Test ATS: Enabled by asserting the Auto and Test contacts or by

similar action over Modbus or ServLink
Initiate ATS: Enabled by asserting the Auto, Test and Run contacts or
by similar action over Modbus or ServLink
Run w/Load to ATS: Enabled by asserting the Test contact while in Run
w/Load mode or similar action over Modbus or ServLink
ATS Configurables and Variables

There are also several configurables and variables that can effect the operation
of ATS.
Load Shed DO: Enable the loadshed algorithm.
Start Nodes: LS nodes that have their Start Ready bit TRUE and their
Start Ready: LS nodes that have their Start Ready bit TRUE.
Stop Nodes: LS nodes that have their Stop Ready bit TRUE and their
Stop Ready: LS nodes that have their Stop Ready bit TRUE.
170 Woodward
Start All: Command issued by the MC to start all LS units that are
START READY. This command will start all LS units
even if Lon Sequencing is disabled or the Run Time
Stop All: Command issued by the MC to stop all LS units that are
STOP READY. This command will stop all LS units even
if Lon Sequencing is disabled or the Run Time Manager
is disabled.
Transfer Capacity: Makes sure that the capacity of the system will match
the load on the bus. If RWL-ATS is initiated the transfer
time cannot be guaranteed. If no group breaker is
configured then the transfer capacity is automatically set
to zero.
WARNING
If no group breaker is configured for the system it is recommended that the
Transfer Capacity and Transfer Capacity Units be set at their minimum
values.
Online Capacity: Total Capacity of units on the active bus segment with
their breaker closed.
Fast Transfer Time: Dictates the time for a transition to occur. Transfer will
not occur before this delay has occurred. If the fast
transfer time is less than 5 seconds the ATS will not wait
for zero power transfer across the breaker.
Zero Power Xfer: Zero power transfer (ZPT) window is only configurable in
debug and is set at 5. If the units of the PTCT_ATL block
are in KW then the zero power transfer will be set true
when the mains breaker sees less than 5KW across its
breaker. This test is an absolute so that plus or minus
5KW will be ZPT.
Zero Power Xfer

Deadband: This is the deadband around the zero power xfer where
the breaker will be opened. It is in mains power units. If
the mains is in kW and the deadband is configured for 5
then ZPT will be assumed if less than 5kW is flowing
through the mains.
Group Breaker: Configuring a group breaker in the system is the only

way to guarantee transfer times. Without a group
breaker, the ATS cannot guarantee fast transfer times
because of LS syncronization times.
LoadShare (LS): EGCP-3 Load Share Unit
CT Load Rate: Closed Transition load rate. This rate is calculated by

taking a sample of the load needed to create ZPT when
ATS is initiated. This load is then divided by the Fast
Transfer Delay Time to create a ramp rate. During a
closed transition the load ramp has a calculated setpoint
and the ramp rate. If the ramp reaches the setpoint or
ZPT occurs the ramp is turned off.
Woodward 171
CT Unload Rate: Closed Transition unload rate. This rate is calculated by

taking a sample of the system load when the mains
breaker is closed. This load is then divided by the Fast
Transfer Delay Time to create a ramp rate. During the
closed transition return the load ramp has a setpoint of 0
and the ramp rate dictates the speed that the ramp is
decreasing. If the ramp reaches 0 the ramp is turned off.
Open Transition
Test ATS with Group Breaker:

The open transition Test ATS function behaves similarly to a Loss of Mains
(LOM) action. When Auto and Test are instigated, the MC recognizes a Test ATS
condition and opens the Mains Breaker. Once there is confirmation from the
mains breaker aux of the mains being opened the MC will initiate a Start All
Engines signal. The LS units that are Start Ready will then start and synchronize
onto the bus. Based on the Transfer capacity and the Online capacity the MC
will make a decision on group breaker closure.
Breaker Options:
1. If the Online capacity is greater than the Transfer capacity, the
group breaker will be closed onto the load.
2. If the Online capacity is less than the Transfer capacity, the
control will then look to see if there are any Start Ready nodes
on the network. If the Start Ready nodes are greater than zero
and the Start All command has been issued for longer than 240
seconds (configurable in debug –
LON_ALLST.ALLST_DLY.DLY_TIME) and no Load shed DO’s
have been configured the MC will issue a Auto Start Sequence
alarm.
3. If the Online capacity is less than the Transfer capacity, and
the control has a configured Load shed DO the MC will wait for
100 seconds (configurable in debug –
XFER_CAP.LS_DELAY.DLY_TIME) and then close the group
breaker. If the generation capacity is unable to support the online
load a Load shed DO will be triggered. If all loads have been
shed the MC will wait an additional load shed delay time and
then issue an Auto Start Sequence Alarm. Simultaneously the
MC will exit the ATS mode by opening the Group Breaker and
issuing a Stop All to the LS’s which are Stop Ready. Once the
group breaker has been opened, the Fast Transfer Delay Time
will be initiated. At the end of the delay time, the mains will be
closed onto the deadbus.
172 Woodward
Test ATS without Group Breaker:
The open transition Test ATS without a group breaker function behaves similarly
to a Loss of Mains (LOM) action. When Auto and Test are instigated, the MC
recognizes a Test ATS condition and opens the Mains Breaker. Once there is
confirmation of the mains being opened, the MC will initiate a Start All Engines
signal. All LS units that are Start Ready will start and synchronize to the bus.
Breaker Options:
1. If the LS’s are able to support the load that is on the bus no
action will be taken.
2. If the Start Ready nodes are greater than zero and the Start All
command has been issued for longer than 240 seconds
(configurable in debug – LON_ALLST.ALLST_DLY.DLY_TIME)
and no Load shed DO’s have been configured the MC will issue
a Auto Start Sequence alarm.
3. If Load Shed DO’s are configured and the above option occurs
then the Auto Start Sequence alarm will not be issued unless
all Load Shed DO’s have been used. If this occurs an Auto
Start Sequence alarm will be issued and the MC will exit the
ATS mode by issuing a Stop All to the LS’s which are Stop
Ready. Once the MC receives confirmation that no LS’s are still
on the bus the Fast Transfer Delay Time will be initiated. At the
end of the delay time, the mains will be closed onto the deadbus.
Initiate ATS with Group Breaker:

Initiate ATS open transition will behave in a normal ATS manner. When Auto,
Test and Run are instigated, the MC recognizes an Initiate ATS condition and
sends a Start All command to the LS’s. All LS units that are Start Ready will
start and synchronize to the bus. The breaker options are as follows:
Breaker Options:
1. If the Online capacity is greater than the Transfer capacity the
MC will open the Mains Breaker, and begin the Fast Transfer
Delay Time. When the Fast Transfer Delay Time has expired
the Group Breaker will be closed.
2. If the Online capacity is less than the Transfer capacity the
and a Load shed DO is configured the MC will wait for 100
seconds (configurable in debug –
XFER_CAP.LS_DELAY.DLY_TIME) and then open the Mains
Breaker. When confirmation of the mains breaker being opened
has occurred the Fast Transfer Delay Time is initiated. When
the delay has expired, the Group Breaker will be closed. If the
generators cannot support the load, the loadshed algorithm will
be initiated. If all loads have been shed the MC will wait an
additional load shed delay time and then issue a Auto Start
Sequence Alarm and exit the ATS mode by opening the Group
Breaker and issuing a Stop All command to the LS’s which are
Stop Ready.
3. If the Online capacity is less than the Transfer capacity and no
Load Shed DO’s are configured, the control will then look to see
if there are any Start Ready nodes on the network. If the Start
Ready nodes are greater than zero and the Start All command
has been issued for longer than 240 seconds (configurable in
debug – LON_ALLST.ALLST_DLY.DLY_TIME) the MC will issue
an Auto Start Sequence alarm.
Woodward 173
Initiate ATS without Group Breaker:

Open Transition Initiate ATS without a group breaker will behave exactly like
Open transition Test ATS.
Closed Transition
Test ATS with Group Breaker
The closed transition Test ATS function in the MC will attempt to create a zero
power transfer across the mains breaker. When Auto and Test are instigated, the
MC recognizes a Test ATS condition and initiates a Start All command. All LS
units that are Start Ready will start and synchronize to the bus. The breaker
options are as follows.
Breaker Options:
1. If the Online capacity is greater than the Transfer capacity the MC will
close the Group Breaker, and begin the Fast Transfer Delay Time.
i. If the Fast Transfer Delay Time expires and ZPT has

been reached, the Mains Breaker will be opened.
ii. If the Fast Transfer Delay Time is configured for less
than 5 seconds, and expires, the Mains Breaker will be
opened even if ZPT has not been reached.
iii. If the Fast Transfer Delay Time is configured for more
than 5 seconds and has expired and there are no Load
Shed DO’s configured the Mains Breaker will remain
closed until ZPT has been reached. If ZPT is never
reached then the LS’s will remain in parallel with the
mains.
iv. If the Fast Transfer Delay Time is configured for more
than 5 seconds and has expired and there are Load
Shed DO’s configured and ZPT has not been reached
the MC will initiate the load shed. If ZPT is never
reached and all loads have been shed a High Load
Limit alarm will be issued and the MC will exit the ATS
mode by opening the Group Breaker and issuing a
Stop All command to the LS’s.
2. If the Online capacity is less than the Transfer capacity, and the
control has a configured Load shed DO the MC will wait for 100
seconds (configurable in debug – XFER_CAP.LS_DELAY.DLY_TIME)
and then close the Group Breaker and begin the Fast Transfer Delay
Time.

than 5 seconds, and has expired, the Mains Breaker
will be opened even if ZPT has not been reached.
than 5 seconds, and has expired, the MC will initiate the
load shed. The Mains Breaker will remain closed until
ZPT has been reached. If ZPT is never reached and all
loads have been shed a High Load Limit alarm will be
issued and the MC will exit the ATS mode by opening
the Group Breaker and issuing a Stop All command to
the LS’s.
174 Woodward
3. If the Online capacity is less than the Transfer capacity and no Load
Shed DO’s are configured, the control will then look to see if there are
any Start Ready nodes on the network. If the Start Ready nodes are
greater than zero and the Start All command has been issued for longer
than 240 seconds (configurable in debug –
LON_ALLST.ALLST_DLY.DLY_TIME) the MC will issue an Auto Start
Sequence alarm. The Group Breaker will not be closed and no
transition will take place.
Test ATS without Group Breaker

The closed transition Test ATS without a group breaker function in the MC will
attempt to create a zero power transfer across the mains breaker. Without a
group breaker the transfer capacity is automatically set to zero. When Auto and
Test are instigated, the MC recognizes a Test ATS condition and initiates a Start
All command. After one LS unit has started and has synchronized to the bus, the
MC has several options depending on configuration.
Breaker Options:
1. When an LS unit has closed onto the bus, the MC will begin the Fast
Transfer Delay Time.
will remain closed until ZPT has been reached. If ZPT is
never reached then the LS’s will remain in parallel with
the mains.
than 5 seconds and has expired and there are
configured Load shed DO’s the MC will initiate the load
shed algorithm.
1. If a load is shed and ZPT is reached then the
Mains Breaker will be opened
2. If all loads have been shed the MC will wait an
additional load shed delay time then issue a
High Load Limit Alarm. If ZPT is not reached
when the delay time has expired, the Mains
Breaker will remain closed and the MC will exit
the ATS mode by issuing a Stop All command
to the LS’s which are Stop Ready.
Woodward 175
Initiate ATS with Group Breaker

Initiate ATS closed transition will behave in a normal ATS manner. When Auto,
Test and Run are instigated, the MC recognizes an Initiate ATS condition and
sends a Start All command to the LS’s. All LS’s that are Start Ready will start
and synchronize to the bus. The breaker options are as follows:
Breaker Options:
close the Group Breaker, and begin the Fast Transfer Delay Time.

than 5 seconds, and expires, the Mains Breaker will be
opened even if ZPT has not been reached.
than 5 seconds and has expired and there are no
configured Load shed DO’s the Mains Breaker will be
opened even if ZPT has not been reached
shed algorithm.
a. If a load is shed and ZPT is reached
then the Mains Breaker will be opened
b. If all loads have been shed the MC will
wait an additional load shed delay time
then issue a High Load Limit Alarm. If
ZPT is not reached when the delay time
has expired the Mains Breaker will
remain closed and the MC will exit the
ATS mode by opening the Group
Breaker and issuing a Stop All
command to the LS’s which are Stop
Ready.
2. If the Online capacity is less than the Transfer capacity and a Load
shed DO is configured and a 100 second (configurable in debug –
XFER_CAP.LS_DELAY.DLY_TIME) delay has expired the MC will close
the Group Breaker and begin the Fast Transfer Delay Time.

than 5 seconds, and has expired, the MC will initiate the
loadshed algorithm.
176 Woodward
Ready.
LON_ALLST.ALLST_DLY.DLY_TIME) the MC will issue a Auto Start
Sequence alarm. The Group Breaker will not be closed and no
transition will take place.
Initiate ATS without Group Breaker

Initiate ATS closed transition will behave in a normal ATS manner. Without a
group breaker the transfer capacity is automatically set to zero. When Auto, Test
and Run are instigated, the MC recognizes an Initiate ATS condition and sends a
Start All command to the LS’s. All LS’s that are Start Ready will start. When the
first LS unit synchronizes to the bus the MC has several options depending on
configuration.
Breaker Options:
1. When an LS unit has closed onto the bus, the MC will begin the Fast
Transfer Delay Time.
a. If the Fast Transfer Delay Time expires and ZPT has been
reached, the Mains Breaker will be opened.
b. If the Fast Transfer Delay Time is configured for less than 5
seconds, and has expired, the Mains Breaker will be opened
even if ZPT has not been reached.
c. If the Fast Transfer Delay Time is configured for more than 5
seconds and has expired and there are no configured Load
shed DO’s the Mains Breaker will be opened even if ZPT has
not been reached
d. If the Fast Transfer Delay Time is configured for more than 5
seconds and has expired and there are configured Load shed
DO’s the MC will initiate the load shed algorithm.
i. If a load is shed and ZPT is reached then the Mains
Breaker will be opened
ii. If all loads have been shed the MC will wait an additional
load shed delay time then issue a High Load Limit
Alarm. If ZPT is not reached when the delay time has
expired, the Mains Breaker will remain closed and the
MC will exit the ATS mode by issuing a Stop All
command to the LS’s which are Stop Ready.
Woodward 177
Run w/Load to ATS with Group Breaker

Run w/ Load to ATS is started by initially being parallel with the mains and
asserting Test. This situation creates an Initiate ATS mode in the MC. Since a
Start All command is always occurring during Run w/ Load, the command will
not be reissued, but all alarms associated with Initiate ATS will now become
active. The breaker options are as follows depending on configuration.
Breaker Options:
begin the Fast Transfer Delay Time.
been reached the Mains Breaker will be opened.
than 5 seconds the Mains Breaker will be opened even
if ZPT has not been reached.
than 5 seconds and has expired and there are no
configured Load shed DO’s the Mains Breaker will be
opened even if ZPT has not been reached
shed algorithm.
Ready.
2. If the Online capacity is less than the Transfer capacity and a Load
shed DO is configured and a 100 second (configurable in debug –
XFER_CAP.LS_DELAY.DLY_TIME) delay has expired the MC will begin
the Fast Transfer Delay Time.
been reached the Mains Breaker will be opened.
than 5 seconds the Mains Breaker will be opened even
if ZPT has not been reached.
than 5 seconds and has expired the MC will initiate the
loadshed algorithm.
178 Woodward
Ready.
LON_ALLST.ALLST_DLY.DLY_TIME) the MC will issue a Auto Start
Sequence alarm. The LS’s will remain in parallel with the mains unless
the alarm is configured for Stop All Engines.
Run w/Load to ATS without Group Breaker

Run w/ Load to ATS without a Group Breaker is started by initially being parallel
with the mains and asserting Test. This situation creates an Initiate ATS mode in
the MC. Without a group breaker the transfer capacity is automatically set to
zero. Since a Start All command is always occurring during Run w/ Load, the
command will not be reissued, but all alarms associated with Initiate ATS will
now become active. The breaker options are as follows depending on
configuration.
Breaker Options:
1. The MC will begin the Fast Transfer Delay Time.
a. If the Fast Transfer Delay Time expires and ZPT has been
reached the Mains Breaker will be opened.
b. If the Fast Transfer Delay Time is configured for less than 5
seconds the Mains Breaker will be opened even if ZPT has not
been reached.
c. If the Fast Transfer Delay Time is configured for more than 5
seconds and has expired and there are no configured Load
shed DO’s the Mains Breaker will be opened even if ZPT has
not been reached
d. If the Fast Transfer Delay Time is configured for more than 5
seconds and has expired and there are configured Load shed
DO’s the MC will initiate the load shed algorithm.
i. If a load is shed and ZPT is reached then the Mains
Breaker will be opened
ii. If all loads have been shed the MC will wait an additional
load shed delay time then issue a High Load Limit
Alarm. If ZPT is not reached when the delay time has
expired the Mains Breaker will remain closed and the
MC will exit the ATS mode by issuing a Stop All
command to the LS’s which are Stop Ready.
Woodward 179
Graphical Representations
Open Transition Loss of Mains Start and Return
LS units begin Bus Stable

synchronizing Mains Stable Delay
Delay
to the bus
Units still
Fast Transfer
LOM Action synchronizing
Delay
Delay to bus
Mains in Spec Genset Mains in use

On Load
Initiate Start All
Open Mains Breaker
LOM*
Open Group Breaker

Breaker Closes
reached, Group
Transfer Capacity
Close Mains Breaker,

Mains returns
Initiate Stop All

*Any alarm condition configured for
LOM or LOM w/ Alarms
Closed Transition Loss of Mains Start and Return
LS units begin Bus Stable

synchronizing Mains Stable Delay
Delay
to the bus
LOM Action Fast Transfer
Units still Delay
Delay synchronizing
to bus
Mains in Spec Genset Soft Mains in use
On Load Unload
Breaker Closes
reached, Group
Transfer Capacity
Initiate Start All
Open Mains Breaker
LOM*
Close Mains Breaker
Open Group Breaker,

Mains returns
Synchronize and
Initiate Stop All
*Any alarm condition configured for

LOM or LOM w/ Alarms
180 Woodward
Open Transition Start and Return (Initiate ATS)
Units still
synchronizing to bus
Bus Stable Delay
LS units begin Fast Transfer Fast Transfer

synchronizing Delay Delay
to the bus
Mains in Spec Genset Mains in use

On Load
Open Group Breaker

Initiate Start All
Initiate OT ATS,
Close Mains Breaker,

Close Group Breaker
Transfer Capacity
Breaker Opened
reached, Mains
Stop ATS
Initiate Stop All

Initiated
Closed Transition Start and Return (Initiate ATS)
Units still
synchronizing to bus
Bus Stable Delay
Fast Transfer
LS units begin Delay Fast Transfer
synchronizing Delay
to the bus
Mains in Spec Soft Load Genset Soft Mains in use

Ramp On Load Close Mains Breaker Unload
Initiate Start All
Initiate CT ATS,
Open Group Breaker,

Transfer Capacity
ZPT reached, Open

reached, Group
Breaker Closed
Synchronize and
Stop ATS
Initiate Stop All

Mains Breaker
Initiated
Woodward 181
Load Shed Operation

Load shed operation will take effect in two modes; ATS and Isolated operation
and these modes will operate differently. Isolated operation load shed will
operate on low frequency and low voltage pre-alarms, ATS operation load shed
will operate if zero power transfer does not occur. The following sections will
describe operation and configuration.
NOTE
The load shed digital outputs are not latched outputs. When the conditions
for a load shed are no longer present the digital outputs will deactivate.
Isolated Operation
Load shed in isolated operation can occur if the system has just completed an
open transition, a loss of mains, or any time that the LS units are isolated from
the mains and the load on the bus cannot be supported by the LS units gensets.
The load shed algorithm is initiated by configuring a digital output for load shed.
The triggers for load shedding are the Bus Under Frequency Pre-Alarm and the
Bus Under Voltage Pre-Alarm. Other factors that affect operation are the Under
Frequency Pre-Alarm Delay, the Mains Breaker Status and the Group Breaker or
LS unit status.
To configure a load shed in isolated operation the Pre-Alarms must be set for
either Audible or Visual alarm status. To trigger the load shed the mains breaker
must be open, there must be at least one LS unit online and the group breaker (if
configured) must be closed.
Three load sheds are available and are triggered as follows:
Load Shed 1: Either pre-alarm becomes active (Under Voltage or

Under Frequency)
Load Shed 2: Load Shed 1 has been triggered and both pre-alarms
are active. This triggers the under frequency pre-alarm delay. When
the delay expires load shed 2 is triggered.
Load Shed 3: Load shed 2 has been triggered. This triggers

another under frequency pre-alarm delay. When the delay expires
load shed 3 is triggered.
(WW Commands)
An operator wants to shed load if the generators in his system cannot support
load during a loss of mains situation. Speed is necessary for power quality
reasons so the non-essential loads will be shed if voltage becomes 460V or
frequency becomes 58.5 Hz. Three load sheds will be configured to act every 0.5
seconds if the conditions persist.
• Configure the MC for the three load sheds (C# Digital Outputs ## – 15
Digital Output 10 = 21)
(C# Digital Outputs ## – 17 Digital Output 11 = 22)
(C# Digital Outputs ## – 19 Digital Output 12 = 23)
• Configure the Under Voltage Pre-Alarm for Audible (B Bus Protection – 07
Bus Volt Lo Pre-Alm= 4)
• Configure the Under Frequency Pre-Alarm for Audible (B Bus Protection –
28 Bus Freq Lo Pre-Alm= 4)
• Configure the Under Voltage Pre-Alarm Level (B Bus Protection – 09 Bus
Volt Lo Pre-Alm Lvl= 460)
182 Woodward
• Configure the Under Frequency Pre-Alarm Level (B Bus Protection – 30 Bus
Freq Lo Pre-Alm Lvl= 58.5)
• Configure the Under Frequency Pre-Alarm Delay (B Bus Protection – 34
Bus Freq Lo Pre-Alm Dly= 0.5)
ATS Operation
Load shed in ATS operation can be triggered by only configuring a digital output for
load shed operation. Most of the load shed logic is found in the previous sections in
this chapter but the triggers are as follows:
Load Shed 1: The ATS logic triggers load shed action
Load Shed 2: Load Shed 1 has been triggered and the ATS load
shed logic is still active. This triggers the under frequency pre-alarm
delay. When the delay expires load shed 2 is triggered.
Load Shed 3: Load shed 2 has been triggered. This triggers

another under frequency pre-alarm delay. When the delay expires
load shed 3 is triggered.
Woodward 183
Chapter 18.
LS-MC Mains Parallel Application
Unit 16
Load
EGCP-3 Breakers
MC
Bus A Load
Unit 2 Unit 1
EGCP-3 EGCP-3
LS LS
GS GS
In a Multiple Unit Mains Parallel Application, a EGCP-3 MC is will sequence

gensets, synchronize the Mains (breaker 16) to the local bus (A) and control
import/export of power with the mains by controlling genset/bus power through
the LS units.
The MASTER EGCP-3 control shall be capable of:

• Control Auto Start Sequencing of LS units based upon system load levels
and accumulated unit run times.
• Synchronize Bus generators to the Utility, and close the utility breaker.
• Soft Load Bus generators to and from the utility
• Open the utility breaker in the event of a loss of utility, or during an open
transition return to utility power.
• Control the Bus Generators in BaseLoad Control Mode
• Control the Bus Generators in Process Control Mode
• Control the Bus Generators in Import Export Control Mode
• Control the bus Generators in PF or KVAR control mode (relative to the
utility feed)
• Control the bus generators in a Fixed PF control mode (PF BaseLoad)
• The local display and HMI will:
Provide V, A, W, KVA, KVAR, PF information for single or three Mains
phase configuration.
Provide Mains Total VA, VAR, and W information
Provide Bus and Breaker Status Information, i.e. Stopped, Isoch,
BaseLoad, etc.
Provide dynamic adjustment of relative control loops (load, synch,
PF/VAR)
Provide calibration of analog I/O
Provide LON network information
Number of units on the network
Number of units on load
Next unit start sequence
Next unit stop sequence
184 Woodward
The EGCP-3 LS slave control shall perform the following functions:
• Start the genset(s), and placing the generator on load (dead bus closing or
active synchronization) upon receipt of the appropriate input commands.
• Operate in Isochronous Loadsharing Control (A, B, C, D Bus, or Combined,
depending upon configuration and status of the Mains tie breaker).
• Genset Cooldown when a set KVA load level is exceeded.
• Ramp to master controlled load upon closure of the tie breaker.
• Operate in BaseLoad Control
• Operate in Process Load Control
• Operate in PF sharing control (load sharing mode only)
• Operate in PF Control (BaseLoad or process mode only)
• Operate in KVAR Control (BaseLoad or process mode only)
• Voltage Trim (isoch operation only)
• Frequency Trim (isoch operation only)
• Remove the generator from load (open gen breaker) upon shutdown signal
i.e., either from discrete input or internally generated shutdown condition.
• Engine stop
Provide V, A, W, KVA, KVAR, PF information for single or three phase
configuration.
Provide Engine Speed, Oil Pressure, Coolant Temp, Battery (supply)
voltage, kW-hours, accumulated engine run time (hours), and
Service hours information.
Provide Engine and Generator Status Information, i.e. Running,
Stopped, Isoch, BaseLoad, etc.
PF/VAR)
Woodward 185
Chapter 19.
LS-MC Mains Parallel ATS Application
Load
Unit 16
Breakers
EGCP-3
MC
A Group
Breaker Load
Unit 2 Unit 1
EGCP-3 EGCP-3
LS LS
GS GS
In a Multiple Unit Mains Parallel Application, a EGCP-3 MC is required to

sequence, synchronize and control import/export of power with the mains
(breaker 16). With the addition of the bus tie breaker (w) the MC control is
capable of ATS operation.

• Perform Open and Closed Transition ATS functions with 100msec overlap
capability
• Monitor the capacity of engines on load to close group breaker (w) for
isolated load.
utility feed)
configuration.
Provide Total VA, VAR, and W information
Provide system load and system PF averages
Provide Bus and Breaker Status Information, i.e. Stopped, Isoch,
BaseLoad, etc.
186 Woodward
PF/VAR)
The EGCP-3 slave control shall be capable of:

depending upon configuration and status of the group and Mains Tie
breaker).
• Provide Auto Sequencing based upon system load levels and accumulated
unit run times.
• Engine stop
configuration.
PF/VAR)
Woodward 187
Chapter 20.
LS-MC Mains Parallel,
Split Bus Application
Unit 16 Unit 15
EGCP-3 SPM-D EGCP-3
MC MC
Load Tie W
Load
Breakers Breakers
Bus A Bus B
Load Load
Unit 1 Unit 2 Unit 3 Unit 4

EGCP-3 EGCP-3 EGCP-3 EGCP-3
LS LS LS LS
GS GS GS GS
A Multiple Unit, Mains Parallel, Split bus Application would use EGCP-3 LS, and
MC control with a SPM-D synchronizer. Each bus is capable of isolated or mains
parallel operation. Both local bus’ can also be tied together.

• Perform Open and Closed Transition ATS functions with 100msec overlap
capability
utility feed)
• Provide Auto Sequencing based upon system load levels and accumulated
unit run times.
configuration.
Provide Total VA, VAR, and W information
188 Woodward
Provide bus and breaker Status Information, i.e. Running, Stopped,
Isoch, BaseLoad, etc.
Provide Unit Sequencing Status Information
Provide system load and system PF averages
PF/VAR)
The EGCP-3 slave control shall be capable of:

depending upon configuration and status of the tie breaker).
• Engine stop
configuration.
PF/VAR)
The SPM-D shall can perform the following functions:

• Synchronize Bus “A” to Bus “B”, or vice Versa
• Dead bus closing to Bus “A” or Bus “B”
Woodward 189
Chapter 21.
Acronyms
Abbreviation Definition
A/D Analog to Digital Converter
AI Analog Input
AO Analog Output
Atlas Woodward turbine control platform
AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator
CAN Controller Area Network
The Code generator, used to convert GAP output files into
Coder
executable code.
Control EGCP-3 Control System
CPU Central Processing Unit.
Distributed Generation (Connected to mains and operated
DG
by utility)
DI Discrete Input (Contact Input)
DO Discrete Output (Relay Driver Output)
DR Distributed Resource EGCP-3 (May be connected to mains)
DSLC Digital Synchronizer and Load Controller
DSP Digital Signal Processing
EGCP Engine Generator Control Panel
EPS Emergency Power System
EU Engineering Unit (psi, KW, ºC, etc.)
FFT Fast Fourier Transform
FW Firmware (embedded software)
Graphical Applications Programmer used to create
GAP
application programs.
HW Hardware
Input/Output, typically the interface to field devices such as
I/O
switches, transducers, meters, controls, or actuators.
The time delay from when an interrupt is generated in
Interrupt Latency hardware until the processor has started the user interrupt
service code.
ISLU Isochronous Load Sharing Unit
LON Echelon Network (Load Sharing, Sequence Communication
LS Load Sharing EGCP-3 (Multiple Unit parallel)
MC Master Control EGCP-3 (Sequence and monitoring)
MOP Motor Operated Potentiometer
MSLC Master Synchronizer and Load Controller
PI Proportional, Integral controller
PID Proportional, Integral, Derivative controller
Rate Group Recursion rate assigned to each GAP Block.
RTD Resistive Temperature Device.
SPM-D Woodward Digital Synchronizer
SUMP Single Unit Mains Parallel
SW Software
TC Thermocouple
THD Total Harmonic Distortion
190 Woodward
Chapter 22.
Service Options
Product Service Options

The following factory options are available for servicing Woodward equipment,
based on the standard Woodward Product and Service Warranty (5-01-1205)
that is in effect at the time the product is purchased from Woodward or the
service is performed:
• Replacement/Exchange (24-hour service)
• Flat Rate Repair
• Flat Rate Remanufacture
If you are experiencing problems with installation or unsatisfactory performance

of an installed system, the following options are available:
• Consult the troubleshooting guide in the manual.
• Contact Woodward technical assistance (see “How to Contact Woodward”
later in this chapter) and discuss your problem. In most cases, your problem
can be resolved over the phone. If not, you can select which course of
action you wish to pursue based on the available services listed in this
section.
Replacement/Exchange
Replacement/Exchange is a premium program designed for the user who is in
need of immediate service. It allows you to request and receive a like-new
replacement unit in minimum time (usually within 24 hours of the request),
providing a suitable unit is available at the time of the request, thereby
minimizing costly downtime. This is also a flat rate structured program and
includes the full standard Woodward product warranty (Woodward Product and
Service Warranty 5-01-1205).
This option allows you to call in the event of an unexpected outage, or in

advance of a scheduled outage, to request a replacement control unit. If the unit
is available at the time of the call, it can usually be shipped out within 24 hours.
You replace your field control unit with the like-new replacement and return the
field unit to the Woodward facility as explained below (see “Returning Equipment
for Repair” later in this chapter).
Charges for the Replacement/Exchange service are based on a flat rate plus
shipping expenses. You are invoiced the flat rate replacement/exchange charge
plus a core charge at the time the replacement unit is shipped. If the core (field
unit) is returned to Woodward within 60 days, Woodward will issue a credit for
the core charge. [The core charge is the average difference between the flat rate
replacement/exchange charge and the current list price of a new unit.]
Return Shipment Authorization Label. To ensure prompt receipt of the core,

and avoid additional charges, the package must be properly marked. A return
authorization label is included with every Replacement/Exchange unit that leaves
Woodward. The core should be repackaged and the return authorization label
affixed to the outside of the package. Without the authorization label, receipt of
the returned core could be delayed and cause additional charges to be applied.
Woodward 191
Flat Rate Repair

Flat Rate Repair is available for the majority of standard products in the field.
This program offers you repair service for your products with the advantage of
knowing in advance what the cost will be. All repair work carries the standard
Woodward service warranty (Woodward Product and Service Warranty
5-01-1205) on replaced parts and labor.
Flat Rate Remanufacture

Flat Rate Remanufacture is very similar to the Flat Rate Repair option with the
exception that the unit will be returned to you in “like-new” condition and carry
with it the full standard Woodward product warranty (Woodward Product and
Service Warranty 5-01-1205). This option is applicable to mechanical products
only.
Returning Equipment for Repair

If a control (or any part of an electronic control) is to be returned to Woodward for
repair, please contact Woodward in advance to obtain a Return Authorization
Number. When shipping the item(s), attach a tag with the following information:
• name and location where the control is installed;
• name and phone number of contact person;
• complete Woodward part number(s) and serial number(s);
• description of the problem;
• instructions describing the desired type of repair.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to electronic components caused by improper handling,
read and observe the precautions in Woodward manual 82715, Guide for
Handling and Protection of Electronic Controls, Printed Circuit Boards, and
Modules.
Packing a Control
Use the following materials when returning a complete control:
• protective caps on any connectors;
• antistatic protective bags on all electronic modules;
• packing materials that will not damage the surface of the unit;
• at least 100 mm (4 inches) of tightly packed, industry-approved packing
material;
• a packing carton with double walls;
• a strong tape around the outside of the carton for increased strength.
192 Woodward
Return Authorization Number

When returning equipment to Woodward, please telephone and ask for the
Customer Service Department [1 (800) 523-2831 in North America or
+1 (970) 482-5811]. They will help expedite the processing of your order through
our distributors or local service facility. To expedite the repair process, contact
Woodward in advance to obtain a Return Authorization Number, and arrange for
issue of a purchase order for the item(s) to be repaired. No work can be started
until a purchase order is received.
NOTE
We highly recommend that you make arrangement in advance for return
shipments. Contact a Woodward customer service representative at
1 (800) 523-2831 in North America or +1 (970) 482-5811 for instructions and
for a Return Authorization Number.
Replacement Parts
When ordering replacement parts for controls, include the following information:
• the part number(s) (XXXX-XXXX) that is on the enclosure nameplate;
• the unit serial number, which is also on the nameplate.
How to Contact Woodward

In North America use the following address when shipping or corresponding:
Woodward Governor Company
PO Box 1519
1000 East Drake Rd
Fort Collins CO 80522-1519, USA
Telephone—+1 (970) 482-5811 (24 hours a day)

Toll-free Phone (in North America)—1 (800) 523-2831
Fax—+1 (970) 498-3058
For assistance outside North America, call one of the following international
Woodward facilities to obtain the address and phone number of the facility
nearest your location where you will be able to get information and service.
Facility Phone Number

Brazil +55 (19) 3708 4800
India +91 (129) 230 7111
Japan +81 (476) 93-4661
The Netherlands +31 (23) 5661111
You can also contact the Woodward Customer Service Department or consult
our worldwide directory on Woodward’s website (www.woodward.com) for the
name of your nearest Woodward distributor or service facility.
Woodward 193
Engineering Services
Woodward Industrial Controls Engineering Services offers the following after-
sales support for Woodward products. For these services, you can contact us by
telephone, by email, or through the Woodward website.
• Technical Support
• Product Training
• Field Service
Contact information:
Telephone—+1 (970) 482-5811
Toll-free Phone (in North America)—1 (800) 523-2831
Email—icinfo@woodward.com
Website—www.woodward.com
Technical Support is available through our many worldwide locations or our

authorized distributors, depending upon the product. This service can assist you
with technical questions or problem solving during normal business hours.
Emergency assistance is also available during non-business hours by phoning
our toll-free number and stating the urgency of your problem. For technical
support, please contact us via telephone, email us, or use our website and
reference Customer Services and then Technical Support.
Product Training is available at many of our worldwide locations (standard

classes). We also offer customized classes, which can be tailored to your needs
and can be held at one of our locations or at your site. This training, conducted
by experienced personnel, will assure that you will be able to maintain system
reliability and availability. For information concerning training, please contact us
via telephone, email us, or use our website and reference Customer Services
and then Product Training.
Field Service engineering on-site support is available, depending on the product

and location, from one of our many worldwide locations or from one of our
authorized distributors. The field engineers are experienced both on Woodward
products as well as on much of the non-Woodward equipment with which our
products interface. For field service engineering assistance, please contact us
via telephone, email us, or use our website and reference Customer Services
and then Technical Support.
194 Woodward
Technical Assistance
If you need to telephone for technical assistance, you will need to provide the following information.
Please write it down here before phoning:
General
Your Name
Site Location
Phone Number
Fax Number
Prime Mover Information

Engine/Turbine Model Number
Manufacturer
Number of Cylinders (if applicable)
Type of Fuel (gas, gaseous, steam, etc)
Rating
Application
Control/Governor Information
Please list all Woodward governors, actuators, and electronic controls in your system:
Woodward Part Number and Revision Letter
Control Description or Governor Type
Serial Number
Serial Number
Serial Number
If you have an electronic or programmable control, please have the adjustment setting positions or
the menu settings written down and with you at the time of the call.
Woodward 195
196 Woodward
EGCP-3 MC Control Specifications
Please refer to the EGCP-3 Installation Manual 26122 for all control specifications.
We appreciate your comments about the content of our publications.
Send comments to: icinfo@woodward.com
Please include the manual number from the front cover of this publication.
PO Box 1519, Fort Collins CO 80522-1519, USA

1000 East Drake Road, Fort Collins CO 80525, USA
Phone +1 (970) 482-5811 • Fax +1 (970) 498-3058
Email and Website—www.woodward.com
Woodward has company-owned plants, subsidiaries, and branches,

as well as authorized distributors and other authorized service and sales facilities throughout the world.
Complete address / phone / fax / email information for all locations is available on our website.
04/9/F

Egcp3 MC

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Egcp3 MC

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Egcp3 MC

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operation Manual

MC (Master Control) Model

Electronic controls contain static-sensitive parts. Observe the following

CAUTION—indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could

Revisions—Text changes are indicated by a black line alongside the text.

ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE AWARENESS ................................................. IV

CHAPTER 8. APPLICATION OVERVIEW ......................................................111

CHAPTER 22. SERVICE OPTIONS ............................................................. 191

Illustrations and Tables

Figure 2-1a. EGCP-3 Front Panel & Operator Interface ........................................7

Table 2-1. Security Access Codes .......................................................................33

Electrostatic Discharge Awareness

Follow these precautions when working with or near the control.

1. Before doing maintenance on the electronic control, discharge the static

3. Keep plastic, vinyl, and Styrofoam materials (such as plastic or Styrofoam

• Do not touch any part of the PCB except the edges.

• Do not touch the electrical conductors, the connectors, or the

• Display/Keypad Interface, local setup/monitoring or remote HMI

Front Panel Display

Inter EGCP-3 communications are performed by LON interface. The two-wire

Power and Energy Metering

Many of these parameters are also available as analog outputs to be used by

Peaking and Demand Operation

Automatic Power Transfer Switch (ATS)

The MC synchronizer has two modes of synchronization, Phase Matching or

Additionally there are four modes of operation:

Additional synchronizer features include: deadbus closures, voltage matching,

Real Load Control

Figure 2-1a. EGCP-3 Front Panel & Operator Interface

Figure 2-1b. Keypad

There are three modes of keypad/display operation: Alarm, Configure, and

Alarm/Event, Status, and Configuration Keys:

The ALARM/EVENT KEY is used to access the alarm and

The ALARM CLEAR KEY is used to acknowledge and

Navigation and Adjustment Keys

The SCROLL KEY is used to move the screen’s cursor up,

The ESCAPE KEY is used to move upwards (out of) the

The ENTER KEY is used to move downwards (into) the

Status Menu Keys

Press the SYSTEM STATUS key to display general

ENGINE STATUS is not available on the MC version. The

Press the GEN STATUS key to display the three phase

Press the SYNC STATUS key to display status information

Press the KW LOAD STATUS key to display the unit’s kW

Press the PF/KVAR STATUS key to display VAR/PF Mode

Press the SEQUENCE key to display status information

Press the ATS STATUS key to display status information

LEFT HAND LCD DISPLAY RIGHT HAND LCD DISPLAY

kw load status kw load status

synchronizer status synchronizer status

First Time Startup

Figure 2-2a EGCP-3 Navigation (1)

From Previous Page

Shutdowns and Alarms

Figure 2-2b. EGCP-3 Navigation (2)

ENTER From Previous Page

AO 1 Low Cal Value

SCROLL AO 1 Low Cal Value

ENTER AO 1 High Cal Value